Krone BiG M 450 CV (BM105-14) Operating Instructions


Add to my manuals
402 Pages

advertisement

Krone BiG M 450 CV (BM105-14) Operating Instructions | Manualzz

Original Operating Instructions

Document no.: 150000762_03_en

BM105-14

Self-Propelled Mower Conditioner

BiG M 450 CV

From machine no.: 1012756

Contact

Maschinenfabrik Bernard Krone GmbH & Co. KG

Heinrich-Krone-Straße 10

48480 Spelle

Germany

Telephone switchboard + 49 (0) 59 77/935-0

Telefax switchboard

Telefax spare parts warehouse domestic

+ 49 (0) 59 77/935-339

+ 49 (0) 59 77/935-239

Telefax spare parts warehouse export + 49 (0) 59 77/935-359

Internet www.landmaschinen.krone.de

www.mediathek.krone.de/

Information for enquiries and orders

Type

Vehicle identification number

Year of manufacture

Contact data of your dealer

2

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

2

2.5.2

2.5.3

2.5.4

2.6

2.7

2.7.1

2.7.2

2.4.10

2.4.11

2.4.12

2.4.13

2.4.14

2.4.15

2.4.16

2.4.17

2.4.18

2.4.19

2.4.20

2.4.21

2.4.22

2.4.23

2.5

2.5.1

2.1

2.2

2.3

2.4

2.4.1

2.4.2

2.4.3

2.4.4

2.4.5

2.4.6

2.4.7

2.4.8

2.4.9

1

1.1

1.2

1.3

1.4

1.5

1.5.1

1.5.2

1.5.3

1.5.4

1.5.5

1.5.6

1.5.7

3

4

4.1

4.1.1

4.2

4.3

5

5.1

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Contents

Information on This Document...............................................................................................  11

Validity .......................................................................................................................................  11

Re-ordering ................................................................................................................................  11

Applicable documents................................................................................................................  11

Target group of this document ...................................................................................................  11

How to use this document .........................................................................................................  11

Directories and references.........................................................................................................  11

Information on direction .............................................................................................................  12

Term “machine”..........................................................................................................................  12

Figures .......................................................................................................................................  12

Scope of the document ..............................................................................................................  12

Means of representation ............................................................................................................  12

Conversion table ........................................................................................................................  14

Safety ........................................................................................................................................  16

Intended use ..............................................................................................................................  16

Reasonably foreseeable misuse................................................................................................  16

Service life of the machine.........................................................................................................  17

Basic safety instructions ............................................................................................................  17

Importance of operating instructions..........................................................................................  17

Personnel qualification of the operating personnel ....................................................................  17

Personnel qualification of the technicians..................................................................................  18

Children in danger .....................................................................................................................  18

Structural modifications on the machine ....................................................................................  18

Additional equipment and spare parts .......................................................................................  18

Jobs on the machine..................................................................................................................  19

Operational safety: Technically sound condition .......................................................................  19

Danger zones ............................................................................................................................  20

Ensuring functionality of safety devices .....................................................................................  22

Personal protective equipment ..................................................................................................  22

Safety markings on the machine ...............................................................................................  23

Road safety................................................................................................................................  23

Parking the machine safely .......................................................................................................  24

Consumables .............................................................................................................................  24

Chemicals ..................................................................................................................................  25

Dangers arising from environment.............................................................................................  25

Sources of danger on the machine ............................................................................................  26

Dangers in connection with certain activities: climbing up and down ........................................  28

Dangers in connection with certain activities: Working on the machine ....................................  28

Dangers in connection with certain activities: checking and charging batteries ........................  30

Dangers in connection with certain activities: working on wheels and tyres..............................  30

Behaviour in dangerous situations and in case of accidents .....................................................  30

Safety routines ...........................................................................................................................  31

Shutting down and safeguarding the machine...........................................................................  31

Securing raised machine and machine parts against lowering..................................................  31

Carrying out oil level check and oil and filter element changes safely.......................................  32

Running actuator test.................................................................................................................  32

Safety labels on the machine.....................................................................................................  32

Safety features...........................................................................................................................  54

SMV emblem .............................................................................................................................  56

Fire extinguisher ........................................................................................................................  57

Data memory ............................................................................................................................  58

Machine Description................................................................................................................  59

Machine overview ......................................................................................................................  59

Content of the storage compartments on the machine ..............................................................  60

Labelling ....................................................................................................................................  60

Function description...................................................................................................................  61

Technical Data..........................................................................................................................  62

Consumables .............................................................................................................................  64

3

Contents

5.1.1

5.1.2

5.1.3

5.1.4

5.1.5

5.2

6

6.5

6.5.1

6.5.1.1

6.5.1.2

6.5.1.3

6.5.1.4

6.5.1.5

6.5.1.6

6.5.1.7

6.5.1.8

6.5.2

6.6

6.7

6.8

6.9

6.10

6.1

6.2

6.3

6.3.1

6.3.1.1

6.3.1.2

6.3.1.3

6.3.1.4

6.3.1.5

6.3.1.6

6.3.2

6.3.3

6.4

6.11

6.11.1

6.11.2

6.11.3

6.11.4

6.11.5

6.11.6

6.11.7

6.11.8

6.12

6.12.1

6.12.2

6.12.3

6.12.4

7

7.1

7.2

7.3

7.4

7.5

8

8.1

8.2

Oils.............................................................................................................................................  65

Lubricating grease .....................................................................................................................  66

Coolant ......................................................................................................................................  67

Refrigerant (air conditioning) .....................................................................................................  67

Fuel/urea....................................................................................................................................  67

Tyres ..........................................................................................................................................  68

Control and Display Elements ................................................................................................  69

Overview of operating elements ................................................................................................  69

Opening doors and windows of cabin .......................................................................................  69

Control and display elements on the steering column ...............................................................  72

Steering column switch ..............................................................................................................  72

Activating horn ...........................................................................................................................  72

Switching direction indicators on/off ..........................................................................................  73

Switching parking light/dipped beam on/off ...............................................................................  73

Switching full beam on/off ..........................................................................................................  74

Actuating headlamp flasher .......................................................................................................  75

Switching windshield wipers on/off ...........................................................................................  75

Warning lights ............................................................................................................................  76

Switching the flashing warning light on/off .................................................................................  77

Actuating service brake .............................................................................................................  77

Lighting ......................................................................................................................................  78

Light control unit ........................................................................................................................  78

Road travel lighting ....................................................................................................................  79

Working lights ............................................................................................................................  80

Switching and saving working lights via “Memory” key..............................................................  81

Warning beacons .......................................................................................................................  81

Ladder lighting ...........................................................................................................................  82

Maintenance lighting ..................................................................................................................  83

Wiper on left/on right..................................................................................................................  84

Setting mirror .............................................................................................................................  84

Interior lighting ...........................................................................................................................  86

Operating elements on control lever ..........................................................................................  87

Control and display elements on the keypad .............................................................................  89

Main mode switch ......................................................................................................................  91

Quick-stop switch.......................................................................................................................  92

Ignition lock ................................................................................................................................  92

Automatic climate control...........................................................................................................  93

Overview of automatic climate control .......................................................................................  93

Switching on automatic climate control......................................................................................  94

Setting cabin temperature..........................................................................................................  95

Switching air conditioning mode on/off ......................................................................................  96

Switching REHEAT mode on/off ................................................................................................  96

Manually setting the evaporator fan speed ................................................................................  97

Switching temperature display between degrees Celsius and degrees Fahrenheit ..................  98

Malfunctions indicated on display ..............................................................................................  98

Sockets ....................................................................................................................................  100

Cigarette lighter 12 V/24 V socket ...........................................................................................  100

12 V sockets ............................................................................................................................  100

Diagnostic socket ISOBUS/diagnostic socket KRONE............................................................  101

USB connection .......................................................................................................................  101

Terminal ..................................................................................................................................  102

Display design .........................................................................................................................  102

Description display...................................................................................................................  103

Navigation module ...................................................................................................................  104

Input window ............................................................................................................................  105

Selection window .....................................................................................................................  107

Terminal machine functions .................................................................................................  109

Status line ................................................................................................................................  110

Malfunctions indicated on malfunction warning panel .............................................................  113

4

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Contents

10

10.1

10.2

10.3

10.4

10.5

10.6

9

9.1

9.2

9.3

9.3.1

9.4

9.5

8.2.1

8.2.2

8.3

8.3.1

8.3.2

8.3.3

8.4

8.5

8.6

8.7

12

12.1

12.2

12.3

12.4

12.5

12.6

12.7

12.8

11

11.1

11.2

11.2.1

11.2.1.1

11.2.1.2

11.2.2

11.2.3

11.2.4

11.2.5

11.2.6

11.2.7

11.3

11.3.1

11.3.2

11.3.3

11.3.4

13

13.1

13.1.1

13.1.2

13.1.3

13.2

13.2.1

13.3

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Warning lights - Filling level urea tank .....................................................................................  113

Indicator lamps - urea quality, errors or manipulation on the exhaust aftertreatment system .  114

Keys in the title bar ..................................................................................................................  115

“Counters” menu ......................................................................................................................  115

“Error” menu.............................................................................................................................  124

Main menu ...............................................................................................................................  128

Direct input “Field mode” .........................................................................................................  128

Information area.......................................................................................................................  129

Engine and driving data display range.....................................................................................  129

Traction drive indicator lights ...................................................................................................  130

Terminal – Menus...................................................................................................................  134

Menu structure .........................................................................................................................  134

Bringing up menu level ............................................................................................................  140

Navigating in menus ................................................................................................................  141

Changing/saving parameter.....................................................................................................  142

“Diagnostics” menu explanation ..............................................................................................  142

Menu "key test" explanation.....................................................................................................  144

Initial operation ......................................................................................................................  145

Checklist for initial operation ....................................................................................................  145

Mounting fire extinguisher........................................................................................................  146

Mounting licence plate .............................................................................................................  146

Mounting guard cloths .............................................................................................................  146

Installing the blades .................................................................................................................  152

Mounting the anti-twist lock on the lighting module .................................................................  153

Start-up ...................................................................................................................................  154

Check before start-up ..............................................................................................................  154

Setting driver’s seat .................................................................................................................  155

Air-cushioned comfort seat ......................................................................................................  155

Operating air-cushioned comfort seat (for "Standard" version) ...............................................  156

Operating air-cushioned comfort seat (for "ACTIVO" version).................................................  158

Steering column adjustment ....................................................................................................  162

Setting the terminal ..................................................................................................................  163

Monitor for camera monitoring .................................................................................................  164

Sun visor ..................................................................................................................................  165

Adjustable air nozzles ..............................................................................................................  165

Inside rear mirror......................................................................................................................  166

General aspects.......................................................................................................................  166

Instructional seat......................................................................................................................  166

Cooling box (version with "Insulated thermobox") ...................................................................  167

Topping up fresh water ............................................................................................................  167

Drawer for first-aid kit and operating instructions ....................................................................  167

Commissioning – mowing operation ...................................................................................  169

Connecting the front mounted mower......................................................................................  169

Decoupling the front mounted mower ......................................................................................  172

Mounting the side mounted mowers ........................................................................................  174

Dismounting the side mounted mowers...................................................................................  177

Mounting the standard swathing ..............................................................................................  180

Dismounting the standard swathing.........................................................................................  182

Mounting the cross conveyor ...................................................................................................  185

Dismounting the cross conveyor..............................................................................................  188

Driving and Transport ...........................................................................................................  191

Preparing the machine for road travel .....................................................................................  191

Transport position ....................................................................................................................  191

Checking lockings of lateral mowers .......................................................................................  192

Checking side guards of lateral mowers ..................................................................................  192

Starting engine.........................................................................................................................  193

Observing warning lights .........................................................................................................  195

Behaviour after the engine has stalled ....................................................................................  195

5

Contents

14

14.1

14.1.1

14.1.2

14.1.2.1

14.1.3

14.1.4

14.1.5

14.2

14.3

14.3.1

14.3.2

14.4

14.4.1

14.4.2

14.5

13.4

13.4.1

13.4.2

13.4.3

13.4.3.1

13.4.4

13.5

13.5.1

13.5.2

13.6

13.7

13.8

13.9

13.10

13.11

13.11.1

13.12

13.12.1

13.12.2

15

15.3.1

15.3.2

15.3.3

15.3.4

15.3.5

15.3.6

15.3.7

15.3.8

15.3.8.1

15.3.9

15.3.10

15.1

15.1.1

15.1.2

15.1.3

15.2

15.2.1

15.2.2

15.2.3

15.2.4

15.2.5

15.2.6

15.2.7

15.3

Starting up the machine ...........................................................................................................  196

Setting the acceleration behaviour ..........................................................................................  196

Notices on driving the machine................................................................................................  197

Driving forwards and stopping .................................................................................................  197

Cruise control...........................................................................................................................  198

Driving backward and stopping................................................................................................  199

Stopping the machine ..............................................................................................................  199

Stopping machine by using control lever .................................................................................  200

Stopping machine with the service brake ................................................................................  201

Applying parking brake ............................................................................................................  201

Switching off the engine...........................................................................................................  203

Wheel chocks...........................................................................................................................  203

Main battery switch ..................................................................................................................  204

Parking the machine ................................................................................................................  205

Recovering the Machine ..........................................................................................................  205

Release the parking brake manually .......................................................................................  206

Preparing the machine for shipment ........................................................................................  207

Lashing points..........................................................................................................................  207

Removing the machine wheels ................................................................................................  207

Operation ................................................................................................................................  208

Field Mode ...............................................................................................................................  208

Working position ......................................................................................................................  208

Field mode on slopes...............................................................................................................  209

Moving front mounted mower into the central position ............................................................  209

Operating mowers ...................................................................................................................  210

Fast change of direction of travel (fast reversing)....................................................................  211

Switching the mower drive on and off ......................................................................................  212

Folding up/folding down side guards .......................................................................................  213

Front guard ..............................................................................................................................  215

Folding up the front guard........................................................................................................  215

Fold down the front guard ........................................................................................................  216

Operating support jack.............................................................................................................  216

Moving support jack into transport position .............................................................................  216

Moving support jack into support position................................................................................  217

PowerSplit................................................................................................................................  217

Settings...................................................................................................................................  219

Setting in the terminal ..............................................................................................................  219

Manual settings........................................................................................................................  219

Setting cutting height ...............................................................................................................  220

Setting the mower relief ...........................................................................................................  221

Settings on front mounted mower ............................................................................................  222

Adjusting the front mounted mower side guards .....................................................................  222

Set conditioner speed ..............................................................................................................  223

Setting the degree of conditioning ...........................................................................................  224

Increasing cutting height at front mounted mower with high-cut skids ....................................  224

Setting wide spreading ............................................................................................................  224

Setting swath width ..................................................................................................................  225

Checking deflector sheets .......................................................................................................  226

Settings on the side mounted mowers.....................................................................................  226

Adjusting the side mounted mower side guards ......................................................................  226

Checking/setting locking of side guards ..................................................................................  227

Setting the conditioner speed ..................................................................................................  228

Setting the auger speed...........................................................................................................  229

Adjusting the scraper sheet .....................................................................................................  231

Setting the degree of conditioning ...........................................................................................  231

Increasing the cutting height at the side mounted mowers by means of high-cut skids ..........  232

Setting wide spreading ............................................................................................................  232

Setting wide spreading sheet...................................................................................................  233

Impact damage protection system ...........................................................................................  233

Dismounting the bottom flap ....................................................................................................  234

6

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Contents

18

18.1

18.2

18.2.1

18.2.2

18.2.3

18.2.4

18.2.5

18.3

18.4

18.4.1

18.4.2

18.4.3

18.5

18.5.1

18.5.2

17

17.1

17.2

17.2.1

17.3

17.3.1

17.3.2

17.4

17.5

17.6

17.7

17.8

17.9

17.10

17.11

17.12

17.12.1

17.12.2

17.12.3

17.12.4

17.12.5

17.12.6

17.13

16

16.1

16.1.1

16.1.2

16.1.3

16.1.4

16.1.5

16.1.6

16.1.7

16.1.8

16.1.9

16.1.10

16.1.11

16.1.12

16.1.13

16.1.14

16.1.15

16.1.16

16.1.17

16.1.18

16.2

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Maintenance - General Information......................................................................................  235

Maintenance table ...................................................................................................................  236

Maintenance – Before the season ...........................................................................................  236

Maintenance – After the season ..............................................................................................  237

Maintenance - once after 1 hour .............................................................................................  237

Maintenance – 6 times after every 10 hours............................................................................  237

Maintenance - Once after 50 hours .........................................................................................  237

Maintenance – Once after 500 hours ......................................................................................  238

Maintenance – Once after 1,000 km........................................................................................  238

Maintenance – at the beginning of the cold season ................................................................  238

Maintenance - Every 10 hours, but at least once a day...........................................................  238

Maintenance - Every 50 hours .................................................................................................  239

Maintenance - every 100 hours ...............................................................................................  240

Maintenance - every 250 hours ...............................................................................................  240

Maintenance - Every 500 hours ...............................................................................................  240

Maintenance - every 1,000 hours but at least at the end of the season ..................................  242

Maintenance – Every 1,000 hours, but at least before the season..........................................  242

Maintenance – Every 2,000 hours ..........................................................................................  243

Maintenance – Every 2 years ..................................................................................................  243

Maintenance - as required .......................................................................................................  243

Tightening torques ...................................................................................................................  243

Maintenance - Engine ............................................................................................................  247

Engine overview .....................................................................................................................  248

Dirt deposits in engine compartment .......................................................................................  248

Cleaning engine compartment with compressed air ................................................................  248

Engine oil level.........................................................................................................................  249

Checking engine oil level ........................................................................................................  249

Topping up engine oil ..............................................................................................................  250

Cleaning fuel tank ....................................................................................................................  250

Fuel prefilter/water separator ...................................................................................................  251

Refuelling .................................................................................................................................  252

Urea filter .................................................................................................................................  253

Topping up urea solution .........................................................................................................  254

Vent fuel filter ...........................................................................................................................  255

Engine coolant .........................................................................................................................  256

Checking the engine coolant level ...........................................................................................  257

Checking engine piping ...........................................................................................................  258

Checking pipework in the air conditioning and heating system ...............................................  258

Check pipework of the engine cooling system and the charge air...........................................  259

Checking pipework of the air intake .........................................................................................  259

Checking fuel lines...................................................................................................................  260

Check pipework of the exhaust aftertreatment system ............................................................  260

Checking the profile clamp of the catalytic converter ..............................................................  261

Cleaning air filter ......................................................................................................................  262

Maintenance – Basic Machine ..............................................................................................  264

Checking/refilling windscreen washer system .........................................................................  264

Maintaining air conditioning and heating .................................................................................  265

Components of air conditioning ...............................................................................................  265

Carrying out a visual inspection at the receiver/dryer ..............................................................  266

Checking the condition and filling quantity of refrigerant ........................................................  267

Replacing/cleaning fresh air filter.............................................................................................  268

Replacing/cleaning circulation filter .........................................................................................  268

Cleaning cooler and cooler compartment ................................................................................  269

Maintaining chassis .................................................................................................................  270

Checking attachment of steering cylinder ................................................................................  270

Checking fitting of track rod .....................................................................................................  270

Checking the hub cover of the rear axle, with front wheel drive version..................................  271

Maintaining belt drives ............................................................................................................  271

Checking kraftband ..................................................................................................................  271

Checking pulley .......................................................................................................................  271

7

Contents

22

22.1

22.2

22.3

22.4

22.5

21

21.1

21.2

21.3

21.4

21.5

21.6

23

23.1

23.1.1

23.1.2

23.1.3

18.5.3

18.6

18.6.1

18.6.2

18.7

18.8

18.9

19

19.6.3

19.6.3.1

19.6.3.2

19.6.3.3

19.6.4

19.6.5

19.6.6

19.6.6.1

19.6.7

19.6.8

19.7

19.8

19.1

19.2

19.3

19.4

19.4.1

19.4.2

19.4.3

19.4.4

19.4.5

19.4.6

19.4.7

19.4.8

19.5

19.6

19.6.1

19.6.2

20

20.1

20.2

20.3

8

Checking the belt tension ........................................................................................................  272

Maintaining tyres and wheels ..................................................................................................  273

Checking/maintaining tyres......................................................................................................  273

Retighten wheel nuts ...............................................................................................................  274

Tighten the screw connections on the central support/chassis ...............................................  274

Re-adjust the transport lock .....................................................................................................  275

Checking the fire extinguisher .................................................................................................  275

Maintenance – mowing units ................................................................................................  277

Dismounting/mounting the conditioner drive guard .................................................................  277

Dismounting/mounting the guard for the front mounted mower input gearbox ........................  277

Dismounting/mounting the auger drive guard ..........................................................................  278

Maintaining belt drives .............................................................................................................  278

Checking kraftband ..................................................................................................................  278

Checking pulley .......................................................................................................................  279

Checking/adjusting the belt tension of the front mounted mower conditioner drive.................  279

Tensioning/detensioning the conditioner drive belt tension front mounted mower ..................  280

Checking/adjusting the belt tension of the auger drive ............................................................  281

Tensioning/detensioning the auger drive belt drive .................................................................  282

Changing kraftband “belt drive side mounted mowers” ...........................................................  283

Change kraftband "belt drive of front mounted mower" ...........................................................  286

Checking the tines on the tine conditioner ...............................................................................  287

Cutterbar ..................................................................................................................................  287

Rotary hub ...............................................................................................................................  287

Replacing the shear bolt at the rotary hub ...............................................................................  288

Check/change blades ..............................................................................................................  290

Checking the blade for wear ....................................................................................................  290

Changing blades for the “blade screw connection” version .....................................................  291

Changing blades for the “blade quick fastener” version ..........................................................  292

Checking/replacing retaining bolts ...........................................................................................  292

Checking/replacing blade carrier .............................................................................................  293

Checking/replacing cutting discs/mower drums.......................................................................  294

Checking the wear limit on cutting discs/mower drums ...........................................................  294

Checking/replacing linings on cutterbar ...................................................................................  295

Oil level inspection and oil change on the cutter bar ...............................................................  296

Check guard cloths ..................................................................................................................  301

Vent friction clutch ...................................................................................................................  302

Maintenance - Lubrication ....................................................................................................  305

Lubricating universal shafts .....................................................................................................  306

Lubricate the intermediate gear ...............................................................................................  307

Lubrication chart - machine .....................................................................................................  308

Maintenance – Central Lubrication System .......................................................................  310

Distributor blocks of central lubrication system........................................................................  310

Lubricants ................................................................................................................................  314

Filling the lubricant tank ...........................................................................................................  316

Check filling level .....................................................................................................................  317

Starting intermediate lubrication ..............................................................................................  317

Searching for the error in the central lubrication system .........................................................  317

Maintenance - Hydraulic System..........................................................................................  318

Pressure limiting valves ...........................................................................................................  318

Hydraulic oil .............................................................................................................................  319

Maintaining hydraulic oil tank...................................................................................................  319

Changing high-pressure filter...................................................................................................  322

Checking hydraulic hoses ........................................................................................................  322

Maintenance – Electrics ........................................................................................................  323

Batteries...................................................................................................................................  323

Cleaning and maintaining batteries .........................................................................................  324

Charging batteries ...................................................................................................................  324

Replacing batteries .................................................................................................................  325

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

26

26.1

26.2

26.3

26.4

26.4.1

26.5

26.6

26.7

27

28

29

29.1

29.1.1

29.1.2

29.1.2.1

29.1.2.2

29.1.2.3

29.1.2.4

29.1.2.5

29.1.2.6

29.1.2.7

29.1.3

29.1.3.1

29.1.3.2

29.1.4

29.1.4.1

29.1.4.2

29.1.4.3

29.1.4.4

29.1.4.5

29.1.4.6

29.1.5

23.2

24

24.1

24.2

24.3

24.4

24.5

24.6

24.6.1

25

25.1

25.1.1

25.1.2

25.1.3

25.1.4

25.1.5

25.1.5.1

25.2

25.2.1

25.2.2

25.3

25.4

25.5

25.6

Contents

Maintaining starter ...................................................................................................................  327

Maintenance - Gearbox .........................................................................................................  329

Overview of gearboxes ............................................................................................................  329

Maintaining transfer gearbox ...................................................................................................  330

Maintaining input gearbox of front mounted mower.................................................................  332

Maintaining main gearbox of front mounted mower.................................................................  333

Maintain main gearbox of side mounted mowers ....................................................................  334

Maintaining wheel hub gearbox ...............................................................................................  335

Maintaining wheel hub gearbox front/right ...............................................................................  335

Malfunction, Cause and Remedy..........................................................................................  337

Electrical/electronic system fault..............................................................................................  337

Overview of control units .........................................................................................................  337

Overview of fuses ....................................................................................................................  337

Overview sensors ....................................................................................................................  341

Overview of actuators ..............................................................................................................  341

LED displays on the control units ............................................................................................  343

LED display on KRONE SmartConnect ...................................................................................  343

Emergency manual operation ..................................................................................................  345

Emergency unfolding of the side mounted mowers .................................................................  345

Emergency unfolding of the side mounted mowers .................................................................  348

External starting of the machine ..............................................................................................  352

Calibrate mower load relief ......................................................................................................  353

Calibrate traction drive .............................................................................................................  354

Calibrate rear axle straight-ahead position ..............................................................................  354

Repairs, maintenance and settings by technicians ...........................................................  355

Setting the sensors ..................................................................................................................  356

Jacking up the machine ...........................................................................................................  357

Calibrating the front and rear axle ...........................................................................................  359

Maintaining the rear axle with front wheel drive version ..........................................................  364

Checking the hub bearing of the rear axle, with front wheel drive version ..............................  364

Change engine coolant ............................................................................................................  365

Change transfer gearbox filter .................................................................................................  365

Setting the lifting height at the front mounted mower ..............................................................  366

Storage....................................................................................................................................  368

Waste disposal.......................................................................................................................  371

Appendix.................................................................................................................................  372

CCI.Control Mobile...................................................................................................................  372

Device system requirements ...................................................................................................  372 iOS settings..............................................................................................................................  372

General ....................................................................................................................................  372

Geofencing ..............................................................................................................................  373

Farmpilot ..................................................................................................................................  374

FMIS interface..........................................................................................................................  374

FTP upload ..............................................................................................................................  375

Export.......................................................................................................................................  375

Automatic recording of the field ...............................................................................................  376

Start-up ....................................................................................................................................  376

Configure WLAN (WiFi) connection .........................................................................................  376

Enter export data .....................................................................................................................  378

Operation .................................................................................................................................  378

Main menu ...............................................................................................................................  378

“Customer” menu .....................................................................................................................  379

“Orders” menu..........................................................................................................................  382

“Live View” menu .....................................................................................................................  385

“Demo” menu ...........................................................................................................................  386

“Information” menu ..................................................................................................................  387

Malfunction, cause and remedy ...............................................................................................  387

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 9

Contents

30

31

Index........................................................................................................................................  390

Declaration of conformity .....................................................................................................  401

10

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

1

1.1

1.2

1.3

1.4

1.5

1.5.1

Information on This Document

Validity

1

1.1

Information on This Document

Validity

This document is valid for machines of type:

BM105-14 (BiG M 450 CV)

All information, illustrations and technical data in this document correspond to the latest state at the time of publication.

We reserve the right to make design changes at any time and without notification of reasons.

Re-ordering

If this document has become unusable in whole or in part, you can order a replacement, quoting the document number on the cover sheet. The document can additionally be downloaded via the KRONE Media Center http://www.mediathek.krone.de// .

Applicable documents

To ensure that the machine is used safely and as intended, observe the following further applicable documents.

• Operating instructions diesel engine, Liebherr Machines Bulle S.A.

• Circuit diagram, KRONE

• Spare parts list, KRONE

Target group of this document

This document aims at the operator of the machine who fulfills the minimum requirements of personnel qualification,

refer to page 17

.

How to use this document

Directories and references

Contents/headers

The contents and headers in this document ensure quick orientation in the chapters.

Index

The index contains catchwords in alphabetical order which enable to find information on a desired topic easily. The index can be found on the last pages of this document.

Cross references

Cross references to another place in the document or to another document are in the text with page number.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 11

1

1.5

Information on This Document

How to use this document

Examples:

• Check all screws on the machine for firm attachment,

refer to page 12

. ( INFORMATION : If you use this document in electronic form, you get to the link to the stated page by clicking with the mouse.)

• For further information, refer to the operating instructions of the universal shaft manufacturer.

1.5.2

Information on direction

Directional information in this document, such as front, rear, right and left, applies in the direction of travel of the machine.

1.5.3

1.5.4

1.5.5

Term “machine”

Throughout the rest of this document, the “mower conditioner” will also be referred to as the

“machine”.

Figures

The figures in this document do not always represent the exact machine type. The information that refers to the figure always corresponds to the machine type of this document.

Scope of the document

In addition to standard equipment, accessories kits and versions of the machine are described in this document. Your machine may deviate from this document.

1.5.6

Means of representation

Icons in the text

The following means of representation (icons) are used to present the text more clearly:

This arrow characterizes an action step . Several arrows in a row identify a sequence of actions to be performed step by step.

This icon identifies a prerequisite that has to be fulfilled to perform an action step or a sequence of actions.

This arrow marks the intermediate result of an action step.

This arrow identifies the result of an action step or sequence of actions.

This bullet point identifies an enumeration . If the bullet point is intended, it identifies the second level of the enumeration.

Icons in figures

The following icons can be used in illustrations:

12

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Icon

1

X

LH

Nm

Explanation

Reference sign for part

Icon

I

Dimensions (e. g. also W = width,

H = height, L = length)

Left side of machine

Direction of travel

Reference line for visible material

RH

Centre line

Tighten screws according to the tightening torque table

Open

Apply liquid lubricant (e.g. lubricating oil)

XXX Nm

Information on This Document

How to use this document

1

1.5

Explanation

Position of a part (e.g. move from position I to position II)

Magnification of display detail

Right side of machine

Direction of motion

Reference line for covered material

Cable routes

Tighten screws to the specified tightening torque

Closed

Apply lubricating grease

Warning signs

Warnings of dangers are separated from the remaining text as warning signs and are identified with a danger sign and signal words.

The warning signs must be read and the measures must be observed in order to prevent personal injury.

Explanation of danger sign

This is the danger sign that warns of a risk of injury.

Please observe all notes marked with the danger sign in order to avoid injuries or death.

Explanation of signal words

DANGER

The signal word DANGER warns of a hazardous situation which will result in serious injuries or death if the warning sign is ignored.

WARNING

The signal word WARNING warns of a hazardous situation which will result in serious injuries or death if the warning sign is ignored.

CAUTION

The signal word CAUTION warns of a hazardous situation which will result in minor to moderate injuries if the warning sign is ignored.

Example of a warning sign:

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 13

1

1.5

Information on This Document

How to use this document

1.5.7

WARNING

Eye damage caused by flying dirt particles

When cleaning with compressed air, dirt particles are ejected at high speed and could get into the eyes. Therefore eyes could be hurt.

„ Keep people away from the working area.

„ Wear personal protective equipment when performing cleaning work with compressed air

(e.g. eye protection).

Warnings of property damage/environmental damage

Warnings of property/environmental damage are separated from the remaining text and marked with "Notice".

Example:

NOTICE

Gearbox damage due to low oil level

The gearboxes could be damaged when the oil level is too low.

„ Check gear oil level at regular intervals and top up oil, if necessary.

„ Check gear oil level approx. 3 to 4 hours after the machine has been switched off. Check oil level only when machine is in horizontal position.

Notes with information and recommendations

Additional information and recommendations for trouble-free and productive operation of the machine are separated from the remaining text and marked with “Information”.

Example:

INFORMATION

Each safety label is provided with an order number and can be ordered directly from the manufacturer or from the authorized specialist dealer.

Conversion table

The following table can be used to convert metric units into US units.

Size

Area

Volume flow Litres per minute L/min

Cubic metres per hour m³/h

Force

Length

Power

SI units (metric)

Unit name Abbreviation

Hectare ha

Newton

Millimetre

Metre

Kilowatt

N mm m kW

Factor

2.47105

0.2642

4.4029

0.2248

0.03937

3.2808

1.3410

Inch-pound units

Unit name

Acre

US gallons per minute

Pound force

Inch

Foot

Horsepower

Abbreviation acres gpm lbf in.

ft.

hp

14

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Size

Pressure

Torque

Velocity

SI units (metric)

Unit name Abbreviation

Kilopascal kPa

Megapascal bar (non-SI)

Newtonmeter

MPa bar

Nm

Temperature Degrees Celsius °C

Information on This Document

How to use this document

Factor

0.1450

145.0377

14.5038

0.7376

Inch-pound units

Unit name Abbreviation

Pounds per square inch psi

8.8507

°Cx1.8+32

3.2808

pound-foot or foot-pound ft∙lbf pound-inch or inch-pound

Degrees

Fahrenheit in∙lbf

°F

Feet per minute ft/min

1

1.5

Volumes

Weight

Metres per minute

Metres per second

Kilometres per hour

Litres

Millilitre

Cubic centimetre

Kilogram m/min m/s km/h

L ml cm³ kg

3.2808

0.6215

0.2642

0.0338

0.0610

2.2046

Feet per second ft/s

Miles per hour mph

US gallon

US ounce

Cubic inch

US gal.

US oz.

in³

Pound lbs

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 15

2

2.1

2

Safety

Intended use

Safety

2.1

2.2

Intended use

This machine is a self-propelled mower conditioner with 3 disc mowers with integrated mower conditioners and is used to mow crops.

The crops designated for the intended use of this machine are stalk and leaf crops growing on the ground. This includes different live agricultural grasses and legume crops from early stage up to the end of the photosynthetic process.

The machine is designed exclusively for use in agriculture and may only be used when

• all safety installations specified in the operating instructions are present and in safety position;

• all safety information in the operating instructions are known and observed; this goes for

those in the chapter "Basic safety information", refer to page 17 as well as for those

comprised directly in the chapters of the operating instructions.

The machine may be used only by people who satisfy the personnel qualification requirements designated by the machine manufacturer, see

refer to page 17 .

These operating instructions are part of the machine and must therefore be at hand when the machine is in use. The operation of the machine is permitted only after respective instruction and in compliance with these operating instructions.

If the machine is used for applications which are not described in these operating instructions, this may result in serious injuries or death and damage to the machine and other property.

Unauthorised modifications to the machine may affect the properties of the machine or disrupt the proper operation. For this reason, unauthorised modifications shall exclude any liability of the manufacturer for consequential damage.

Intended use also comprises compliance with the terms of operation, maintenance, and repair specified by the manufacturer.

Reasonably foreseeable misuse

Any use beyond the intended use

refer to page 16 is regarded as improper use and is therefore

misuse according to the Machinery Directive. The manufacturer is not liable for damage resulting from this, the user alone bears the risk.

Such misuse is for example:

Processing of crops which are outside the intended use of the machine, refer to page 16

, such as:

• Undergrowth or bushes

• Dead plants such as straw or maize stalks

• Woody or very fibrous plants such as trees, cotton stalks or sugar cane

• Transport of people

• Transport of goods

• Exceeding the permitted technical gross weight

• Non-compliance with the safety labels on the machine and safety notes in the operating instructions

• Performing troubleshooting, setting, cleaning, repair and maintenance work contrary to the information in the operating instructions

• Unauthorised modifications to the machine

• Attachment of unauthorised or unapproved additional equipment

• Use of spare parts which are not KRONE original spare parts

• Stationary operation of the machine

16

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

2.3

2.4

2.4.1

2.4.2

Safety

Service life of the machine

Unauthorised modifications to the machine may affect the properties of the machine or disrupt proper operation. For this reason, unauthorised modifications will exclude any liability of the manufacturer for consequential damage.

2

2.3

Service life of the machine

• The service life of this machine depends on its proper operation and maintenance as well as the operating and harvesting conditions.

• By heeding the instructions and information in these operating instructions, permanent operational readiness and a long service life of the machine can be achieved.

• After each operating season, inspect the entire machine for wear and other damage.

• Replace damaged and worn components before recommissioning the machine.

• Carry out a full technical inspection of the machine after five years of machine operation and make a decision on further machine usage taking the results of this inspection into account.

• Theoretically, the service life of this machine is unlimited as all worn or damaged components can be replaced.

Basic safety instructions

Non-compliance with the safety instructions and warnings

Non-compliance with the safety instructions and warnings may result in injuries and damage to the environment and property.

Importance of operating instructions

The operating instructions are an important document and a part of the machine. They are intended for the user and contain information relevant to safety.

Only the procedures indicated in the operating instructions are reliable. If the operating instructions are not followed, people may be seriously injured or killed.

„ Before using the machine for the first time, read and follow all the "Basic safety instructions".

„ Before working, also read and observe the respective sections in the operating instructions.

„ Keep the operating instructions easily accessible for the machine user at all times.

„ Hand over the operating instructions to subsequent users.

Personnel qualification of the operating personnel

If the machine is not used properly, people may be seriously injured or killed. To avoid accidents, each person who works with the machine must satisfy the following minimum requirements:

• He is physically capable of controlling the machine.

• He can work safely with the machine in accordance with these operating instructions.

• He understands the method of operation of the machine within the scope of his work and can identify and avoid the dangers associated with the work.

• He has read the operating instructions and can implement the information in the operating instructions accordingly.

• He is familiar with driving vehicles safely.

• For road travel he has adequate knowledge of the highway code and has the stipulated driving licence.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 17

2

2.4

2.4.3

Safety

Basic safety instructions

Personnel qualification of the technicians

If the work (assembly, conversion, modification, extension, repairs, retrofitting) is performed improperly on the machine, people may be seriously or fatally injured. To avoid accidents, everyone who performs work according to these instructions must meet the following minimum requirements:

• Qualified professional, with relevant training.

• Capable of assembling the (partially) disassembled machine according to the assembly instructions provided by the manufacturer.

• Capable of extending, modifying or repairing the function of the machine according to the relevant instructions provided by the manufacturer.

• Ability to perform the work safely according to these instructions.

• Understands the mode of operation of the work to be performed and the machine and is able to identify and avoid risk in carrying out the necessary work.

• Has read these instructions and is able to implement the information explained in these instructions accordingly.

2.4.4

Children in danger

Children are not in a position to assess dangers and behave unpredictably.

Thus children are particularly at risk.

• Children are especially at risk when climbing up and down the machine.

• There is no possibility to secure children sufficiently on the self-propelled machine.

• Vibrations can be particularly harmful to children's bodies.

• Children may initiate dangerous movements of the machine.

„ Never take children on the self-propelled harvester.

„ Keep children away from the machine.

„ Keep children away from consumables.

„ Make sure that there are no children in the danger zone, especially when starting and triggering machine movements.

2.4.5

2.4.6

Structural modifications on the machine

Structural changes and enhancements may impair the functionality and operational safety of the machine. People may be seriously injured or killed as a result.

Structural changes and enhancements are not permitted.

Additional equipment and spare parts

Additional equipment and spare parts that do not correspond to the requirements of the manufacturer may affect the operational safety of the machine and cause accidents.

„ To ensure operational safety, use original parts or standard parts which correspond to the requirements of the manufacturer.

18

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

2.4.7

2.4.8

Safety

Basic safety instructions

2

2.4

Jobs on the machine

Control of moving machine

The moving machine requires that the driver/operator is able to react quickly at any time.

Otherwise, the machine may move uncontrollably and cause serious injuries and death.

„ Start the engine from the driver's seat only.

„ While the vehicle is travelling, never leave the driver's seat.

„ Never climb in or out of the machine while the machine is moving.

Control of the machine during operation

While the machine is in operation, always ensure that the drivers/operators can intervene quickly at any time in the machine control. Otherwise, the machine may move in an uncontrolled manner and seriously injure or kill people.

When the machine is in operation, the driver/operator must be in the cabin.

On-board instructors when using the machine for work (passenger seat)

On-board instructors may fall and be injured due to movements of the machine.

• Never use the passenger seat for road travel.

• Use the passenger seat for instruction purposes during operation in the field only.

Passengers

Passengers can be seriously injured by the machine or fall from the machine and be overrun.

Ejected objects may strike and injure passengers.

„ As a result, make sure that no one except the operator is on the machine.

Operational safety: Technically sound condition

Operation is only allowed after proper start-up

The operational safety of the machine is not ensured when it is not started up properly according to these operating instructions. Thus accidents may be caused and persons may be seriously injured and killed.

„

Only use the machine after proper start-up, refer to page 154

.

Technically sound state of the machine

Improper maintenance and setting could influence the operational safety of the machine and cause accidents. Thus there is a risk of serious injuries or death.

„ All maintenance and setting work must be performed according to the chapters

“Maintenance and Setting”.

„ Before performing any maintenance and setting work, shut down and safeguard the machine,

refer to page 31 .

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 19

2

2.4

Safety

Basic safety instructions

Danger resulting from damage to the machine

Damage to the machine may impair the operational safety of the machine and cause accidents.

As a result, people may be seriously injured or killed. The following parts of the machine are particularly important for safety:

• Brakes

• Steering

• Safety Devices

• Connecting devices

• Lighting

• Hydraulics

• Tyres

• Universal shaft

If there are doubts about the operational safety of the machine, for example due to an unexpected change to the operational behaviour, visible damage or leaking consumables:

„

„Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 31

.

„ Immediately eliminate potential causes of damage, for example heavy soiling, or tighten slack screws.

„ Determine the cause of damage according to these operating instructions and repair the

damage, if possible, refer to page 337 .

„ In case of damage which may affect operational safety and cannot be repaired according to these operating instructions: Have damage repaired by a qualified service centre.

Technical limit values

If the technical limit values of the machine are not observed, the machine may be damaged. As a result, accidents may occur and people may be seriously injured or killed. Observance of the following technical limit values is particularly important for safety:

• Maximum permitted total weight

• Maximum permitted axle loads

• Maximum permitted transport height and width

• Maximum permitted speed

„

Observe the limits, refer to page 62

.

2.4.9

Danger zones

If the machine is switched on, its surrounding can present a danger zone.

Avoid entering the danger zone of the machine by observing the minimum safety distance.

If the safety distance is not observed, people may be seriously injured or killed.

„ Do not switch on the drives and engine if the minimum safety distance has not been observed.

„ If people fail to observe the minimum safety distance, switch off the drives.

„ Switch the machine off in shunting and field mode.

The safety distance is:

For machine in shunting operation and field mode

In front of the machine 30 m

Behind the machine 5 m

Laterally to the machine 3 m

20

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Safety

Basic safety instructions

For machine switched on without driving motion

In front of the machine 3 m

Behind the machine 5 m

Laterally to the machine 3 m

The safety distances specified here are minimum distances in terms of intended use. If necessary, these safety distances must be increased according to the operating and ambient conditions.

„ Before working in the danger zone of the machine: Shut down and secure the machine,

refer to page 31 . This also applies to brief inspection work.

„ Consider the information in all relevant operating instructions:

• The operating instructions of the machine

• The operating instructions of the universal shaft

2

2.4

Danger zone universal shaft

People may become caught by the universal shaft, pulled in and seriously injured.

„ Observe operating instructions of universal shaft.

„ Ensure sufficient overlap of section tube and universal shaft guards.

„ Make sure that the universal shaft guards are mounted and that they are fully functional.

„ Allow the universal shaft locks to engage.

„ Attach chains to prevent the universal shaft guards from rotating with the shaft.

„ Make sure that there is no one in the danger zone of PTO shaft and universal shaft.

„ Ensure that the selected rotational speed and direction of rotation of the PTO shaft of the self-propelled machine match the permitted rotational speed and direction of rotation of the mower.

„ Switch off the PTO shaft when the angles between the universal shaft and the PTO shaft are too large. The machine may be damaged. Parts may be hurled up and cause injury to people.

Danger zone PTO shaft

People may be caught, pulled in and seriously injured by the PTO shaft and driven parts.

Before switching on the PTO shaft:

„ Ensure that all protective devices are mounted and brought into protective position.

„ Make sure that there is no one in the danger zone of PTO shaft and universal shaft.

„ Switch off drives in case they are not needed.

Danger zone between mower conditioner and mowers

People situated between the mower conditioner and the mower may be seriously injured or killed if they are careless or if the machine rolls away or moves.

„ Before working between mower conditioner and mower: Shut down and safeguard the machine,

refer to page 31 . This also applies to brief inspection work.

„ If the lifting unit must be actuated, keep all people away from range of movement of machine parts to be raised.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 21

2

2.4

Safety

Basic safety instructions

Danger zone because objects may shoot out

Crops and foreign bodies may shoot out and injure or kill people.

„ Before starting the machine, instruct all people to leave the danger zone of the machine.

„ If people are in the danger zone of the machine, switch off drives and diesel engine immediately.

Danger zone when drive is switched on

When drive is switched on, there is danger to life caused by moving machine parts. People must not stay in the danger zone of the machine.

„ Before starting the machine, instruct all persons to leave the danger zone of the machine.

„ In case of dangerous situations, immediately switch off drives and instruct persons to leave the danger zone.

Danger zone due to trailing machine parts

If machine parts are trailing, people may be seriously injured or killed.

After the drives have been switched off, the following machine parts will trail:

• Universal shafts

• Drive belts

• Fan

• Sieve drum

• Cutting discs

• Conditioner

• Conveying devices

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 31 .

„ Do not approach the machine until all machines parts have come to a complete stop.

2.4.10

Ensuring functionality of safety devices

If safety devices are missing or damaged, moving machine parts could seriously hurt or kill persons.

„ Replace damaged safety devices.

„ Mount dismounted safety devices and machine parts again before start-up and move them to protective position.

„ When there are doubts whether all safety devices are functional and have been correctly installed, instruct a specialist workshop to check this.

2.4.11

Personal protective equipment

The wearing of personal protective equipment is an important safety measure. Missing or unsuitable personal protective equipment increases health risks and injuries.

22

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Safety

Basic safety instructions

2

2.4

Personal protective equipment is for example:

• Suitable protective gloves

• Safety boots

• Close fitting protective clothing

• Hearing protection

• Safety glasses

„ Specify and provide personal protective equipment for the particular job.

„ Use only personal protective equipment which is in proper condition and offers effective protection.

„ Adjust personal protective equipment to the person, for example the size.

„ Remove unsuitable clothing and jewellery (e.g. rings, necklaces) and cover long hair with a hairnet.

2.4.12

Safety markings on the machine

Safety labels on the machine caution against dangers at danger areas and represent an important part of the safety equipment of the machine. Missing safety labels increase the risk of serious and fatal injuries.

„ Clean dirty safety labels.

„ Make sure every time after cleaning the safety labels that they are complete and legible.

„ Immediately replace missing, damaged and unrecognizable safety labels.

„ Provide spare parts with intended safety labels.

Descriptions, explanations and order numbers of safety labels, refer to page 32

.

2.4.13

Road safety

Dangers for road travel

If the machine exceeds the maximum dimensions and weights specified by national law and is not correctly lit when travelling on public roads, other road users may be endangered.

„ Before driving on roads, ensure that the maximum permitted dimensions, weights and axle, drawbar and trailer loads are not exceeded which apply to driving on public roads according to national law.

„ Before driving on roads, switch on the road travel lighting and ensure that it functions properly.

„ Before driving on roads, move the main mode switch to the “road mode” position.

Danger when driving on road and field

The self-propelled machine has special driving properties which also depend on the operating state and on the ground. If changed handling characteristics are not considered, the driver may cause accidents.

„ Observe measures for driving on road and field,

refer to page 191 .

Dangers if the machine is not prepared properly for road travel

If the machine is not prepared properly for road travel, serious accidents may occur with traffic.

„ Before driving on roads, prepare the machine for road travel,

refer to page 191

.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 23

2

2.4

Safety

Basic safety instructions

Dangers when operating the machine on slopes

The machine may tilt when it is used on slopes. As a result, accidents may occur and people may be seriously injured or killed.

„ Do not work and drive on a slope unless the ground of the slope is flat and the adhesion of the tyres to the ground is ensured.

„ Turn the machine at low speed. Turn in a large arc.

„ Avoid driving across a slope because the centre of gravity of the machine will be changed by payload and by executing machine functions.

„ Avoid abrupt steering movements on slopes.

„ Do not move the machine from working position to transport position or from transport position to working position as long as the machine is used across a slope.

„ Do not park the machine on slopes.

„ Observe procedures for operating the machine on slopes,

refer to page 209

.

2.4.14

2.4.15

Parking the machine safely

An incorrectly parked and insufficiently safeguarded machine can represent a danger for people, especially children, and can be set into motion or fall over in an uncontrolled manner.

People may be injured or killed.

„ Park the machine on a horizontal and level ground capable of bearing the load.

„ Before adjusting, repairing, servicing and cleaning the machine, ensure that it is securely positioned.

„ Observe section “Parking the Machine” in chapter Driving and Transport.

refer to page 205

„ Before parking: Shut down and safeguard the machine,

refer to page 31 .

Consumables

Unsuitable consumables

Consumables which do not comply with the requirements of the manufacturer may impair the operational safety of the machine and cause accidents.

„ Use only consumables which comply with the requirements of the manufacturer.

For requirements on consumables, refer to page 64 .

Fuel is harmful

Fuels are carcinogenic. If fuel is swallowed or fuel vapours inhaled, the fuel may cause organ damage.

„ Do not inhale the vapours.

„ Do not swallow the fuel.

„ To prevent skin damage, avoid skin contact with the fuel.

„ Wear suitable protective gloves and protective goggles.

24

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

2.4.16

2.4.17

Safety

Basic safety instructions

Environmental protection and disposal

Consumables such as diesel fuel, brake fluid, antifreeze and lubricants (e.g. gearbox oil, hydraulic oil) may damage the environment and the health of people.

„ Do not release consumables into the environment.

„ Fill consumables in a liquid-tight labelled container and dispose of according to the official regulations.

„ Absorb leaked consumables with an absorbent material, fill them in a liquid-tight labelled container and dispose of according to the official regulations.

2

2.4

Chemicals

Keep cabin free of chemicals

Harmful and aggressive chemicals will pollute the air in the cabin. Harmful and aggressive reactive substances are for example:

• Solvents

• Fuels

• Oils and greases

• Detergents

• Acids

These chemicals may stick to clothing and enter the cabin in this way. Gases and liquids may escape even from closed tanks. The chemicals may impair health and the ability to concentrate.

As a result, accidents could be caused.

Electrical components could be damaged, for example control units and plug connections. This may result in fire and accidents caused by malfunctions, system failures or short circuits.

„ Keep the inside of the cabin clean.

„ Do not store or transport any harmful and aggressive chemicals in the cabin.

„ Before entering the cabin, remove clothing which may be contaminated with harmful and aggressive chemicals.

„ Before entering the cabin, remove soil and other substances from shoes or boots. The soil may be contaminated with chemicals.

Dangers arising from environment

Danger of fire

Flammable materials may accumulate in the machine due to operation or animals, for example rodents or nesting birds.

In case of dry usage conditions, dust, impurities and crop residues may inflame on hot parts and the resulting fire could seriously hurt people or kill them.

„ Check and clean the machine every day before using it for the first time.

„ Check and clean the machine regularly during the working day.

„ Regularly check hydraulic oil lines for proper condition and position with sufficient clearance to sharp edges.

„ Regularly check exhaust systems, tubes and turbocharger of engine system. Remove crop residues.

„ While refuelling, do not smoke and do not place the machine near naked flames or explosive sparks.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 25

2

2.4

Safety

Basic safety instructions

Life-threatening electric shock from overhead lines

When the machine is in operation, it may reach the height of overhead lines. This may cause voltage to flash over to the machine and cause a fatal electric shock or fire.

„ When folding the lateral mowers in and out, keep a safe distance from electric overhead lines.

„ Never fold the lateral mowers in or out near pylons and overhead lines.

„ Keep a safe distance from electric overhead lines.

„ To avoid a potential electric shock caused by voltage flashover, never exit from or climb into the machine under overhead lines.

Behaviour in case of voltage flashover of overhead lines

Electroconductive parts of the machine could be subject to high electrical voltage caused by voltage flashover. A voltage drop where major voltage differences are present is created on the ground around the machine in case of voltage flashover. Due to major voltage differences in the ground, you could be killed by electric shocks when you make big steps, lay on the ground or support yourself with your hands.

„ Do not leave the cabin.

„ Do not touch any metal parts.

„ Do not establish any conductive connection to the ground.

„ Warn persons: Do not approach the machine. Electrical voltage on the ground may lead to severe electric shocks.

„ Wait for help from professional rescue teams. The overhead line must be switched off.

If people have to leave the cabin despite the voltage flashover, for example because there is an imminent threat to life due to fire:

„ Avoid simultaneous contact with machine and ground.

„ Jump away from the machine. Jump into a safe standing position. Do not touch the machine from the outside.

„ Move away from the machine with very small steps. In doing so, make sure that your feet are close to one another.

2.4.18

Sources of danger on the machine

Noise may damage your health

The noise development of the machine during operation may cause health damage such as hardness of hearing, deafness or tinnitus. When using the machine at high rotational speed, the noise level also increases.

„ Before the machine is started up for the first time, assess the danger by noise. Depending on the ambient conditions, working hours and the working and operating conditions of the machine, specify and use suitable hearing protection.

„ Specify rules for the use of hearing protection and for the working time.

„ During operation keep windows and doors of cabin closed.

„ Remove hearing protection for road travel.

26

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Safety

Basic safety instructions

2

2.4

Liquids under high pressure

The following liquids are under high pressure:

• Hydraulic oil

• Diesel fuel

• Engine coolant

• Refrigerant for the air conditioning system

Liquids escaping under high pressure may penetrate through the skin and cause severe injuries.

„ Shut down and safeguard the machine and contact qualified specialist workshop upon suspicion of damaged hydraulic system.

„ Never search for leaks with bare hands. Even a very pin-sized hole may lead to serious injuries.

„ When searching for leaks, use suitable aids, e.g. a piece of cardboard to avoid injuries.

„ Keep body and face away from leaks.

„ If liquids penetrate the body, immediately consult a doctor. The liquid must be removed from the body as quickly as possible.

Hot liquids

If hot liquids are drained, people may burn and/or scald themselves.

„ When draining hot consumables, wear personal protective equipment.

„ Before performing any repair, maintenance or cleaning work, allow liquids and machine parts to cool off, if necessary.

Damaged compressor unit

Damaged compressed air hoses of compressor unit may tear off. Hoses that move uncontrollably may hurt people seriously.

„ If it is suspected that the compressor unit is damaged, immediately contact a specialist workshop.

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 31

.

Damaged hydraulic hoses

Damaged hydraulic hoses may tear off, burst or cause oil leaks. As a result, the machine may be damaged and people may be seriously injured.

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 31

.

„ If it is suspected that hydraulic hoses are damaged, immediately contact a service centre,

refer to page 322

.

Toxic exhaust gases

Exhaust gases may cause serious health problems or result in death.

„ While the engine is running, provide adequate ventilation to prevent prolonged exposure to exhaust gases.

„ Do not leave the engine running in a closed room unless there is a suitable extraction unit.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 27

2

2.4

Safety

Basic safety instructions

Hot surfaces

The following components may become hot during operation and may burn people:

• Engine

• Exhaust system

• Cooling hoses

• Hydraulic system

• Wheel hub gearbox

• Transfer gearbox

• Mower gearbox

• Belt gearbox

„ Maintain a sufficient distance from hot surfaces.

„ Leave machine parts to cool down and wear protective gloves.

2.4.19

Dangers in connection with certain activities: climbing up and down

Climbing up and down safely

People who behave carelessly when climbing up an down may fall off the ladder. People, who climb onto the machine without using the designated ladders, may slip, fall and seriously injure themselves.

Dirt as well as operating fluids and lubricants may impair surefootedness and stability.

„ Always keep ladder steps and platforms clean and in proper condition so that you can step and stay safely.

„ Never climb up and down while the machine is moving.

„ Always climb up and down with the face towards the machine.

„ When climbing up and down, maintain a three-point contact with the steps and hand rails

(always two hands and one foot or two feet and one hand on the machine).

„ When climbing up and down, never use operating elements as handles. Inadvertent activation of the operating elements may cause functions to be unintentionally actuated which could be hazardous.

„ When climbing down, never jump off the machine.

„ Climb up and down using only the steps and platforms designated in these operating

instructions, refer to page 54

.

2.4.20

Dangers in connection with certain activities: Working on the machine

Only perform work when the machine is at standstill

If the machine is not shut down and safeguarded, parts may move unintentionally or the machine may start moving. Thus there is a risk of serious injuries or death.

„ Before carrying out any repair, maintenance and cleaning work on the machine, shutdown and safeguard it,

refer to page 31 .

28

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Safety

Basic safety instructions

Maintenance and repair work

Improper maintenance and repair work endanger operational safety. Thus there is a risk of accidents, serious injuries or death.

„ Only perform work which is described in this operating instructions. Prior to any work, stop

and safeguard the machine, refer to page 31 .

„ All other maintenance and repair work must only be performed by qualified specialist workshop.

2

2.4

Working at or on heights of the machine

There is a risk of falling when working at or on heights of the machine. As a result, accidents may occur and people may be seriously or fatally injured.

„

Prior to any work, stop and safeguard the machine, refer to page 31

.

„ Make sure you stand securely.

„ Use a suitable fall protection.

„ Secure the area below the assembly point against falling objects.

Raised machine and machine parts

The raised machine and machine parts may fall or tilt unintentionally. People may be seriously injured or killed, as a result.

„

Do not stay under the raised machine or machine parts which are not safely supported, refer to page 31 .

„ Prior to all work on raised machines or machine parts, lower the machine or machine parts.

„ Before performing any work under raised machines or machine parts, secure the machine or machine parts with rigid safety support or with hydraulic shut-off device or by supporting against lowering.

Danger associated with welding work

Improper welding work will endanger the operational safety of the machine. As a result, accidents may occur and people may be seriously or fatally injured.

„ Never perform welding work on the following components:

• Engine

• Gearbox

• Components of the hydraulics

• Components of the electronics

• Frame or supporting components

• Running gear

„ Before carrying out welding work on the machine, obtain consent by KRONE customer service and, if required, identify alternatives.

„ Before performing welding work on the mowers, detach them from the machine.

„ Welding work must only be performed by experienced qualified personnel.

„ Attach the earthing of the welding device near the welding points.

„ Caution when performing welding work near electric and hydraulic parts, plastic parts and pressure accumulators. The parts may be damaged, endanger people or cause accidents.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 29

2

2.4

Safety

Basic safety instructions

Before performing welding work on the forage harvester:

„ Switch off main battery switch.

„ Pull engine control plug out of the engine block.

„ Disconnect batteries.

„ Connect positive and negative cables of the machine by an electrical connection.

2.4.21

Dangers in connection with certain activities: checking and charging batteries

If the battery is handled incorrectly, e.g. inadvertent connection of the battery poles to a metal object, excessive charging in conjunction with a spark, the battery may explode. People may be injured or burnt by the explosion or burnt by spraying battery acid.

„ Use a suitable voltmeter to check the condition of the battery.

„ Charge the battery only in well ventilated rooms with the battery compartment cover open.

„

To charge the battery, follow these operating instructions, refer to page 323

.

„ Keep fire, sparks and naked flames away from the battery.

„ To prevent acid from leaking, transport the battery in the installation position only.

2.4.22

Dangers in connection with certain activities: working on wheels and tyres

Improper assembly or disassembly of wheels and tyres will endanger the operational safety. As a result, accidents may occur and people may be seriously injured or killed.

The fitting of wheels and tyres requires adequate knowledge and approved mounting tools.

„ If there is a lack of knowledge, have the wheels and tyres fitted by the KRONE dealer or by a qualified tyre service.

„ When fitting tyres on the rims, never exceed the maximum permitted pressure specified by

KRONE, otherwise the tyre or even the rim may explode,

refer to page 62 .

„

When mounting the wheels, mount the wheel nuts with the specified tightening torque, refer to page 273

.

2.4.23

Behaviour in dangerous situations and in case of accidents

Any measures not taken or incorrect measures in dangerous situations can make it difficult or impossible to rescue exposed persons. Due to the impeded conditions of rescue, the chances to help and heal injured people deteriorate.

„ As a matter of principle: Park the machine.

„ Get an overview of the existing danger and identify the reason.

„ Secure the accident site.

„ Save persons from the danger zone.

„ Leave danger zone and do not enter it again.

„ Alarm rescue workers and seek help, if possible.

„ Carry out immediate lifesaving actions.

30

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

2.5

2.5.1

2.5.2

Safety

Safety routines

2

2.5

Safety routines

Shutting down and safeguarding the machine

WARNING

Risk of injury due to movement of the machine or machine parts

If the machine has not been shut down, machine or machine parts may move unintentionally.

As a result, people may be seriously injured or killed.

„ Before leaving the operating position: Shut down and safeguard the machine.

To shut down and safeguard the machine:

„ Park the machine on a stable, horizontal and level ground.

„ Switch off the drives and wait until coasting parts have come to a complete stop.

„ Secure the self-propelled machine against rolling away by applying the parking brake.

„ Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key and take it with you.

„ Switch off the main battery switch,

refer to page 204

.

„ Use wheel chocks to secure the self-propelled machine against rolling away.

Securing raised machine and machine parts against lowering

WARNING

Crushing hazard due to movement of machine or machine parts

If the machine or machine parts are not secured against lowering, the machine or machine parts may roll, fall or sag. Thus people could be squeezed or killed.

„ Lower the raised machine parts.

„ Shut down and safeguard the machine,

refer to page 31 .

„ Before working on or under raised machine parts: Secure machine or machine parts against lowering by means of hydraulic shut-off device (e.g. stop cock) on machine side.

„ Before working on or under raised machine parts: Safely support machine or machine parts.

In order to safely support the machine or machine parts:

„ To support, only use suitable and sufficiently dimensioned materials that do not break or yield.

„ Bricks and hollow blocks are not suitable for safely supporting the machine and machine parts. Therefore they must not be used.

„ Car jacks are also not suitable for safely supporting the machine and machine parts. They must not be used, as well.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 31

2

2.6

2.5.3

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

Carrying out oil level check and oil and filter element changes safely

WARNING

Carrying out oil level check and oil and filter element changes safely

If oil level check and oil and filter element changes are not carried out safely, the operational safety of the machine may be impaired. This may result in accidents.

„ Carry out oil level check and oil and filter element changes safely.

To carry out oil level check, oil and filter element changes safely:

„ Lower raised machine parts or secure them against falling,

refer to page 31 .

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 31 .

„ Observe the intervals for oil level check, oil and filter element changes,

refer to page 236 .

„ Use only the oil grades and quantities specified in the consumables table,

refer to page 64 .

„ Clean the area around the parts (for example gearbox, high-pressure filter) and make sure that no foreign objects get into the parts or the hydraulic system.

„ Check existing seal rings for damage and replace them, if necessary.

„ Collect leaking or waste oil in a container designated for the purpose and dispose of it

properly, refer to page 25

.

2.5.4

Running actuator test

WARNING

Run actuator test safely

When actuators are energised, functions are carried out directly and without a safety prompt.

This may cause the unintentional movement of machine parts, trapping and seriously or fatally injuring persons.

ü Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test.

ü The person performing the test must know which machine parts are activated by controlling the actuators.

„ Run the actuator test safely.

To run the actuator test safely:

„ Lower raised machine parts or secure them against falling,

refer to page 31 .

„

Shut down and secure the machine, refer to page 31

.

„ Cordon off the danger zone of the actuated moving machine parts in a clearly visible manner.

„ Ensure that there is nobody in the danger zone of the actuated moving machine parts.

„ Switch on the ignition.

„ The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators.

2.6

Safety labels on the machine

Every safety label is provided with an order number and can be ordered directly from the authorised KRONE dealer. Immediately replace missing, damaged and unrecognisable safety labels.

32

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

2

2.6

When attaching safety labels, the contact surface on the machine must be clean and free of dirt, oil and grease to ensure optimum adhesion of the labels.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 33

2

2.6

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

Position and meaning of safety labels

Overview 1

6

27 022 557 0

1

2 3

4

6

3 2

34

BM000-032

5

4

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

1.

Order no. 27 022 557 0 (1x)

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

2

2.6

This safety label includes the following warnings:

Danger due to incorrect operation and lack of knowledge

Incorrect operation and lack of knowledge of the machine as well as incorrect behaviour in hazardous situations is risking the life of the operator and third parties.

„ Before starting up the machine, read and follow the operating instructions and safety instructions.

Danger due to falling objects

If treads or platforms fall while the machine is moving, people may be injured.

„ Before driving the machine, always ensure that there is nobody on the steps or platforms.

Danger due to the machine starting up unintentionally

Risk of injury due to movement of the machine or machine parts.

„ Before leaving the cabin, switch off the engine, remove the ignition key and take it with you.

Danger due to electric shock

Life-threatening injuries due to voltage flashover if machine parts come too close to overhead lines.

„ Maintain the prescribed safety distance from overhead power lines.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 35

2

2.6

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

2.

Order no. 942 002 4 (2x)

3.

Order no. 942 210 0 (2x)

Danger due to the machine rolling away

If the machine has not been secured against rolling away, it may start moving and cause injuries.

„ Before parking the machine, secure it with wheel chocks to prevent it from rolling away.

Danger due to fire

Risk of injury due to fire on the machine.

„ Do not operate the machine unless there is a functional fire extinguisher available.

Danger due to high-pressure liquid

Liquids under high pressure may penetrate the body through the skin and cause serious injuries.

„ When searching for leaks, use suitable aids to avoid the risk of injury.

„ Keep body and face away from leaks.

Never search for leaks with bare hands.

„ If liquids penetrate the body, immediately consult a doctor. The liquid must be removed from the body as quickly as possible, as there is a risk of infection.

Danger due to rotating machine parts

When the machine is running, there is a risk of injury due to rotating machine parts.

„ Before starting up, move the guards into their protective position.

Danger from hot surfaces

There is a risk of burns when touching hot surfaces.

„ Keep sufficient distance as long as the surfaces are hot.

36

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

4.

Ord. no. 942 196 1 (2x)

5.

Order no. 27 018 003 0 (1x)

6.

Order no. 27 021 177 0 (4x)

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

2

2.6

Risk of crushing or shearing

Risk of injury due to crushing or shearing points on moving machine parts.

„ While parts are moving, never reach into areas where there is a risk of being crushed.

Danger due to rotating machine parts

After the machine has been switched off, there is risk of injury due to coasting machine parts.

„ Do not touch any moving parts of the machine.

„ Wait until the machine parts have come to a complete stop.

Danger from high-pressure liquid

The pressure accumulator is under gas and oil pressure. There is a risk of injury when the pressure accumulator is not removed or repaired properly.

„ Observe the notices in the operating instructions before removing and repairing the pressure accumulator.

„ The pressure accumulator must only be removed and repaired by a specialist workshop.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 37

2

2.6

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

Overview 2

38

BM000-033

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

1.

Order no. 942 002 4 (1x)

2.

Order no. 27 017 981 0 (2x)

3.

Order no. 942 210 0 (1x)

4.

Ord. no. 942 196 1 (4x)

5.

Order no. 942 459 0 (3x)

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

2

2.6

Danger due to rotating machine parts

When the machine is running, there is a risk of injury due to rotating machine parts.

„ Before starting up, move the guards into their protective position.

Danger due to rotating fan blades

When the fan is rotating, there is a risk of injury from the moving fan blades.

„ Do not reach into the running fan.

„ Wait until the fan has come to a standstill.

Danger from hot surfaces

There is a risk of burns when touching hot surfaces.

„ Keep sufficient distance as long as the surfaces are hot.

Risk of crushing or shearing

Risk of injury due to crushing or shearing points on moving machine parts.

„ While parts are moving, never reach into areas where there is a risk of being crushed.

Danger due to crushing or shearing

Risk of injury due to crushing or shearing points on moving machine parts.

„ While parts are moving, never reach into areas where there is a risk of being crushed.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 39

2

2.6

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

6.

Order no. 27 021 177 0 (1x)

Danger from high-pressure liquid

The pressure accumulator is under gas and oil pressure. There is a risk of injury when the pressure accumulator is not removed or repaired properly.

„ Observe the notices in the operating instructions before removing and repairing the pressure accumulator.

„ The pressure accumulator must only be removed and repaired by a specialist workshop.

40

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

2

2.6

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 41

2

2.6

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

Overview 3

3

2

1

1

BM000-031

3

1

2

4

5

42

5

5

1

4

6

3

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

1.

Order no. 939 576 0 (8x)

2.

Ord. no. 939 472 2 (2x)

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

2

2.6

a)

Danger from rotating machine parts

There is a risk of injury as machine parts may still continue to run for a certain time after being switched off.

„ Do not touch any moving parts of the machine.

„ Wait until the machine parts have come to a complete stop.

b)

Danger from objects being flung out

When the machine is running, there is a risk of injury as objects may be flung out uncontrollably.

„ Before start-up, move guards into protective position.

c)

Danger from objects being flung out

When the machine is running, there is a risk of injury as objects may be flung out uncontrollably.

„ When the machine is running, keep your distance.

Danger from shock

The swivel movement of the machine may cause danger to life.

„ Make sure that there is no one in the swivel range of the machine.

„ Keep distance to moving machine parts.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 43

2

2.6

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

3.

Order no. 27 021 177 0 (3x)

4.

Ord. no. 942 196 1 (2x)

5.

Order no. 942 459 0 (3x)

6.

Order no. 942 002 4 (1x)

Danger from high-pressure liquid

The pressure accumulator is under gas and oil pressure. There is a risk of injury when the pressure accumulator is not removed or repaired properly.

„ Observe the notices in the operating instructions before removing and repairing the pressure accumulator.

„ The pressure accumulator must only be removed and repaired by a specialist workshop.

Risk of crushing or shearing

Risk of injury due to crushing or shearing points on moving machine parts.

„ While parts are moving, never reach into areas where there is a risk of being crushed.

Danger due to crushing or shearing

Risk of injury due to crushing or shearing points on moving machine parts.

„ While parts are moving, never reach into areas where there is a risk of being crushed.

Danger due to rotating machine parts

When the machine is running, there is a risk of injury due to rotating machine parts.

„ Before starting up, move the guards into their protective position.

44

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

2

2.6

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 45

2

2.6

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

Overview 4

1

1

2

BM000-030

3

46

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

1.

Order no. 939 469 1 (2x)

2.

Order no. 942 291 0 (1x)

3.

Order no. 27 021 177 0 (2x)

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

2

2.6

Danger due to shock or crushing

Danger to life from machine parts folding down or lowering.

„ Ensure that there is nobody in the swivel range of the machine parts.

„ Keep distance to moving machine parts.

Danger from fall

People may be injured when they fall off ladder steps or platforms while the machine is moving.

„ Before driving the machine, always ensure that there is nobody on the steps or platforms.

Danger from high-pressure liquid

The pressure accumulator is under gas and oil pressure. There is a risk of injury when the pressure accumulator is not removed or repaired properly.

„ Observe the notices in the operating instructions before removing and repairing the pressure accumulator.

„ The pressure accumulator must only be removed and repaired by a specialist workshop.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 47

2

2.6

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

Overview 5

48

BM000-328

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

1.

Ord. no. 27 021 764 0 (6x)

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

2

2.6

Danger due to rotating universal shaft

There is a danger of being pulled in or caught by the rotating universal shaft.

„ Never reach into the rotating universal shaft.

„ Maintain an adequate distance from moving machine parts.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 49

2

2.6

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

Overview 6

With version "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood"

1 2

2 1

BM000-385

3 3

50

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

1.

Ord. no. 939 576 0 (2x)

2.

Order no. 942 200 1 (2x)

3.

Ord. no. 942 196 1 (2x)

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

2

2.6

a)

Danger from rotating machine parts

There is a risk of injury as machine parts may still continue to run for a certain time after being switched off.

„ Do not touch any moving parts of the machine.

„ Wait until the machine parts have come to a complete stop.

b)

Danger from objects being flung out

When the machine is running, there is a risk of injury as objects may be flung out uncontrollably.

„ Before start-up, move guards into protective position.

c)

Danger from objects being flung out

When the machine is running, there is a risk of injury as objects may be flung out uncontrollably.

„ When the machine is running, keep your distance.

Danger from rotating machine parts

When approaching the danger zone, there is a danger of being drawn in from rotating machine parts.

„ Keep sufficient distance from rotating machine parts.

Risk of crushing or shearing

Risk of injury due to crushing or shearing points on moving machine parts.

„ While parts are moving, never reach into areas where there is a risk of being crushed.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 51

2

2.6

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

Overview 7

With version "Standard swathing"

1

2

BM000-390

1

2

1

1

52

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

1.

Ord. no. 942 196 1 (4x)

2.

Ord. no. 939 576 0 (2x)

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

2

2.6

Risk of crushing or shearing

Risk of injury due to crushing or shearing points on moving machine parts.

„ While parts are moving, never reach into areas where there is a risk of being crushed.

a)

Danger from rotating machine parts

There is a risk of injury as machine parts may still continue to run for a certain time after being switched off.

„ Do not touch any moving parts of the machine.

„ Wait until the machine parts have come to a complete stop.

b)

Danger from objects being flung out

When the machine is running, there is a risk of injury as objects may be flung out uncontrollably.

„ Before start-up, move guards into protective position.

c)

Danger from objects being flung out

When the machine is running, there is a risk of injury as objects may be flung out uncontrollably.

„ When the machine is running, keep your distance.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 53

2

2.7

2.7

Safety

Safety features

Safety features

8 8

1

2

7

8

9

10

6

3

4

5

BMG000-047

54

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Pos.

1

Designation

Emergency exit

2 Wheel chocks

3 Fire extinguisher

4

5

6

Ladder

Main battery switch

Ladder lighting

7 Quick-stop switch

Safety

Safety features

2

2.7

Explanation

In case of an emergency, the side window on the right-hand side in the direction of travel, next to the driver's seat, can be opened as an exit door,

refer to page 69

.

Wheel chocks can be used to secure the machine from rolling away. The machine is equipped with

2 wheel chocks which are located above the front right wheel in the storage compartment,

refer to page 203 .

The fire extinguisher is located on the cabin lad-

der, refer to page 57

.

(The fire extinguisher is not always included in the scope of delivery.)

„ To enter the cabin safely at all timed, climb up onto the machine using the left-hand side ladder only. Use the handrails while doing so.

The main battery switch is used to switch on or interrupt the machine’s power supply,

refer to page 204 .

For the "Ladder and maintenance lighting" version

To enable the rungs on the ladder to be easily seen, even in the dark, the rungs can be illuminated,

refer to page 82 .

The quick-stop switch in the armrest is used to stop the machine's working functions in an emergency. The traction drive remains active,

refer to page 92

.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 55

2

2.7

Safety

Safety features

Pos.

8

Designation

Working lights

9 Seat switch in driver's seat

10 SMV emblem

Explanation

To ensure that the machine can be safely exited in the dark, the working lights are switched off

after a delay, refer to page 82

.

The seat switch integrated into the driver's seat is used to check whether the driver's seat is occupied or not.

Field mode:

If the driver's seat is not occupied for longer than

7 seconds, then all the mowers and the traction drive are switched off.

Once the driver's seat is occupied again, the mowers can be switched on and the traction drive started up again.

„

Switch mowers on and off, refer to page 210 .

Road mode:

If the driver's seat is not occupied for longer than

7 seconds, then the traction drive's reverse drive is switched off. During forward travel the traction drive is switched off only after the machine comes to a standstill.

The Slow-Moving Vehicle emblem (SMV emblem) can be attached to slowly moving machines or vehicles,

refer to page 56

.

2.7.1

SMV emblem

For the version with “SMV emblem”

56

KM000-567

The SMV emblem (Slow-Moving Vehicle) (1) can be mounted on slow-moving machines or vehicles. The country-specific specifications must be observed.

The SMV emblem (1) is at the rear in the centre or on left.

If the machine is transported on transport vehicles (for example lorry or train), the SMV emblem must be covered or dismounted.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Safety

Safety features

2

2.7

2.7.2

Fire extinguisher

BXG000-004

INFORMATION

The machine must not be operated without an on-board fire extinguisher which contains at least 6 kg of extinguishing agent.

The manufacturer recommends a powder fire extinguisher for fire classes A, B and C.

The support for fire extinguisher (1) is located in direction of travel left on the ladder (2) to the platform.

Have the fire extinguisher registered. So you can be sure that maintenance is carried out regularly and in good time (according to EN 3 at the latest every two years) and can be proven.

„ Prior to starting up the machine, check that the fire extinguisher is attached and ready for

use, refer to page 275 .

„ Consider the operating instructions of the fire extinguisher and the web page of the manufacturer of the fire extinguisher.

„ Check fire extinguisher for external damage. In the event of anomalies, inform responsible maintenance company.

The inspection intervals in other countries may be different. In such a case, the prescribed inspection intervals of the country of operation apply.

„ Observe the provisions of the corresponding countries.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 57

3 Data memory

3 Data memory

A variety of electronic components of the machine contains data memories which save temporarily and permanently technical information on machine condition, events and errors.

This technical information generally documents the condition of a part, module, system or of the environment:

• Operating states of system components (e.g. filling levels)

• Status messages of the machine and its single components (e.g. number of revolutions of wheel, wheel speed, motion delay, lateral acceleration)

• Malfunctions and defects in important system components (e.g. light and brakes)

• Reactions of machine in special driving situations (e.g. actuation of airbag, installing stability control systems)

• Ambient conditions (e.g. temperature)

These data are exclusively of a technical nature. They are used to detect and remedy errors as well as to optimize machine functions. There is no possibility to create motion profiles on driven routes from these data.

If services are used (e.g. repair services, service processes, warranty cases, quality assurance), this technical information can be read out by employees of service network (including manufacturer) from the event and error data memories by means of special diagnostic units.

There you receive further information, if necessary. After the error has been remedied, the information in the error storage is either deleted or continuously overwritten.

When using the machine, situations are possible in which these technical data in connection with other information (accident protocol, damage to the machine, testimonies etc.) could become transferable to people - if applicable in consultation with an expert.

Additional functions regulated by a contractual agreement with the customer (e.g. remote maintenance) permit the transmission of certain machine data from the machine.

58

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Machine Description

Machine overview

4

4.1

4

4.1

Machine Description

Machine overview

2 3

1

15

14

7

5 6

8

4

BMG000-049

13 12 11 10

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

9

59

4

4.2

Machine Description

Labelling

6

7

4

5

8

1

2

3

Exhaust aftertreatment

Storage compartment right

Cabin

Front mounted mower

Outrigger arm right

Right side mounted mower

Rear storage compartment

Combination cooler

4.1.1

4.2

9 Engine

10 Side mounted mower left

11 Outrigger arm left

12 Battery compartment

13 Lifting unit

14 Main battery switch

15 Maintenance flap left

Content of the storage compartments on the machine

Right storage compartment (2)

• 2 wheel chocks

• 1 canister for fresh water

• 1 canister for windshield washer fluid

Rear storage compartment (7)

• 1 Blade wrench for tensioning the belt drives and with the "Blade quick fastener" version: for blade changing

• 1 Drain hose for fluids

• 1 Special spanner for SafeCut

• Several spare blades

• 1 Measuring hose

Left maintenance flap (15)

• 1 Lever for operating the control block

Labelling

INFORMATION

The entire identification plate represents a legal document and should not be altered or rendered illegible!

Information for enquiries and orders

If you have any further queries on the machine or if you want to order spare parts, always enter type designation, vehicle identification number and year of manufacture of the corresponding machine. To ensure that these data are always available, we recommend to enter them in the fields on the front cover page of these operating instructions.

60

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Machine Description

Function description

4

4.3

4.3

BM000-093

The machine data can be found on type plate (1). The type plate is located on right-hand machine side on vehicle frame below the cabin.

Function description

The self-propelled high-performance mower conditioner is a self-propelled work machine with three disc mowers with integrated mower-conditioners. The self-propelled high-performance mower conditioner is used for mowing various live agricultural grasses and pulse crops (from initial stages to end of photosynthetic process).

The three mowing units can be used individually or together and thereby enabling the working width to be adapted to suit. The integrated mower-conditioners accelerate the mowed crop drying process.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 61

5 Technical Data

5 Technical Data

62

BM000-129

Dimensions

Width W

Length L

Height H

Working width

Centre distance X

Weight

Permissible total weight

Permitted axle load at front

Permitted axle load at rear

Engine data

Manufacturer

Engine type

Design

Emissions level

Exhaust aftertreatment system

Power

Cooling system

Diesel injection process

Starter voltage

Starter output

3,000 mm

8,450 mm

4,000 mm

9,950 mm

4,110 mm

16,000 kg

10,500 kg

6000 kg

Liebherr Machines Bulle SA

D946 A7-04

6-cylinder diesel engine

IV (EU)

SCR method

See engine model plate

Liquid cooling

Liebherr Common Rail

24 V

7.8 kW

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Technical Data 5

Traction drive

Type

Working speed

Transport speed

Four-wheel

Traction control system

Axles

Steering

Steering angle

Suspension on front axle/rear axle

Continuously variable hydrostatic drive

0–25 km/h

0-40 km/h

Option

Standard equipment

Rear axle

53°

Hydropneumatic

Electrical system

Alternator voltage

Alternator current intensity

Number of batteries

Battery voltage

Battery capacity

24 V

180 A

2

24 V (2x12 V)

(2x) 135 Ah

Air conditioning

Evaporator

Heater

Fan

Voltage

Power consumption

Refrigerating capacity *5200

W

Heating output 4000 W

910 m³/h free blowing

24 V

13.5 A

* Measured at +30 °C ambient temperature (manufacturer's specifications)

Vibration values

The determined values are below the values required according to the EU Vibration Directive

2002/44/EC.

• The vibration values for hand-arm vibrations are below 2.5 m/s².

• Concerning whole body vibrations the action value of 0.5 m/s² is not exceeded.

Noise in the operating position

• The noise in the operating position is 80 dB L pA

with cabin closed.

Ambient temperature

Temperature range for machine operation -5 to +45 °C

Maximum speed 1

Maximum permitted speed

1) Depending on the legal requirements in the country of use.

40 km/h

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 63

5

5.1

Technical Data

Consumables

Mowing units

Number of mowing units

Working width

Number of mowing discs

5.1

Number of mowing drums

Conditioning system

Conditioner speed

Cutting height

8–11 cm

4-6 cm approx. 3 cm

3

9950 mm

6 per side mounted mower

5 per front mounted mower

2 per side mounted mower

2 per front mounted mower

V-shaped steel tines

Adjustable 700/1000 rpm conditions of usage

High cut

Forage crop, dry or moist soil

Forage crop, dry or normal soil

Low cut

Sward damage can occur

Consumables

NOTICE

Machine damage due to mixing of oil

If oils, which have different specifications, are mixed with each other, the machine may be damaged.

„ Never mix oils, which have different specifications, with each other.

„ Contact your KRONE service partner before using an oil with a different specification after changing the oil.

The following filling quantities are reference values. The actual refiling quantity is determined when checking the level.

Biodegradable consumables can be used on request.

64

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

5.1.1

Technical Data

Consumables

5

5.1

Oils

Vehicle

Designation

Hydraulic oil tank

General hydraulic system

Engine oil (diesel engine)

Transfer gearbox

Front wheel hub gearbox

Rear wheel hub gearbox

Filling quantity

60 L

Specification Initial filling at the factory

SRS Wiolan HS 46

110 L

Hydraulic oil

HLP 46

Hydraulic oil

HLP 46

SRS Wiolan HS 46

40 L

9.2 L

2.5 L

1.5 L

LIEBHERR engine oil 10W-40

LIEBHERR engine oil

10W-40 options: Fuchs

Titan Cargo

MC 10W-40,

Chevron

Texaco URSA

TDX 10W-40,

Shell Rimula

R6M 10W-40 or Total Rubia

Tir 8600

10W-40

Mobil SHC 630

Gear oil Shell Spirax S4 CX 50

Gear oil Shell Spirax S4 CX 50

Mowers

Designation

Input gearbox on front mounted mower

Filling quantity

1.7 L

Main gearbox on front mounted mower

7 L

Main gearbox of side mounted mowers

6.5 L

7 L Front mounted mower cutter bar

Cutterbar side mounted mowers

8 L

Specification

API GL4 SAE 90

API GL4 SAE 90

API GL4 SAE 90

API GL4 SAE 90

API GL4 SAE 90

List of mineral oils of quality class HLP (HM) and environmentally friendly, rapidly biodegradable HEPG pressure fluids allowed to be used for hydraulic oil tank:

HEPG VG 46 HLP VG 46 ISO viscosity class

Manufacturer

ADDINOL

AGIP

ARAL

ASEOL

BAF 46Vitam

Aqua VG 46

Hydraulic oil HLP 46

OSO 46

Aral Vitam GF 46

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 65

5

5.1

Technical Data

Consumables

ISO viscosity class

Manufacturer

AVIA

BECHEM

BP

CASTROL

COFRAN

DEA

ELF

ENGEN

ESSO

FINA

FRAGOL

FUCHS

5.1.2

66

HEPG VG 46

Avia Hydrosynth 46

Hydrostar UWF 46

Biohyd PEG 46

Econa PG 46

Hydraulic oil PGK 46

Hydraulic oil D3031.46

Hydraulic TR 46

Renolin PGE 46

HLP VG 46

AVILUB RSL 46

Avia Fluid ZAD 46

Energol HLP 46

HYSPIN AWS 46

Cofraline extra 46 S

Astron HLP 46

ELFOLNA 46

ELFOLNA DS 46

Engen TQH 20/46

NUTO H 46

HYDRAN 46

RENOLIN

MR 15, VG 46, B15 VG 46

Houghton

KLÜBER

KUWAIT

LIQUI MOLY

Mobil

SHELL

SRS

Stuart

Theunissen

TOTAL

TRIBOL

Syntolubric 46

Fluid BD 46

Hydrocor E46

ISOCOR E46

LAMORA HLP 46

Q8 Haydn 46, Q8 Holst 46, hydraulics S46

HLP 46 ISO

Mobil DTE 25

Mobil Hydraulic Oil Medium

Shell Tellus oil 46

Shell Hydrol DO 46

WIOLAN HS 46

WIOLAN HX 4

Cofraline extra 46 S

Azolla ZS 46

Tribol 772

Tribol ET 1140-46

Tribol 943 AW 46

VALVOLINE

VERKOL

Ultrasyn PG 46

Vesta HLP 46

Lubricating grease

Designation

Central lubrication system

Manual lubrication points

Intermediate gear

Filling quantity

3.5 L

As required 1

65 g (per side)

Specification

Lubricating grease acc. to DIN

51818 of NLGI class 2, Li soap with EP additives

Mobilgrease XHP 222

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

5.1.3

5.1.4

5.1.5

Technical Data

Consumables

1 Lubricate the manual lubrication point until grease escapes at the bearing position. After lubricating, remove the grease escaping from the bearing position.

5

5.1

Coolant

Consumables / initial filling ex works

Designation

Engine coolant tank

Filling quantity Specification

54 L See shipped operating instructions from LIEBHERR

Initial filling ex works

• Liebherr Antifreeze OS

Concentrate

• Liebherr Antifreeze OS Mix

Refrigerant (air conditioning)

Designation

Refrigerant

Oil

Filling quantity

1,800 g

75 mL

Data sheet for refrigerant R134a (excerpt)

Refrigerant R 134a

Chemical designation

Chemical formula

Molecular weight:

Boiling point (at 1.013 bar):

Freezing point:

Critical temperature:

Critical pressure:

Density (liquid at +25 °C)

Limits of flammability in the air:

Environmental data FKW 134a

ODP – Ozone depletion potential

CLP – Chlorine load potential

PCR – Photochemical reactivity

GWP – Greenhouse effect

CO

2

equivalent

Fuel/urea

Designation

Fuel tank

Urea tank

Filling quantity

800 L

70 L

Specification

R134a

PAG

1,1,1,2 tetrafluoroethane

CH

2

F CF

3

102.0 g/mol

-26.1 °C

-101.0 °C

-101.1 °C

40.60 bar

1206 kg/m 3 not inflammable

ODP=0

CLP=0

PCR=0.5

1,430

2,574 kg

Specification

See shipped operating instructions from LIEBHERR

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 67

5

5.2

5.2

Technical Data

Tyres

Tyres

Before working on a slope, increase the tyre pressure by 0.4 bar more than the recommended pressure indicated in the following table. After working on the slope, the tyre pressure must be set to the recommended values in the table.

Before putting the machine into storage at the end of the harvesting season, set the tyre pressure to the maximum permitted value. Before starting the new season, the tyre pressure must be set to the values in the table.

Tyres

Front: 800/65 R32 (AC70N)

Rear: 600/65 R28 (AC65)

Front: 800/60 R32 (Flotation Trac)

Rear: 600/60 R30.5 (Flotation Trac)

Recommended tyre pressure

1.6 bar

1.4 bar

1.2 bar

1.2 bar

Max. permissible tyre pressure

4.0 bar

2.0 bar

4.0 bar

4.0 bar

68

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

6

6.1

Control and Display Elements

Overview of operating elements

Control and Display Elements

Overview of operating elements

6

6.1

3 4 5

1

6 7 8 9

2

10

11

6.2

BM000-034

3

4

1

2

5

6

Steering column with steering wheel

Brake pedal

7

8

Navigation module

Keypad

Operation unit automatic climate control 9

Light control unit 10

Ignition lock

Terminal

11 Control lever Interior lighting/control lever lighting switch

Main mode switch

Opening doors and windows of cabin

Opening right side window

In case of an emergency, the right side window can be opened as an exit door.

WARNING

Danger to life due to blocked escape route

If the right side window cannot be opened without obstruction, the escape route for the driver is obstructed.

„ Make sure prior to travel that the right platform is free.

To fully open the window on the right next to the driver's seat:

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 69

6

6.2

Control and Display Elements

Opening doors and windows of cabin

70

BM000-067

„ Swivel the lever (1) forwards until it locks into position.

BM000-176

„ Pull the cotter pin (2) and remove it.

BM000-177

„ Open the side window (3) all the way.

Opening the cabin door

Opening the cabin door from outside

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Control and Display Elements

Opening doors and windows of cabin

6

6.2

BX001-138

„ Unlock the door lock (1) with the door key.

„ Press in the door lock (1) and open the door.

Opening the cabin door from inside

BX001-139

„ Press up the door opening lever (1) and open the door outwards.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 71

6

6.3

6.3

Control and Display Elements

Control and display elements on the steering column

Control and display elements on the steering column

BM000-035

1 Steering wheel

2

3

Warning lights,

refer to page 76

Unlocking pedal for steering column adjustment bottom,

refer to page 162

5

6.3.1

6.3.1.1

Steering column switch

Activating horn

4 Release lever for horizontal steering column adjustment and upper pivot point,

refer to page 162

Steering column switch, refer to page 72

72

BM000-055

„ To actuate the horn, press the momentary switch (1) for the horn on the steering column switch (2).

Æ As long as the momentary switch is pressed, the horn sounds.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

6.3.1.2

Control and Display Elements

Control and display elements on the steering column

Switching direction indicators on/off

6

6.3

6.3.1.3

BM000-056

„ To switch on the right direction indicator, move the steering column switch (1) forwards.

Æ The direction indicator on the right is switched on.

„ To switch on the left direction indicator, push the steering column switch (1) backwards.

Æ The direction indicator on the left is switched on.

The direction indicator is switched off when the steering wheel is turned.

„ To switch off the direction indicator when the steering wheel is not turned, move the steering column switch (1) in the opposite direction.

The warning light for direction indicator lights up when the direction indicator lamps have been switched on,

refer to page 76 .

Switching parking light/dipped beam on/off

BM000-059

The lighting setting ring gauge (2) on the steering column switch (1) can be turned to the following positions:

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 73

6

6.3

Control and Display Elements

Control and display elements on the steering column

Pos.

Icon

I

Explanation

Switches the light off.

II

III

IV

Switches the parking light on.

Switches dipped beam on.

Inoperative

6.3.1.4

„ To switch on the parking light, turn the lighting setting ring gauge (2) one notch forwards to position II.

Æ

Front parking light and rear parking light are lit, refer to page 79

.

ü

The ignition is switched on, refer to page 92

.

„ To switch on the dipped beam, turn the lighting setting ring gauge (2) to the second notch forwards to position III.

Æ

The green dipped beam indicator lamp is lit, refer to page 76 .

Æ Dipped beam, front parking light, licence plate lamp and rear position lamp are on,

refer to page 79

„ To switch off the parking light and dipped beam, turn the lighting setting ring gauge (2) to the last notch backwards to position I.

Æ All the lights have been switched off.

Switching full beam on/off

74

BM000-057

ü

The dipped beam has been switched on, refer to page 73

.

„ To switch on full beam, press the steering column switch (1) downwards.

Æ The steering column switch locks in this position and full beam is switched on.

Æ The blue warning light full beam is on,

refer to page 76 .

„ To switch off full beam, move the steering column switch (1) to the neutral position.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

6.3.1.5

Actuating headlamp flasher

Control and Display Elements

Control and display elements on the steering column

6

6.3

6.3.1.6

BM000-058

„ To activate the headlamp flasher, pull the steering column switch (1) upwards.

Æ As long as the steering column switch is pulled upwards, the full beam and the blue warning

light full beam light up, refer to page 76

.

Switching windshield wipers on/off

BM000-060

The setting ring gauge (2) for the windshield wiper on the steering column switch (1) can be turned to the following positions:

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 75

6

6.3

Control and Display Elements

Control and display elements on the steering column

Pos.

I

Icon Explanations

Switches the windscreen wiper off.

II

III

IV

Switches on interval mode of the windscreen wiper.

Switches on continuous operation of the windscreen wiper.

Switches on the windscreen washer system.

6.3.2

„ To switch on the wiper in interval mode, turn the setting ring gauge (2) one notch forwards to position II.

Æ The windshield wiper operates in interval mode.

„ To switch on the wiper in continuous operation, turn the setting ring gauge (2) to the second notch forwards to position III.

Æ The windshield wiper operates in continuous operation.

„ To switch on the windscreen washer system, turn the setting ring gauge (2) to the third notch forwards to position IV.

Æ The windscreen washer system is operating.

„ To switch off the wiper, turn the setting ring gauge (2) to the last notch backwards to position

I.

Æ The wiper returns to the rest position and stops.

Warning lights

76

BM000-263

1 Warning light for direction indicator left

2 Warning light for full beam

3 Warning light for dipped beam

4 Charging warning light

5 not assigned

6 Warning light for direction indicator on right

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

6.3.3

Control and Display Elements

Actuating service brake

Switching the flashing warning light on/off

6

6.4

6.4

BM000-061

„ To switch on the flashing warning light, press the flashing warning light switch (1) to position

II.

Æ When the flashing warning light is switched on, all direction indicators flash simultaneously

and the warning lights for the direction indicators on the left and right are lit, refer to page 76

.

„ To switch off the flashing warning light, press the flashing warning light switch (1) to position

I.

Æ The warning lights for direction indicators on the left and right go out.

Actuating service brake

WARNING

Risk of accident due to defective service brake!

If the service brake has a restricted function, the machine cannot be brought to a standstill in time. Thus there is a risk of serious injuries or death.

„ Before starting the machine, always check service brake and ensure its functionality.

BM000-062

„ Before driving, check the service brake, drive the machine at low speed one metre forwards and actuate the brake pedal (1).

Æ If the machine brakes, the service brake is functioning correctly.

Æ If the machine does not brake, stop driving the machine.

„

Shut down and secure the machine, refer to page 31

.

„ Have a technician check and repair the service brake.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 77

6

6.5

6.5

Control and Display Elements

Lighting

Lighting

6.5.1

Light control unit

The Light Control Unit is used to switch the working lights, mirror heating and the wipers on and off and to adjust the outside mirrors.

If one of the functions is active, an LED above the corresponding key lights up.

78

2

3

4

9

10

11

12

13

6

7

8

BXG000-012

Pos.

1

5

Designation

"Mirror heating" key

Explanation

Switches the heating on/off for the outside rearview mirrors and the anti-collision mirror.

not assigned

"Warning beacon" key Switches the warning beacons on/off.

"Cabin working light, left/right" key

Switches the cabin working light at left and right on/off.

"Maintenance and ladder lighting" key

Switches the maintenance and ladder lighting on/ off.

"Working light, left/right" key Switches the working light at left and right on/off.

not assigned

"Left wiper" key

"Right wiper" key not assigned

"Rear working light" key not assigned

"Memory" key

Switches the left wiper on/off.

Switches the right wiper on/off.

Switches the rear working light on/off.

Switches a programmed combination of working

lights on/off, refer to page 81

.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

6.5.1.1

Control and Display Elements

Lighting

6

6.5

16

17

18

19

Pos.

14

15

20

21

22

Designation not assigned

"Working lights cabin roof" key

Explanation

Switches the cabin roof working lights on/off.

"Front guard working lights" key Switches the front guard working lights on/off.

not assigned

"All working lights" key 1

"Right outside rear-view mirror" key not assigned

Switches all working lights on/off.

Activates the right outside rear-view mirror for mirror adjustment.

"Left outside rear-view mirror" key

Activates the left outside rear-view mirror for mirror adjustment.

"Mirror adjustment" control panel Adjusts the reflecting surface of the mirror which has a lit indicator lamp.

1 The "All working lights" key switches the working lights on/off only if the parking light has been switched on.

Road travel lighting

1

2

5

8

7

BM000-064

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

6

3 4

5

1

79

6

6.5

Control and Display Elements

Lighting

1 Side direction indicator/flashing warning lamp

2 Dipped beam/full beam

3 Front position lamp

4 Front direction indicator/flashing warning lamp

5 Warning beacon

6 Licence plate lamp

7 Rear direction indicator/flashing warning lamp

8 Rear position lamp/parking light/brake lamp

6.5.1.2

Working lights

WARNING

Risk of accident from dazzling working lights

If the working lights are not switched off during road travel, road users may be blinded.

„ Switch the working lights off during road travel.

1

2

4

5

3

2 3

80

BM000-331

1 Front cabin working light

2 Rear cabin working light

3 Side working light

4 Rear working light

5 Front working light

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

6.5.1.3

Control and Display Elements

Lighting

Switching and saving working lights via “Memory” key

6

6.5

6.5.1.4

BXG000-039

The "Memory" key (2) can be used to combine several working lights (1) into one lighting scenario so that they can be switched on or off simultaneously.

„ To save a lighting scenario with different working lights, switch on the required working lights

(1) with the corresponding keys and press the "Memory" key (2) for 3 seconds.

Æ The lighting scenario is saved. For monitoring purposes the LED above the "Memory" key

(2) flashes.

„ To switch on the working lights (1) of the saved lighting scenario, press the "Memory" key

(2).

Æ The working lights (1) of the saved lighting scenario light up. For monitoring purposes the

LEDs are lit above the keys which belong to the lighting scenario.

„ To switch off the working lights (1) of the saved lighting scenario, press the "Memory" key

(2).

Æ The working lights (1) of the saved lighting scenario go out. For monitoring purposes the

LEDs go out above the keys which belong to the lighting scenario.

„ To save a new lighting scenario, repeat the saving process with different working lights (1).

Æ The previous lighting scenario is overwritten.

Warning beacons

BM000-095

INFORMATION

In some countries the warning beacons must be switched on for road travel. Observe the respective national statutory regulations.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 81

6

6.5

Control and Display Elements

Lighting

The warning beacons (2) are automatically switched on when the Main Mode Switch is set to

"Road mode".

„ To manually switch off the warning beacons (2), press the key (1) on the Light Control Unit.

Æ The LED above the key (1) goes out.

6.5.1.5

Ladder lighting

For the "Ladder and maintenance lighting" version

To enable the rungs on the ladder up to the cabin to be easily seen, even in the dark, the rungs can be illuminated

82

BM000-234

Leaving Home function

The Leaving Home function allows the cabin to be entered safely, even in the dark.

„ To activate the "Leaving Home" function, press the "Ladder lighting" (3) key.

Æ The lights (1), (2), (4) and (5) light up for a certain amount of time.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Control and Display Elements

Lighting

Coming Home function

The Coming Home function allows the cabin to be left safely, even in the dark.

„ The activate the Coming Home function, turn the ignition key to the "STOP" position.

Æ The lights (1), (2), (4) and (5) light up for a certain amount of time.

6

6.5

Lighting for refuelling

The lighting for refuelling serves to illuminate around the tank nozzle sufficiently in the dark.

„ To activate the lighting for refuelling, press the "Ladder lighting" key (3) 2 x or if either the

Coming Home function or Leaving Home function is active, press the "Ladder lighting" key

(3) 1 x.

Æ The lights (2) light up for a certain amount of time.

INFORMATION

The time period for activation of the individual functions can be set in the terminal in the menu cabin "Lighting settings".

6.5.1.6

Maintenance lighting

For the "Ladder and maintenance lighting" version

BM000_236

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 83

6

6.5

Control and Display Elements

Lighting

1 Maintenance lamp left side hood

2 Maintenance lamp cooler compartment

3 Maintenance lamp right side hood

4 Maintenance lamp rear storage compartment

„ To switch on the maintenance lamps (1), (2), (3) and (4), press the "Maintenance and ladder lighting" key,

refer to page 78 .

Æ The maintenance lamps (1), (2), (3) and (4) light up.

„ To switch on the maintenance lamps (1), (2), (3), (4) and the lighting on the ladder up to the

cabin, press the key on the ladder up to the cabin for longer than 2 seconds, refer to page 78

.

Æ The maintenance lamps (1), (2), (3), (4) and the lighting on the ladder up to the cabin light up for 20 minutes. After 20 minutes the central electrical system switches off to preserve battery power.

6.5.1.7

Wiper on left/on right

6.5.1.8

BXG000-051

„ To switch on the left wiper, press the "Left wiper" key (1) on the light control unit.

Æ The left wiper wipes, the LED above the key is lit.

„ To switch off the left wiper, press the "Left wiper" key (1).

Æ The left wiper goes into park position, LED above the key goes out.

„ To switch on the right wiper, press the "Right wiper" key (2) on the light control unit.

Æ The right wiper wipes, the LED above the key is lit.

„ To switch off the right wiper, press the "Right wiper" key (2).

Æ The right wiper goes into park position, LED above the key goes out.

Setting mirror

Adjusting outside rear-view mirrors

WARNING

Danger to life of persons next to and behind the machine due to impaired view of the driver!

If the outside rear-view mirrors are not correctly set, the driver does not have a proper view of the area around the machine, possibly placing people in danger when the machine is being driven.

„ Before driving the machine, set the outside rear-view mirrors so that the rear area is fully visible to the driver from the driver’s seat.

84

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Control and Display Elements

Lighting

6

6.5

BXG000-052

„ In order to adjust the left outside rear-view mirror, press the “Left outside rear-view mirror” key (3).

ð The LED above the key lights up.

„ Press the "Mirror adjustment" control panel (1) in the direction in which the selected mirror is to be adjusted.

Æ The area of the left outside rear-view mirror swivels in the desired direction.

„ In order to adjust the right outside rear-view mirror, press the “Right outside rear-view mirror” key (2).

ð The LED above the key lights up.

„ Press the "Mirror adjustment" control panel (1) in the direction in which the selected mirror is to be adjusted.

Æ The surface of the right outside rear-view mirror swivels in the desired direction.

Setting the anti-collision mirror

WARNING

Danger to life of persons on right next to the machine as the driver only has an impaired view!

If the anti-collision mirror has not been set correctly, the driver does not have a proper view of the ground area next to the right front wheel, possibly placing people in danger when the machine is being driven.

„ Before starting to drive, set the anti-collision mirror so that the ground area next to the right front wheel is fully visible to the driver from the driver’s seat.

BXG000-097

„ Manually set the anti-collision mirror (1) in such a way that the ground area next to the right front wheel can be checked prior to starting.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 85

6

6.5

Control and Display Elements

Lighting

Switching mirror heating on/off

6.5.2

BXG000-054

„ To heat the outside mirrors and the anti-collision mirror, press the "Mirror heating" key (1).

Æ The LED above the key lights up. The heating for the outside mirrors and the anti-collision mirror has been switched on.

„ To switch off the heating for the outside mirrors and the anti-collision mirror, press the

"Mirror heating" key (1).

Æ The LED above the key goes out. The heating for the outside mirrors and the anti-collision mirror has been switched off.

Interior lighting

86

BM000-040

The interior lamp (2) is located on the cab roof and is switched with the switch (3).

The switch has 3 positions:

Pos.

I

II

III

Explanation

The interior lamp is switched via the door contact switch.

The interior lamp has been switched off.

The interior lamp has been switched on.

Switching logic when the switch (3) is in position II:

• When the cabin door is opened, the interior lamp (2) is switched on and is switched off again after a delay.

• When the cabin door is being opened, the interior lamp (2) is switched on. As soon as

ignition stage II is switched on refer to page 194 , the interior lamp (2) goes out.

• When the diesel engine has been switched off, the interior lamp (2) is switched on and goes out after a short time.

In addition to the interior lamp (2), the lighting for the control lever (1) is switched on as soon as the parking, dipped or full beam has been switched on.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

6.6

Control and Display Elements

Operating elements on control lever

Operating elements on control lever

The control lever is used to make important settings and issue commands for road and field mode of the machine.

6

6.6

BXG000-010

The keys on the control lever are used to run machine functions. The keys are assigned either to sensing mode, step mode or 2-stage operation. Depending on the particular key operating mode involved, there are 2 methods of running the machine functions:

• Sensing mode: The function is activated and completely run by tapping the key. The function is not stopped by releasing the key.

• Step mode: The function is run for as long as the key is pressed.

designated in the following table is located on the keypad, refer to

The release button

page 89

.

Pos.

1.1

Designation

"Lower/fold down all mowers simultaneously" key

Explanation

Lowers all mowers simultaneously. (Sensing mode)

1.2

"Raise/fold in all mowers simultaneously" key

With previously pressed release button :

Folds down all mowers simultaneously from the transport into the headland position. (Step mode)

For the "Hydraulically foldable side guards" version:

The side guards of the mowers are automatically actuated.

Raises all mowers simultaneously. (1.stage: step mode; 2. stage: sensing mode)

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 87

6

6.6

6

7

8

4

5

2

3

Control and Display Elements

Operating elements on control lever

Pos.

1.2

1.3

1.4

9

10

11

12

Designation

"Raise/fold in all mowers simultaneously" key

Explanation

With previously pressed release button :

Folds up all mowers simultaneously from headland position to transport position. (Step mode)

For the "Hydraulically foldable side guards" version:

The side guards of the mowers are automatically actuated.

"Left front mower side shift" key For the "Hydraulic side shift on front mower" version:

Shifts front mower to left. (Step mode)

"Right front mower side shift" key For the "Hydraulic side shift on front mower" version:

Shifts front mower to right. (Step mode)

"Acceleration behaviour" switch Switches the value for the acceleration behaviour.

"Traction drive" key Releases the traction drive.

"M1" key

"M2" key

Freely assignable memory key

Freely assignable memory key

"M3" key

"M4" key

"Lower front mower" key

"Raise front mower" key

Freely assignable memory key

Freely assignable memory key

"Automatic steering system" key For the "Automatic steering" version:

Activates the automatic steering system. (Sensing mode)

Lowers the front mower. (Sensing mode)

Raises the front mower. (1.stage: step mode; 2.

stage: sensing mode)

"Lower/fold down right side mounted mower" key

Lowers the right mower (sensing mode).

"Raise/fold in right side mounted mower" key

With pressed release button :

Folds down right mower from transport into headland position. (Step mode)

Raises the right mower. (1.stage: step mode; 2.

stage: sensing mode)

With previously pressed release button :

Folds in the right mower from the headland position into the transport position. (Step mode)

88

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

6.7

Pos.

13

14

Control and Display Elements

Control and display elements on the keypad

Designation

"Lower/fold down left side mounted mower" key

Explanation

Lowers the left mower. (Sensing mode)

"Raise/fold in left side mounted mower" key

With previously pressed release button :

Folds down left mower from transport into headland position. (Step mode)

Raises the left mower. (1.stage: step mode; 2.

stage: sensing mode)

6

6.7

With previously pressed release button :

Folds in the left mower from the headland position into the transport position. (Step mode)

Control and display elements on the keypad

BXG000-011

• The keys that can be used to select functions light up.

• The top left LED in each key flashes on and off or lights up when the selected function is executed.

The keys on the control lever are used to run machine functions. The keys are assigned either to sensing mode, step mode or 2-stage operation. Depending on the particular key operating mode involved, there are 2 methods of running the machine functions:

• Sensing mode: The function is activated and completely run by tapping the key. The function is not stopped by releasing the key.

• Step mode: The function is run for as long as the key is pressed.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 89

6

6.7

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3

10

11

20

21

22

23

24

17

18

19

Control and Display Elements

Control and display elements on the keypad

Pos.

1

12

13

14

15

16

Designation

Release button for "Mowing units and drives"

Explanation

Release for:

• Fold in/down mowing units

• Switch on drives (Sensing mode)

Not assigned.

"Switch on all drives" key Switch on all drives. (Sensing mode)

"Switch off all drives" key

"Switch on left drive" key

"Switch off left drive" key

"Switch on front drive" key

Switch off all drives. (Sensing mode)

Switch on left drive. (Sensing mode)

Switch off left drive. (Sensing mode)

Switch on front drive (Sensing mode)

"Switch off front drive" key

"Switch on right drive" key

"Switch off right drive" key

"Increase diesel engine speed" key

"Reduce diesel engine speed" key

"Diesel engine speed" key

Switch off front drive (Sensing mode)

Switch on right drive. (Sensing mode)

Switch off right drive. (Sensing mode)

Increases the speed of the diesel engine. (Step mode)

Reduces the speed of the diesel engine. (Step mode)

"M-Power/Eco-Power" key

Switches between saved speed of the diesel engine and idle speed of the diesel engine (sensing mode).

Switches between Eco‑Power mode and

M‑Power mode (Sensing mode)

"Parking brake" key

"Traction control system" key

• Applies the parking brake. (Sensing mode)

• Releases the parking brake. (Sensing mode)

Changes between TC I (low slip) and TC II (increased slip) and OFF. (Sensing mode)

Raises front and rear axle. (Step mode) "Raise front and rear axle" key

"Lower front and rear axle" key Lowers front and rear axle. (Step mode)

"Fold down side guard" key Folds down side guard. (Sensing mode)

"Fold up side guard" key

"Open left swath hood" key

"Close left swath hood" key

"Open right swath hood" key

"Close right swath hood" key

Folds up side guard. (Sensing mode)

Opens left swath hood. (Sensing mode)

Closes left swath hood. (Sensing mode)

Opens right swath hood. (Sensing mode)

Closes right swath hood. (Sensing mode)

90

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

6.8

Main mode switch

Control and Display Elements

Main mode switch

6

6.8

4

5

2

3

6

BM000-012

The Main Mode Switch (8) is used to select the operating mode of the machine.

Pos.

1

7

8

Designation

Quick-stop switch

Main Mode Switch tip

"Neutral mode" switch position

"Road mode" switch position

"Field mode" switch position

Main Mode Switch

Explanation

Stops the working functions. The diesel engine continues running.

Indicates the selected operating mode.

Selects neutral mode.

Selects road mode.

Selects field mode.

"Maintenance mode" switch position

Selects maintenance mode.

Main Mode Switch unlocking device

Pressed unlocking device releases the rotary switch.

Released unlocking device locks the rotary switch.

Selects the operating mode of the machine.

To select an operating mode with the Main Mode Switch (8):

„ Press and hold down the unlocking device (7) on the Main Mode Switch (8) and simultaneously turn the Main Mode Switch (8) to the required operating mode.

Æ The tip (2) indicates the selected operating mode.

To stop the working functions in an emergency:

„ Press the quick-stop switch (1).

To release the working functions again:

„ Unlock the quick-stop switch (1) by slightly turning it clockwise.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 91

6

6.9

6.9

Control and Display Elements

Quick-stop switch

Quick-stop switch

BXG000-006

The quick-stop switch (1) in the cabin is used to stop the working functions of the machine. The diesel engine continues running.

„ To actuate it, press down the quick-stop switch (1) until it locks into position.

Æ The working functions are stopped. The switch is locked.

6.10

BXG000-058

„ To release it, turn the quick-stop switch (1) clockwise until the home position is reached.

Æ The working functions are activated. The switch is released.

Ignition lock

92

BM000-029

The ignition key (1) can be turned to 4 different positions in the ignition lock:

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Pos.

STOP

I

II

III

Control and Display Elements 6

Automatic climate control 6.11

Explanation

The circuit is interrupted.

The circuit for the electronics is switched on.

The ignition is switched on

Start position

6.11

6.11.1

Automatic climate control

Overview of automatic climate control

The driver can use the automatic climate control operation unit to operate the air conditioning and heating system of the cabin.

INFORMATION

If the power supply to the control unit of the automatic climate control is interrupted, the control unit performs a self test after power is restored. After the self test is complete, the last setting to be saved appears.

BX000-140

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 93

6 Control and Display Elements

6.11

Automatic climate control

4

5

6

Pos.

1

2

3

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

Designation

Air conditioning mode key

Plus key

Icon for the cabin

Air conditioning mode icon

REHEAT mode icon

Temperature unit

REHEAT key

Shift key for temperature units

Shift key for operating mode

Numeric display

Manual fan mode icon

Bar icon for the rotational speed of the evaporator fan

Fully automatic mode icon

Minus key

Control unit on/off key

Explanation

Switches air conditioning mode on/off.

In automatic mode: Increases the value for the required cabin temperature.

In manual mode: Increases the rotational speed of the evaporator fan.

Indicates the air flow in the cabin in REHEAT mode.

Air conditioning mode has been switched on.

REHEAT mode has been switched on.

Indicates the temperature unit of the setpoint value of the cabin temperature in °C or °F.

Switches REHEAT mode (dehumidifying cabin air) on/off.

Switches between temperature units °Celsius/

°Fahrenheit (key covered)

Automatically/manually switches between rotational speed of the evaporator fan.

Indicates the setpoint value of the cabin temperature or the error code.

Appears in manual fan mode.

Indicates the rotational speed of the evaporator fan in manual mode.

Fully automatic mode has been switched on.

In automatic mode: Reduces the value for the required cabin temperature.

In manual mode: Reduces the rotational speed of the evaporator fan.

Switches the control unit on/off.

6.11.2

Switching on automatic climate control

„ To switch on automatic climate control, press .

When the automatic climate control has been switched on, the control unit performs a self test.

The software version is displayed for approx. 5 seconds.

94

EQ002-096

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Control and Display Elements 6

Automatic climate control 6.11

Then the operating hours of the air conditioning are displayed for 5 seconds (e.g. 6 operating hours).

6.11.3

EQ002-095

Then the last saved setting appears in the display.

Setting cabin temperature

EQ002-098

The display shows the following information:

• The current cabin temperature in °C.

• That the control unit is in automatic mode (AUTO).

„ To change the cabin temperature, gradually press shown on the display.

or until the required value is

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 95

6 Control and Display Elements

6.11

Automatic climate control

6.11.4

Switching air conditioning mode on/off

EQ002-101

„ To switch on air conditioning mode, press .

Æ The icon is shown on the display. Air conditioning mode has been switched on.

Æ The compressor is turned on by the control unit if necessary.

„ To switch off air conditioning mode, press .

6.11.5

Æ The icon goes out on the display. Air conditioning mode has been switched off.

Æ The compressor is switched off by the control unit.

Switching REHEAT mode on/off

During REHEAT mode the cabin air is dehumidified.

96

EQ002-094

„ To switch on REHEAT mode, press .

Æ The icon is shown on the display. REHEAT mode has been switched on.

In REHEAT mode

• the compressor is permanently switched on,

• the rotational speed of the evaporator fan can be manually adjusted further,

• the control unit switches on the heater as required to keep the room temperature at the setpoint value.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

REHEAT mode is automatically limited to 60 minutes.

Control and Display Elements 6

Automatic climate control 6.11

„ To switch off REHEAT mode, press .

Æ The icon goes out on the display. REHEAT mode has been switched off.

6.11.6

Manually setting the evaporator fan speed

EQ002-093

„ To switch on the manual setting of the rotational speed of the evaporator fan,

Æ The manual setting of the rotational speed of the evaporator fan is active.

press.

Æ The bargraph shows the currently set fan speed (full bargraph =

100%).

Æ The AUTO icon goes out on the display. AUTO mode has been switched off.

Æ The icon flashes for 5 s.

During this period the fan speed can be increased or reduced in 10% steps.

„ To increase the fan speed, press .

„ To reduce the fan speed, press .

INFORMATION

The lowest adjustable fan speed is 30% (three bars are displayed).

„ To activate AUTO mode, press twice.

Æ The AUTO icon is shown on the display. AUTO mode has been switched on.

Æ The and icons are no longer displayed.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 97

6 Control and Display Elements

6.11

Automatic climate control

6.11.7

Switching temperature display between degrees Celsius and degrees

Fahrenheit

EQ002-092

„ To switch the temperature display between degrees Celsius and degrees Fahrenheit, hold down the concealed key (1) and also press the key.

6.11.8

EQ002-091 / EQ002-101

Æ The temperature display switches to the other temperature unit.

Malfunctions indicated on display

Error code (F0)

98

EQ002-099

A defective ambient temperature sensor is displayed by the flashing display (F0):

• The control unit has recorded an error in the room temperature sensor. Controller is no longer ready for operation.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Control and Display Elements 6

Automatic climate control 6.11

INFORMATION

In case of an error, the climate control continues working with the setting that was valid before the fault was recorded.

Possible causes of fault:

• Short circuit or discontinuance of sensor line.

• The plug connection on sensor or control unit temperature sensor is defective.

After the error has been eliminated, the climate control is ready for operation again.

The fault is no longer displayed.

Error code (F1)

EQ002-100

Error in blow-out temperature sensor is indicated by flashing indicator (F1):

• The control unit has recorded an error of blow-out temperature sensor, the control is no longer ready for operation.

INFORMATION

In case of an error, the climate control continues working with the setting that was valid before the fault was recorded.

Possible causes of fault:

• Short circuit or discontinuance of sensor line.

• The plug connection on sensor or control unit temperature sensor is defective.

After the error has been eliminated, the climate control is ready for operation again.

The fault is no longer displayed.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 99

6 Control and Display Elements

6.12

Sockets

6.12

Sockets

6.12.1

Cigarette lighter 12 V/24 V socket

6.12.2

BX001-203

On the right side of the cabin next to the ignition lock are:

• Cigarette lighter (12 V) (1)

• Socket (24 V) (2)

WARNING

Risk of burns from the hot cigarette lighter

During operation the cigarette lighter generates such high temperatures that it may cause burns.

„ Do not held the cigarette lighter (1) in the depressed position.

„ Hold the hot cigarette lighter (1) by the handle only.

„ Press in the cigarette lighter (12 V) (1) to heat it up:

Æ When the required lighter temperature has been reached, the cigarette lighter (12 V) (1) jumps back out automatically.

Electrical consumers with 24 V and maximum 15 A can be connected to the socket (24 V) (2).

If the diesel engine has been switched off, the battery will be discharged.

12 V sockets

100

BX001-204

Located on the right side of the cabin next to the ignition lock is the 3-pin 12 volt socket

(15 A) (1).

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Control and Display Elements 6

Sockets 6.12

6.12.3

BX001-206

The 12 volt socket (1) is located behind the driver's seat.

Diagnostic socket ISOBUS/diagnostic socket KRONE

6.12.4

BX001-205

The following diagnostics interfaces are located behind the driver's seat:

• Diagnostics socket ISOBUS (1)

• Diagnostics socket KRONE (2)

„ Ensure that only devices authorised by KRONE are connected to the diagnostics interfaces.

USB connection

BX001-207

The USB connection (1) is located in the right armrest.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 101

7

7.1

7

Terminal

Display design

Terminal

WARNING

Risk of injury to persons and damage to machines if error messages are ignored

If error messages are ignored without the fault being rectified injuries may occur to persons and/or severe damage to the machine.

„ Rectify fault if error message is shown.

„ If the fault cannot be rectified, contact KRONE service partner.

INFORMATION

The working screens and menus in the following chapters show all possible machine versions. Therefore, the working screen and the menus on the terminal of your machine may differ.

7.1

Display design

102

EQG002-015

Pos.

1

2

3

Designation

Display

Buzzer

"On/Off" key

4

5

"Display brighter" key

"Display darker" key

Explanation

Touch display and input interface on the terminal.

Reproduces acoustic warning signals.

Switches the display on/off.

As the terminal is switched on and off via the ignition, do not press the "On/Off" key until the terminal does not respond when the ignition is switched on/off.

Increases the brightness of the display

Reduces the brightness of the display

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Pos.

6

Designation

Status LED

7.2

7 Not assigned.

Description display

Terminal

Description display

7

7.2

Explanation

Blue:

The display has been switched off, the machine is running or the ignition has been switched on.

Yellow:

The terminal starts up (boots up) or shuts down.

Green:

The terminal is switched on and is running in normal mode.

Off:

The terminal and the ignition have been switched off.

EQG002-014

The display is used for displaying and entering data. It provides information about the current operating status of the machine. Settings can be made and different functions can be run.

To provide menu guidance and entry of values/data, the terminal is equipped with a touchcapable display. Touching the display enables you to call up and change values.

NOTICE

Operate the display only with your finger tips to avoid damaging the surface. Never use a pen, pencil or other pointed objects.

„ To run a specific function, press the appropriate key on the display.

„ To change a value quicker, press the respective key for more than 2 seconds.

„ To scroll in selection windows, drag a finger over the display.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 103

7

7.3

7.3

Terminal

Navigation module

Navigation module

3

4

5

6

7

EQ002-035

The function keys (1–6) of the navigation module provide direct access to the most important keys on the display.

The navigation scroll wheel (7) can be used to select the keys on the terminal, make settings on the machine and start and stop functions.

Description of the keys

Pos.

1

Icon Designation

"Step back" key

Explanation

Goes back one input step.

2 "Step forwards" key Goes forwards one input step.

"Home" key

"Main menu" key

"F2" key

"F1" key

Switches to the working screen

"Road mode" or "Field mode".

Opens the main menu.

Not assigned.

Not assigned.

Navigation scroll wheel Navigates on the display.

104

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Terminal

Input window

7

7.4

"Navigation scroll wheel" function

7.4

BXG000-055

Besides inputting data through the touch display, the navigation scroll wheel can also be used to navigate on the terminal and change numerical values.

To do this, the "navigation scroll wheel" can be pressed, rotated and slid to the side.

Navigating on the terminal

• Turning: Changes the selection of keys on the terminal in the direction of rotation.

The selected key has a yellow border.

• Pushing: Changes the selection of keys on the terminal in the sliding direction.

The selected key has a yellow border.

• Pressing: Actuates the selected key.

Changing an adjustable numerical value

„ To navigate to the required adjustable value, rotate or slide the "navigation scroll wheel" (1).

Æ The selected key has a yellow border.

„ To switch the adjustable value to input mode, press the "navigation scroll wheel" (1).

Æ The key has an orange background.

„ To change the value, rotate the "navigation scroll wheel" (1).

„ To save the adjusted value, press the "navigation scroll wheel" (1).

Input window

If a parameter with a numerical value is selected in a menu, an input window opens. The input window can be used to enter and then to release a new setpoint value for the parameter via a keypad.

EQG000-008

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 105

7

7.4

Terminal

Input window

Operate input window

4

5

6

7

8

9

2

3

EQG002-061

Pos.

Icon

1

-

Designation

Cancel

Save

Value

Delete last digit

Explanation

Cancels the entry and closes the input window without saving the entry.

Saves the entered value and closes the input window.

Indicates the currently saved or newly entered value, in this example the value 50%.

Deletes the last digit of the value.

Delete value Deletes the input value.

Standard value (example) Sets the value to the preset standard value (in this example the value

50).

Point Inputs a decimal point.

Keys "0" to "9"

Plus/minus

Input the numerical values 0 to 9.

Switches the algebraic sign of the value.

106

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

7.5

Terminal

Selection window

Explanation

• Each time the key is pressed, the current value is increased or reduced by the indicated value.

• If the key is pressed and held down, the value changes continuously by the indicated value.

7

7.5

Pos.

Icon

10

11

12

13

Designation

-100 (example)

-10 (example)

+10 (example)

+100 (example)

14

15

Minimum/maximum value Indicates the minimum and maximum value of the parameter.

Parameter designation Indicates the parameter designation, in this example "sensitivity".

If a value is input which is less than the minimum value, the value cannot be saved and the minimum value (14) is shown in red.

If a value is input which is greater than the maximum value, the value cannot be saved and the maximum value (14) is shown in red.

„ Input the required value via the keys (7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13).

ð The value appears in the "Value" display range (3).

„ To save the entered value, press .

Selection window

If there are several selection options for an input field, a corresponding selection window opens.

2

3

EQG002-060

Pos.

1

Icon

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Designation

Cancel

Save

Up

Explanation

Cancels the entry and closes the selection window without saving the entry.

Saves the entered value and closes the selection window.

Moves the slide controller upwards.

107

7

7.5

Terminal

Selection window

Pos.

4

Icon

5

6

Designation

Down

Possible selection

Current selection

Explanation

Moves the slide controller downwards.

Can be selected.

Indicates the selection made or the saved setting.

„ To choose the required setting, press

ð The chosen selection is highlighted with

.

.

„ To save the chosen selection, press .

108

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

8

Terminal machine functions 8

Terminal machine functions

WARNING

Risk of injury to persons and damage to machines if error messages are ignored

If error messages are ignored without the fault being rectified injuries may occur to persons and/or severe damage to the machine.

„ Rectify fault if error message is shown.

„ If the fault cannot be rectified, contact KRONE service partner.

EQG002-011

After switching on the ignition the working screen "Road mode" or the working screen "Field mode" is opened in the main window, depending on the position of the Main Mode Switch.

• The working screen "Road mode" shows the most-important engine and driving data.

• The working screen "Field mode" shows information about the field mode. Several settings for the field mode can be made when in the working screen.

The working screen is divided up into the following display ranges:

Pos.

1

Designation

Status line

2

3

4

5

6

Malfunction warning panel

Title bar

Direct input field mode

Information section

Engine and driving data

Explanation

Shows the current states of the machine, refer to page 110 .

Indicates error states of malfunctions.

Is only visible when malfunctions occur,

refer to page 113 .

Keys for counter menu, error menu and main

menu, refer to page 115

.

Keys for direct input of the most important settings in field mode (on "Field mode" working

screen only), refer to page 128 .

Freely assignable keys, refer to page 129

.

Indicates current fuel levels, engine and traction

drive data, refer to page 129 .

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 109

8

8.1

8.1

Terminal machine functions

Status line

Status line

110

EQ002-089

1 Lateral mowing unit left 4 Assignment of control lever keys M1,

M2, M3 and M4

Automatic steering system 2

3

Front mounted mower

Right side mounted mower

5

The keys in the status line display the current status of the corresponding parts via colours and icons.

Left side mounted mower (1)

Icon Explanation

Side mounted mower in transport position and locked in place

Side mounted mower in transport position and not locked in place

Side mounted mower between transport and headland position

Side mounted mower in headland position

Side mounted mower below headland position (mowing unit load relief not active)

Side mounted mower in working position (mowing unit load relief active)

Error condition

Position of side mounted mower not available

When the key is pressed, the mower functions menu "Side mounted mowers" is opened.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Terminal machine functions

Status line

Front mounted mower (2)

Icon Explanation

Front mounted mower in headland position

8

8.1

Front mounted mower below headland position (mowing unit load relief not active)

Front mounted mower in working position (mowing unit load relief active)

Warning state, faulty on one side

Error condition, faulty on two sides

Position of front mounted mower not available

When a key is pressed, the mower functions menu "Front mounted mower" is opened.

Right side mounted mower (3)

Icon Explanation

Side mounted mower in transport position and locked in place

Side mounted mower in transport position and not locked in place

Side mounted mower between transport and headland position

Side mounted mower in headland position

Side mounted mower below headland position (mowing unit load relief not active)

Side mounted mower in working position (mowing unit load relief active)

Error condition

Position of side mounted mower not available

When a key is pressed, the mower functions menu "Side mounted mowers" is opened.

Assignment of control lever keys M1, M2, M3 and M4 (4)

The 4 control lever keys can be assigned with all the functions (the table shows an assignment using the M1 key):

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 111

8

8.1

Terminal machine functions

Status line

Icon Explanation

Key assignment for M1 is inactive.

Call up stored cutting height 1.

Call up stored cutting height 2.

Call up open/close right swath hood (for "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood" version).

Call up open/close left swath hood (for "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood" version).

Call up stored mowing unit load relief 1.

Call up stored mowing unit load relief 2.

Call up mirroring of front mowing unit side shift position (for "Hydraulic front mounted mower side shift" version).

Call up mirroring of front mowing unit side shift centre position (for "Hydraulic front mounted mower side shift" version).

Reverse front mowing unit side shift effective direction at steering angle

(for "Hydraulic front mounted mower side shift" version).

When a key is pressed, the cabin menu "Control lever" is opened.

Automatic steering system (5)

For the "Automatic steering system" version

Icon Explanation

ISOBUS automatic steering system is inactive.

ISOBUS automatic steering system is ready.

The automatic steering system is ready when the associated release switches have been actuated.

ISOBUS automatic steering system is active.

The automatic steering system is ready when the associated release switches and the "Automatic steering system" key have been actuated.

When a key is pressed, the driving functions menu "Automatic steering system" is opened.

112

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

8.2

Terminal machine functions

Malfunctions indicated on malfunction warning panel

Malfunctions indicated on malfunction warning panel

8

8.2

8.2.1

EQG002-021

The following warnings and faults may appear in the “Malfunction warning panel” display range:

Icon Designation

Exhaust aftertreatment system warning light

Explanation

Shows the status of the exhaust aftertreatment system.

Yellow engine warning light The engine electronics have detected a fault with the engine.

Red engine warning light

Indicator lamp Restricted operation

Indicator lamp frost protection mode

The engine electronics have detected a serious fault with the engine.

„ Immediately stop the engine and eliminate the fault.

If the control electronics establish a fault with the traction drive, the speed of the machine is limited to 0 to 20 km/h depending on the severity of the fault.

Frost protection mode is activated when the ambient temperature and the engine coolant temperature fall below a defined limit. In frost protection mode, the engine speed is limited. A progress bar below the indicator lamp shows for how long the frost protection will continue to be active.

Warning lights - Filling level urea tank

If the status of the warning lights changes, an acoustic warning signal is emitted.

The combinations listed in the table of status display of warning lights display the drop in the filling level in the urea tank as a percentage.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 113

8

8.2

Terminal machine functions

Malfunctions indicated on malfunction warning panel

Status of warning lights Explanation

10 % ≥ urea tank filling level > 5 %

• 1. Warning on off

5 % ≥ filling level urea tank > 2.5 %

• The available torque is reduced to 80 % of the maximum torque.

on flashing

2.5 % ≥ filling level urea tank > 2 %

• The available torque is reduced from 80

% to 20 % of the maximum torque.

flashing flashing

Filling level urea tank = 2 %

• The available torque is reduced to 20 % of the maximum torque.

flashing on

„ To reach full engine performance and driving speed again, fill an adequate amount of urea in the specified quantity into the urea tank.

8.2.2

Indicator lamps - urea quality, errors or manipulation on the exhaust aftertreatment system

If the status of the warning lights changes, an acoustic warning signal is emitted.

The combinations of indicator lamp status displays listed in the table indicate errors or manipulation on the exhaust aftertreatment system as well as inadmissible urea quality.

Status of the indicator lamps on on flashing flashing off flashing flashing on

Explanation

Up to 60 min engine running time after a fault or manipulation to the exhaust aftertreatment system or impermissible urea quality has been detected.

• 1. Warning

From 60 min – 170 min engine running time after the cause has been detected.

• The available torque is reduced to 80% of the maximum torque.

From 170 min – 200 min engine running time after the cause has been detected.

• The available torque is reduced from

80% to 20% of the maximum torque.

From 200 min engine running time after the cause has been detected.

• The available torque is reduced to 20% of the maximum torque.

To reach full engine performance and driving speed again:

„ Add an adequate amount of urea of the specified quality to the urea tank.

„ Search for and remedy the error on the exhaust aftertreatment system, get in touch with your KRONE service partner.

114

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

8.3

Keys in the title bar

Terminal machine functions

Keys in the title bar

8

8.3

EQG002-022

Icon

8.3.1

“Counters” menu

Designation

"Counter" menu

"Error" menu

Main menu

Explanation

Opens the "Counter" menu.

Opens the "Error" menu.

Opens the main menu.

EQ002-047 / EQ002-080

Current machine data can be retrieved via sub-menus in the “Counters” menu.

ü The working screen is active.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the “Counters” menu with its sub-menus.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 115

8

8.3

Terminal machine functions

Keys in the title bar

“Customer Counter” menu

EQG002-055

Customer records can be created in the “Customer Counter” menu.

ü The “Counters” menu is active.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The list with the created customers is displayed.

Creating customer data record

EQG002-056

„ To create a customer data record, press .

ð The alphanumeric input field "Last name" opens.

„ Enter or change the data of the customer in the alphanumeric input field.

116

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Terminal machine functions

Keys in the title bar

8

8.3

Operation alphanumeric input field

„ To change from capital letters to lower case letters and vice versa, press .

„ Press to change from alphabetical to numerical keyboard.

„ To change from numerical to alphabetical keyboard, press .

„ Press to enter special sign.

„ To save the customer record, press .

„ To cancel the entry and keep the old setting, press .

EQG003-027

„ To enter more customer data, press .

ð The menu with the input fields for the customer record is displayed.

EQG003-029

„ To enter the customer data, press the appropriate key.

„ Enter the data via the alphanumeric input field.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 117

8

8.3

Terminal machine functions

Keys in the title bar

EQG003-028

Æ The created customer data records are indicated in a list on the customer counter.

„ To create another customer data record, press .

„ To select a customer data record, press .

„ To select the surface counter for a customer, press .

EQG003-032

Æ The display shows the "Surfaces" overview for the particular customer.

Æ One "Surface 01" is automatically created for each new customer.

118

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Terminal machine functions

Keys in the title bar

8

8.3

Renaming surface

„ To open the “Details surface” window, press .

EQG003-020

„ To rename a surface, press the corresponding key; in this example, press

.

Æ The alphanumeric input field opens.

„ Rename the surface in the alphanumeric input field,

refer to page 117 .

„ To delete the surface, press .

Creating a surface

EQG003-021

„ To create a surface for the customer, press .

Æ The alphanumeric input field opens.

„ Enter the name for the new surface in the alphanumeric input field,

refer to page 117

.

Æ The created surfaces are displayed in a table in the "Surfaces" window.

If several surfaces are created for a customer, a line with the total values for the created surfaces of the customer appears at the end of the table.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 119

8

8.3

Terminal machine functions

Keys in the title bar

Deleting a surface

EQG002-074

„ To delete one or more surfaces, press .

Æ A selection view opens.

„ Select the surface or the surfaces that are to be deleted in the square at the end of the line.

„ To delete the selected surfaces, press .

120

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Starting and stopping surface counter

Terminal machine functions

Keys in the title bar

8

8.3

EQG003-022

„ To start the counter for each surface, press in the "Surfaces" window or

in the "Surface details" window.

Æ The counter starts and records the surface data until the counter is stopped again.

EQG002-059

Æ The currently recorded surface is shown in the "Customer counter" window and the

"Surfaces" window in the "Active customer counter" area The icon for the surface and for the customer is highlighted in green

„ To stop the counter, press

"Surface details" screen.

in the "Surfaces" window or in the

INFORMATION

If the key is pressed for a surface, although the customer counter has been started for another surface, a direct change is made to the surfaces being recorded. In other words, the counter of the previously recorded surface is stopped and - at the same time

- the counter for the other surface is started.

Viewing current surface data

The “Details surface” window displays the current surface data.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 121

8

8.3

Terminal machine functions

Keys in the title bar

122

EQG003-020

Exporting customer data

EQG002-058

„ Plug a USB flash drive into the USB port (1) in the right armrest.

„ To export customer data to the USB flash drive, press .

"Day counter" menu

EQG003-024

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Terminal machine functions

Keys in the title bar

8

8.3

ü The "Counter" menu has been selected.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ Three day counters are shown that permanently record the current work and consumption data for the machine for the three working periods currently running. The date and the time show when the day counters were last reset.

„ To complete the work periods and to reset the day counter, press .

.

„ To select the values for a day counter in the corresponding line, press

Æ The "Day counter details" window is opened.

EQG003-023

The "Day counter details" window shows the current data for the selected work period:

• Diesel engine operating hours

• Operating hours of mowers

• Fuel consumption

• Odometer (road, field, total)

• Surface counter

The work periods can be individually reset so that the counters each start counting the data again from 0

„ To complete the work periods and to reset the day counter, press .

“Total Counter” menu

EQG002-012

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 123

8

8.3

Terminal machine functions

Keys in the title bar

ü The “Counters” menu is active.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The current work and consumption data of the machine is displayed.

The following current data is displayed:

• Diesel engine operating hours

• Mowing unit operating hours

• Surface counter

• Fuel consumption

• Odometer (road, field, total distance)

8.3.2

“Error” menu

124

EQG002-024

ü The working screen is active.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the “Errors” menu with its sub-menus.

“Active Errors” menu

EQG003-025

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Terminal machine functions

Keys in the title bar

8

8.3

ü The “Errors” menu is active.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the “Active Errors” menu with the active errors on the machine with error number and error designation.

„ To call up information on an error, press next to the error message.

Æ The window for the error description is shown.

EQG003-026

1 Selected error number

2 Brief description of the error

„ To close the error description, press .

3 Description of the error

4 "Close" key

"Error history" menu

The error history can be emptied by a service technician only.

EQG003-090

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 125

8

8.3

Terminal machine functions

Keys in the title bar

ü The "Error" menu appears.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "Error history" menu with error messages that have occurred since the error history was last cleared.

„ To call up information on an error, press next to the error message.

Æ The window for the error description is shown.

EQG003-026

1 Selected error number

2 Brief description of the error

„ To close the error description, press .

3 Description of the error

4 "Close" key

"Control units overview" menu

The "Control units overview" menu displays the control units of the machine on a diagram.

126

EQG002-048

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "Control unit overview" menu.

„ To open the overview of the control units for the machine bus, press

The respective brief descriptions are on the squares for the control units.

The status of the individual control units is indicated by the colour of the squares.

.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Icon Explanation

CAN activity present, no errors

Terminal machine functions

Keys in the title bar

8

8.3

CAN activity present, with one or more errors

No CAN activity present, error can not be determined

EQG002-041

„ To open the overview of the control units for the engine bus, press .

EQG002-042

„ To open the overview of the control units of the AUX bus, press .

„ To call up information about a control unit, press the key on the respective control unit.

Æ The associated information field is displayed.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 127

8

8.4

8.3.3

Terminal machine functions

Direct input “Field mode”

Main menu

8.4

EQG002-013

ü The working screen has been selected.

„ To open the main menu, press .

For menu structure and to navigate in the menus,

refer to page 134

.

Direct input “Field mode”

128

EQG002-018

The "Direct input field mode" can be used to make settings directly from the "Field mode" working screen without having to open the submenu.

To change the specified setting values, press or .

Pressing reduces the set value:

• By a specified value each time the key is pressed.

• If the key is pressed and held down, the value is gradually reduced.

• If the key is held down for longer, the value is reduced more quickly.

Pressing increases the set value:

• By a specified value each time the key is pressed.

• If the key is pressed and held down, the value is gradually increased.

• If the key is held down for longer, the value is increased more quickly.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Terminal machine functions

Information area

8

8.5

8.5

Information area

8.6

EQG000-007

The keys in the information section can be freely assigned via a selection box.

Assigning keys

ü The working screen has been selected.

„ Press the key to be assigned.

ð The selection box opens up.

„ Select the required assignment.

„ To save the assignment, press .

„ To cancel the entry, press .

When the selection is saved, the existing assignment is overwritten.

Engine and driving data display range

The "Engine and driving data" display range shows the machine's current fuel levels, engine and driving data.

2

3

EQG002-016

Pos.

1

Designation

Display coolant temperature

Display fuel level

Display urea level

Explanation

Indicates the current coolant temperature in °C

(digital and analogue).

Indicates the current fuel level as a % (digital and analogue).

Indicates the current urea level as a % (digital and analogue).

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 129

8

8.7

Terminal machine functions

Traction drive indicator lights

Pos.

4

5

6

7

8

Designation

Display speed in digital format

Explanation

Indicates the current speed in digital format in km/ h or mph.

Display speed in analogue format Indicates the current speed in analogue format in km/h or mph (in "Road mode" working screen only).

Display engine speed in digital format

Display engine speed in analogue format

Display engine load in digital format

Displays the current engine speed in digital format in rpm (min ⁻ ¹).

Displays the current engine speed in analogue format in rpm (min ⁻ ¹).

Indicates the current engine load as % in digital format (in "Field mode" working screen only).

Warning lights for engine displays and fuel levels

Warning light for coolant temperature (1)

Icon Explanation

Coolant temperature OK.

Coolant temperature in critical range.

Warning light for fuel level (2)

Icon Explanation

Fuel tank level greater than 10%.

Fuel tank level less than 10%.

8.7

Warning light for urea level (3)

Icon Explanation

Urea tank level greater than 20%.

Display is lit: Urea tank level less than 20%.

Display flashes: The engine performance is reduced.

If the level has dropped below 20%, the warning lights on the malfunction warning panel warn of a reduction in the maximum driving speed and obtainable torque.

• To reach full engine performance and driving speed again, pour an adequate amount of

urea, in the specified quality, into the urea tank, refer to page 254 .

Traction drive indicator lights

The indicator lamps in the main display area for traction drive inform about the current engine and driving data and warn of malfunctions on the engine and the drive.

130

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Terminal machine functions

Traction drive indicator lights

8

8.7

EQG002-017

Displays acceleration behaviour (1)

Indicates the current value for the acceleration behaviour.

Icon Explanation

Low acceleration

Medium acceleration

High acceleration

Maximum acceleration

Indicator lamp for direction of travel and parking brake (2)

Indicates the direction of travel and the status of the parking brake.

Icon Explanation

Direction of travel forwards

Neutral mode (idle)

Direction of travel backwards

Parking brake is applied

Indicator lamp for PowerSplit (3)

Indicates the status of the Power Mode.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 131

8

8.7

Terminal machine functions

Traction drive indicator lights

Icon Explanation

Manual "Eco-Power mode"

The diesel engine works in energy saving mode.

Manual "M-Power mode"

The diesel engine works in maximum power mode.

Automatic switchover between "Eco-Power mode" and "M-Power mode".

Indicator lamp for traction control system (TC) (4)

Displays the status of the traction control system (TC).

Icon Designation

Traction control system

(TC) inactive

Explanation

Traction control system

(TC) stage I active

Traction control system

(TC) stage I regulates actively

Traction control system

(TC) stage II active

Traction control system

(TC) stage II regulates actively

The drive torque on the wheels is controlled.

Traction control system (TC) stage I allows only low slip (spinning wheels).

Connected traction control system (TC) stage I preserves the sward.

The drive torque on the wheels is controlled.

Traction control system (TC) stage II allows high slip (spinning wheels).

Traction control system (TC) stage II ensures that sufficient traction is provided even under difficult conditions.

Display for cruise control (5)

Indicates the status of the cruise control and the stored speed when operating with the cruise control.

Icon Designation Explanation

Cruise control is inactive The stored speed when the cruise control is operated is 12 km/h.

Cruise control active is active

132

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Terminal machine functions

Traction drive indicator lights

8

8.7

Indicator lamp for machine height (6)

Icon Designation

Machine height depending on operating mode.

Explanation

In field mode, the specification is shown in cm.

The icon appears in the road mode.

Road mode:

Machine height in road position.

Road mode:

Machine height in field position.

The machine height is above the road position height.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 133

9

9.1

9

Terminal – Menus

Menu structure

Terminal – Menus

WARNING

Risk of injury to persons and damage to machines if error messages are ignored

If error messages are ignored without the fault being rectified injuries may occur to persons and/or severe damage to the machine.

„ Rectify fault if error message is shown.

„ If the fault cannot be rectified, contact KRONE service partner.

9.1

Menu structure

The menu structure is divided into the following menus depending on the machine configuration.

Menu Sub-menu Explanation

Cabin

Terminal

Settings

The current settings of the terminal for language, day/ night design, units of measurement, date and time are displayed in the menu and can be changed.

Information

The software version of the terminal is displayed in the menu.

Armrest

Diagnostics

refer to page 142

Key test

A test of the keys of the keypad, of the Main Mode

Switch and of the navigation module can be performed

in the menu, refer to page 144

.

Control lever

Settings

The M1, M2, M3 and M4 memory keys on the control lever can be assigned with functions in the menu.

Key test

In the menu a test of the keys of the control lever can be

performed, refer to page 144

.

Background lighting

134

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Menu Sub-menu

Terminal – Menus

Menu structure

Explanation

Settings

The intensity of the background lighting of control elements and control lever can be set in the menu.

Control unit versions

9

9.1

Software

The current software versions of the control units are indicated in the menu.

Hardware

The hardware versions of the control units are indicated in the menu.

Printer

Settings

The printer type can be set in the menu.

Remote maintenance

Remote maintenance

In the menu the same data, which is displayed on the terminal in the machine, can be displayed to a KRONE customer service employee on the screen at his place of work. The KRONE SmartConnect control unit establishes the connection to the KRONE customer service via the mobile network and transmits the data.

Diagnostics

refer to page 142

Settings

Wiper

Settings

Lighting

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 135

9

9.1

Terminal – Menus

Menu structure

Menu Sub-menu

136

Menu Sub-menu

Menu Sub-menu

Explanation

Settings

In the menu the time period for activation of the "Coming Home" and "Leaving Home" functions and for lighting when refuelling can be set.

„ For the description of the Coming Home function, the

Leaving Home function and lighting when refuelling,

refer to page 82

.

Diagnostics

refer to page 142

Key test

A test of the keys on the light control unit can be per-

formed in the menu, refer to page 144

.

Explanation

Central lubrication

Settings

The lubricant quantity for a lubrication cycle of the central lubrication system can be adjusted in the menu.

Diagnostics

refer to page 142

Maintenance

The menu displays the maintenance status of central lubrication.

Explanation

Mowing functions

Front mounted mowers

Settings

Diagnostics

refer to page 142

Coupling

Connecting the front mounted mower,

refer to page 169

Disconnecting the front mounted mower,

refer to page 172

Side mounted mowers

Settings

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Menu Sub-menu

Terminal – Menus

Menu structure

9

9.1

Explanation

Diagnostics

refer to page 142

Mower side guard

Diagnostics

refer to page 142

Swath hood

Diagnostics

refer to page 142

Mower drive

Settings

Diagnostics

refer to page 142

Side shift front mounted mower

Settings

Diagnostics

refer to page 142

Manual operation

refer to page 219

Cutting height

Cutting height

The cutting height can be adjusted to different ground conditions. In the menu two cutting heights for the mowers can be changed and saved,

refer to page 220 .

Settings

Diagnostics

refer to page 142

Mower load relief

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 137

9

9.1

Terminal – Menus

Menu structure

Menu Sub-menu

Menu Sub-menu

Explanation

Relief

The mower load relief adjusts the ground pressure of the cutter bar to the local conditions. In order to protect the sward the load on the cutter bar must be relieved so that it does not jump when mowing, yet does not leave any skid marks on the ground.

This menu displays the current mower relief and it is

possible to save 2 settings for the mower relief, refer to page 221 .

Settings

The current and saved settings for mower relief are displayed in this menu and can be changed here.

Calibration

The mower relief of the mowers is calibrated in the

menu, refer to page 353 .

Headland

Settings

This menu displays the settings of headland management, of the side mounted mowers and the front mounted mower.

Mower profile

Settings

The overcut of the mowing track can be set in this menu.

Explanation

Engine

Diesel engine

Settings

Diagnostics

refer to page 142

Maintenance

The "Diesel engine maintenance" menu displays the remaining operating hours of the diesel engine until the next maintenance date. The display counts down the operating hours of the diesel engine until the next maintenance date of the diesel engine.

138

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Menu Sub-menu

Menu Sub-menu

Terminal – Menus

Menu structure

9

9.1

Explanation

Hydraulics

Working hydraulics

Diagnostics

refer to page 142

Hydraulic oil tank

The menu shows the hydraulic oil level and the refilling quantity.

INFO:

The hydraulic oil level and the refilling quantity are only shown correctly when the machine is in the transport

position, refer to page 191 .

Explanation

Drive functions

The components of the running gear can be set in the menu.

Automatic steering system

Settings

The settings for automatic steering system parameters are displayed in the menu and can be changed.

Diagnostics

refer to page 142

Traction drive

Calibration

In the menu the brake pedal is checked for plausibility,

refer to page 354 .

Diagnostics

refer to page 142

Axles

Settings

This menu displays the position of the axles when the mower is activated and set.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 139

9

9.2

Terminal – Menus

Bringing up menu level

Menu Sub-menu

Menu Sub-menu

9.2

Bringing up menu level

Explanation

Diagnostics

refer to page 142

Calibration of straight-ahead position

The straight-ahead position of the rear axle is determined in the menu,

refer to page 354 .

Maintenance

The "Axle maintenance" menu is used to select which piston can be actuated using the keys on the keypad.

Explanation

Machine settings

In the menu the mower versions and settings for the mowing track are displayed and can be changed.

User level

The currently registered user category is shown in the menu.

INFO:

The setting can only be changed by the service technician.

140

EQ002-052

Depending on how the machine is equipped, the main menu is divided into the following menus:

Icon Designation

"Cabin" menu

"Central lubrication" menu

"Mowing functions" menu

"Engine" menu

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

9.3

Terminal – Menus

Navigating in menus

9

9.3

Icon Designation

"Hydraulics" menu

"Drive Functions" menu

"Machine settings" menu

"User level" menu

INFORMATION

Touching the coloured parts of the machine illustration in the display directly opens the corresponding menus.

„ To bring up the menu level from the working screen, press .

Navigating in menus

The functions of the terminal are divided into menus. Navigate through the menu structure by using the keys in the individual menus.

„ To open the main menu from the working screen, press .

„ To open a menu from the main menu, press the key of the corresponding menu.

„ To open sub-menus from a menu, press the key of the corresponding sub-menu.

„ To change from one sub-menu to another one, press the key of sub-menu in the footer.

„ To leave the current menu, press .

„ To open the main menu from a menu, press selected.

repeatedly until the main menu is

„ To go one step forwards again after a step back, press .

„ To open the working screen from the main menu or a menu, press .

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 141

9

9.4

9.3.1

Terminal – Menus

“Diagnostics” menu explanation

Changing/saving parameter

„ To change a parameter, press the corresponding parameter key.

Æ A value input field or a selection box opens depending on the setting menu.

„ If a value input field opens, change the value of the parameter.

„ If a selection box opens, change the selection of the parameter.

„ To save the setting, press .

„ To cancel the entry and keep the old setting, press .

9.4

“Diagnostics” menu explanation

INFORMATION

The purpose of this chapter is to explain in general terms how to handle the diagnostics masks. The diagnostics masks which can be selected in the individual menus are no longer listed in detail.

The sensors/actuators and the readable process values of the menu component are listed in the

"Diagnostics" menus.

The applied voltages/currents can be read off for these components/values.

142

EQG002-050

1 Icon for the component type/process value

2 Number of the sensor/actuator

4 Status of the sensor/actuator

3 Designation of the sensor/actuator

5 Key for opening the sensor graphic display

6 Graphic display of the applied and permitted currents of the selected sensor/ actuator

„ To open the graphic display of a sensor or actuator, press .

INFORMATION

This screen is needed in case of a contact with customer service as the service technician can conclude errors on the forage harvester from the values in this screen.

Component type/process value

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Terminal – Menus

“Diagnostics” menu explanation

9

9.4

Icon Explanation

Sensor

Actuator

Process value

Sensor/actuator status displays

Icon Explanation

Sensor/actuator active

Sensor/actuator inactive

Sensor attenuated

Sensor unattenuated

OK

Not OK

Momentary switch pressed, switch closed

Momentary switch not pressed, switch not closed

Cable break

Short circuit

Cable break/short circuit

Other error

Status not available

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 143

9

9.5

9.5

Terminal – Menus

Menu "key test" explanation

Menu "key test" explanation

INFORMATION

The purpose of this chapter is to explain in general terms how to handle the "key test" menus.

The key tests which can be selected in the individual menus are no longer listed in detail.

Key tests are available for the following control elements:

Control element

KP1

KP2

MMS

NM

Light control unit

Control lever

Explanation

Key test left half of the keypad

Key test right half of the keypad

Key test Main Mode Switch

Key test navigation module

Key test light control unit

Key test control lever

INFORMATION

To ensure that the "key test" menus are available in the terminal, the Main Mode Switch must be in the neutral mode position and the ignition key in the II position. Only the key test of the

Main Mode Switch is available in the terminal without this measure.

ü The corresponding "key test" menu is open.

„ To select an operating element, which is to be tested, press the key for the corresponding operating element

ð The operating element is displayed on the terminal.

„ Press the key, which is to be tested, and check the background colour of the key on the terminal.

The colours of the keys on the terminal indicate whether there is an error between the operating element and the control unit.

Icon Explanation

Key not pressed.

Key pressed.

Error recognized.

144

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

10

10.1

Initial operation 10

Checklist for initial operation 10.1

Initial operation

This chapter describes assembly and adjustment work on the machine which may be carried out by qualified technicians only. Here, the notice “Personnel qualification of technicians” applies,

refer to page 18 .

WARNING

Risk of injury or damage to the machine due to faulty initial operation

If the initial operation is carried out incorrectly or incompletely, the machine may present defects. As a result, people may be injured or killed or the machine may be damaged.

„ Initial operation must only be carried out by authorised technicians.

„ Read in full and observe the “Personnel qualification of technicians”,

refer to page 18

.

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety instructions

If the relevant safety instructions are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ To avoid accidents, the relevant safety instructions must be read and observed,

refer to page 17 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

refer to page 31

.

Checklist for initial operation

ü There are no leakages present in the machine.

ü All cable and plug connections are properly connected and laid.

ü All hoses are properly laid.

ü

All guard cloths are mounted, refer to page 146

ü All the screws and nuts have been checked to make certain they are tight and tightened to the specified tightening torques,

refer to page 243

.

ü The machine is fully lubricated,

refer to page 308

.

ü

The wheel chocks are at hand and ready to use, refer to page 54

.

ü

The platforms, steps and standing areas are clean and in proper condition, refer to page 54

.

ü The fire extinguisher is mounted,

refer to page 146 .

ü

The licence plate is mounted, refer to page 146

.

ü

The blades are installed, refer to page 152 .

ü The tyres have been checked and the pressure is set correctly,

refer to page 273 .

ü The hub covers of the rear axle have been checked for damage and tight fit (for "front wheel drive" version),

refer to page 271 .

ü

The anti-twist locks are mounted on the left and right of the lighting module, refer to page 153

.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 145

10 Initial operation

10.2

Mounting fire extinguisher

10.2

Mounting fire extinguisher

10.3

BPG000-034

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

„ Insert the fire extinguisher (1) into the support at the front on the left ladder so that the operating instructions on the type plate are readable and are facing outwards.

WARNING! Risk of injury due to falling fire extinguisher! In order to secure the fire extinguisher, adjust the tensioning straps with sufficient tension according to the circumference of the fire extinguisher.

„ Adjust the length of the tensioning straps according to the circumference of the fire extinguisher.

„ Shorten the length of the tensioning straps by a few millimetres and close the fasteners to guarantee that the closed tensioning straps are tensioned sufficiently.

Æ The tensioning straps have been properly adjusted if the fasteners can only be closed by means of an auxiliary tool (e. g. screwdriver).

Æ If it is possible to close the fasteners manually:

„ Shorten the length of the tensioning straps so far that the fasteners can only be closed by an auxiliary tool (e. g. screwdriver).

Mounting licence plate

10.4

146

BM000-101 / BM000-100

„ Mount the front licence plate in the recess (1) on the front spoiler of the cabin.

„ Mount the rear licence plate in the license plate holder (2) on the tailgate.

Mounting guard cloths

ü All mowing units are in working position,

refer to page 87 .

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Initial operation 10

Mounting guard cloths 10.4

Side mounted mowers

BMG000-056

„ Mount the guard cloths (1) on the right and left side mounted mower.

To do this:

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 147

10 Initial operation

10.4

Mounting guard cloths

BM000-187

„ Remove the screw (1).

„ Dismount the cover cap (2).

BM000-188

„ Push the guard cloth (2) into the protective profile (1).

BM000-189

„ Mount the cover cap (2) with the screw (1).

148

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Initial operation 10

Mounting guard cloths 10.4

BMG000-057

„ Mount the screw connections (3).

„ Close the turnlock fasteners (1) on the guard cloths (2).

Front mounted mower

BM000-043

„ Mount the guard cloths (1) on the front mounted mower.

To do this:

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 149

10 Initial operation

10.4

Mounting guard cloths

BM000-187

„ Unscrew the screw (1).

„ Dismount the cover cap (2).

BM000-188

„ Push the guard cloth (2) into the protective profile (1).

BM000-189

„ Mount the cover cap (2) with the screw (1).

150

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

BM000-044

„ Mount the screw connections (1).

„ Mount the screw connections (3) with the clamping strap (4).

„ Close the turnlock fasteners (5) on the guard cloth (2).

Initial operation 10

Mounting guard cloths 10.4

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 151

10 Initial operation

10.5

Installing the blades

Cross conveyor

With version "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood"

BM000-121

„ Mount one deflector curtain on the right cross conveyor and one on the left.

To do this:

„ Remove the deflector curtain (2) from the rear storage compartment.

„ Mount the deflector curtain (2) with the screw connections and the clamping straps (3) on the cross conveyor.

„ Push the holding rod (1) through the eyes of the deflector curtain (2), attach them to the machine frame (1) and secure them with the spring cotter pin.

Swath cloth under the machine

10.5

BM000-235

„ Remove the swath cloth (1) from the rear storage compartment.

„ Mount the swath cloth (1) on the cover sheet (3) with the screw connections (2).

Installing the blades

ü All mowing units are in working position,

refer to page 87 .

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

„ Install the blades for the "Blade quick fastener" design,

refer to page 292 ; install the blades

for the "Blade screw connection" design refer to page 291

.

152

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

10.6

Initial operation 10

Mounting the anti-twist lock on the lighting module 10.6

Mounting the anti-twist lock on the lighting module

1

2 3

3

4

BM000-339

„ Take the 2 anti-twist locks (2) and the screw connections (1) (each with 2 discs, 1 screw

(M4 x 20), 1 locknut) from the rear storage compartment.

„ Perform the following steps on the right and left of the lighting module.

„ To remove the sheet (4) from the lighting module, remove the screw connections (3).

„ Mount the anti-twist lock (2) on the support tube using the screw connection (1).

„ Mount the sheet (4) with the screw connections (3).

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 153

11 Start-up

11.1

Check before start-up

11 Start-up

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety instructions

If the relevant safety instructions are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ To avoid accidents, the relevant safety instructions must be read and observed,

refer to page 17 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

refer to page 31

.

11.1

Check before start-up

INFORMATION

Compliance with the stipulated checks on the machine significantly increases the safety and the lifetime of the machine.

A machine with established defects must not be operated.

„ If it is established that the machine has defects, shut down the machine and eliminate these defects or have them eliminated by technicians.

„ Before starting up the machine, carry out the inspections listed below and the checks from

the maintenance table "Every 10 hours, at least daily", refer to page 238 .

General

ü There are no leakages present in the machine.

ü All cable and plug connections are properly connected and laid.

ü All hoses are properly laid.

ü The safety devices are mounted and checked for completeness and damage.

ü

The platforms, steps and standing areas are clean and in proper condition, refer to page 54

.

ü

The wheel chocks are at hand and ready to use, refer to page 54

.

ü

The horn is functioning properly, refer to page 72

.

ü

The fire extinguisher is functioning properly, refer to page 275

.

ü The machine has been prepared for mowing operation, ,

refer to page 169 .

Cabin

ü

The position of the mirror and the camera are set, outside mirror refer to page 84

, inside mirror and camera

refer to page 155 .

ü

The driver's seat is adjusted correctly, refer to page 155 .

ü All emergency exits are freely accessible and can be opened without obstruction,

refer to page 54

.

ü All windows and mirrors are cleaned.

ü All wiper blades are in good condition.

154

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

11.2

11.2.1

Start-up 11

Setting driver’s seat 11.2

Lighting and labelling

ü The lighting and warning beacon are adjusted correctly and functioning properly,

refer to page 78

.

ü All red-white warning panels for making the machine visible are mounted in accordance with national laws.

Setting driver’s seat

Air-cushioned comfort seat

WARNING

Risk of injury due to movement of the machine or machine parts!

When the control lever cannot be moved freely in all directions, it is not possible to execute all functions of the control lever. It may then not be possible to respond quickly and correctly to hazardous situations.

„ After comfort seat, right armrest and steering column have been set, check whether the control lever can be moved freely in all directions.

„ Adapt the setting when the control lever cannot be moved freely in all directions.

WARNING

Risk of injury due to incorrectly set driver's seat!

When the driver's seat is not adjusted individually to the driver, the driver may damage his health due to bad posture while working.

„ Before starting up the machine, adjust the driver's seat ergonomically and individually to the driver.

WARNING

Danger of injury resulting from unintentional movement of machine parts

If the vibration damper has been set too softly, the seat may hit the floor when driving on a bad road and contact with the operating elements is no longer guaranteed. It may then not be possible to respond quickly and correctly to hazardous situations. Thus there is a risk of serious injuries or death.

„ Always set the vibration damper of the comfort seat tightly enough to prevent the seat from hitting the floor even when driving on a bad road.

WARNING

Danger of accident due to brief distraction of the driver

If the driver adjusts the driver's seat while driving, he cannot pay adequate attention to his driving as a result. This can result in serious accidents.

„ The driver’s seat must only be set when the machine has stopped.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 155

11 Start-up

11.2

Setting driver’s seat

11.2.1.1

Operating air-cushioned comfort seat (for "Standard" version)

156

BXG000-100

3

4

1

2

5

6

Driver's seat

Seat depth adjustment

Seat angle adjustment

Longitudinal adjustment

Horizontal suspension

Height adjustment

7

8

Adjustment of the backrest

Left armrest

9 Lumbar support

10 Headrest

11 Cover cap armrest adjustment

12 Vibration damper setting

The air comfort seat (1) can be individually adapted to the requirements of the driver.

Height adjustment

The height can be adjusted continuously by means of a hydraulic system. In order to prevent damage, actuate the compressor for a maximum of 1 minute.

„ Pull lever (6) completely upward.

ð The driver's seat (1) is moved upwards.

„ Press lever (6) completely down.

ð Move driver's seat (1) downwards.

Æ When the upper or lower end stop of the height adjustment mechanism is reached, the height will be adjusted automatically in order to ensure a minimum spring travel.

Horizontal suspension

The shock load in direction of travel through the driver’s seat (1) is cushioned better by the horizontal suspension.

„ To activate horizontal suspension, reverse lever (5) to the front.

„ To deactivate horizontal suspension, reverse lever (5) to the rear.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Start-up 11

Setting driver’s seat 11.2

Longitudinal adjustment

„ Pull locking lever (4) up, push driver's seat (1) forward or backward into the desired position and permit the locking lever (4) to lock in place.

„ Check whether the locking is fitted into place correctly. The driver's seat must no longer be movable into another position.

Seat angle adjustment

„ Pull the key (3) up and set the inclination of the seat base by simultaneously increasing or decreasing the pressure on the seat base.

Seat depth adjustment

„ Pull key (2) up and move seat base to the desired position by moving it forward and backward simultaneously.

Adjustment of the backrest

„ Pull locking lever (7) up, set the inclination of the backrest and allow the locking lever (7) to engage.

„ Check whether the locking is fitted into place correctly. Make sure that the backrest cannot be moved.

Weight adjustment

In order to prevent damage to health, the individual driver’s weight setting should be checked and adjusted prior to starting up the machine. The setting should be carried out whilst sitting absolutely stationary.

„ Briefly pull the lever (6) upwards.

Headrest

The headrest has been optimally set when the upper edges of the head and headrest are at the same height.

„ Pull out or push in the headrest (10) over the perceptible notches until the correct height has been reached.

Lumbar support

„ Turn the hand wheel (9) to the left or right in order to individually adjust the height as well as the intensity of the arching in the backrest.

Adjusting the vibration damper

The vibration behaviour of the driver's seat can be optimally adjusted to each driving situation from "soft" to "hard" using the infinitely adjustable vibration damper.

„ Pull (12) lever upwards to set soft seating comfort.

„ Pull (12) lever downwards to set hard seating comfort.

Setting the left armrest

BM000-047

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 157

11 Start-up

11.2

Setting driver’s seat

Tilt the armrest (8) up or down as requested.

„ Remove cover cap (11) to adjust the armrest height.

„ Loosen hexagon nut, move armrest into desired position and tighten hexagon nut.

„ Press cover cap (11) on hexagon nut.

Setting the right armrest

BM000-048

The right armrest (13) and the control lever form a unit.

„ To set the right armrest, raise lever (14).

„ Fold right armrest up or down, forward or backward and release the lever (14).

Æ The setting remains the same.

11.2.1.2

Operating air-cushioned comfort seat (for "ACTIVO" version)

158

BXG000-099

3

4

1

2

Air-cushioned comfort seat

Seat depth adjustment

Seat angle adjustment

Longitudinal adjustment

8

9

Left armrest

Seat heating and air conditioning on/off

10 Headrest

11 Cover cap armrest adjustment

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Start-up 11

Setting driver’s seat 11.2

5

6

7

Horizontal suspension on/off

Weight and height setting

Adjustment of the backrest

12 Vibration damper setting

13 Lumbar support setting at bottom

14 Lumbar support setting at top

The air comfort seat (1) can be individually adapted to the requirements of the driver.

Height adjustment

The height can be adjusted continuously by means of a hydraulic system. In order to prevent damage, actuate the compressor for a maximum of 1 minute.

„ Pull lever (6) completely upward.

ð The driver's seat (1) is moved upwards.

„ Press lever (6) completely down.

ð Move driver's seat (1) downwards.

Æ When the upper or lower end stop of the height adjustment mechanism is reached, the height will be adjusted automatically in order to ensure a minimum spring travel.

Horizontal suspension

The shock load in direction of travel through the driver’s seat (1) is cushioned better by the horizontal suspension.

„ To activate horizontal suspension, reverse lever (5) to the front.

„ To deactivate horizontal suspension, reverse lever (5) to the rear.

Longitudinal adjustment

„ Pull locking lever (4) up, push driver's seat (1) forward or backward into the desired position and permit the locking lever (4) to lock in place.

„ Check whether the locking is fitted into place correctly. The driver's seat must no longer be movable into another position.

Seat angle adjustment

„ Pull the key (3) up and set the inclination of the seat base by simultaneously increasing or decreasing the pressure on the seat base.

Seat depth adjustment

„ Pull key (2) up and move seat base to the desired position by moving it forward and backward simultaneously.

Adjustment of the backrest

„ Pull locking lever (7) up, set the inclination of the backrest and allow the locking lever (7) to engage.

„ Check whether the locking is fitted into place correctly. Make sure that the backrest cannot be moved.

Weight adjustment

The weight is automatically adjusted when the seat is loaded by the driver.

Setting the vibration damper

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 159

11 Start-up

11.2

Setting driver’s seat

BM000-050

The oscillating behaviour of the driver’s seat can be adapted ideally to each driving situation via the adjustable vibration damper.

Damping level II is the default setting recommended by the manufacturer at average driver’s weight.

The lever (12) for the setting of the oscillating behaviour has three settings:

Pos.

I

II

III

Explanation

Soft damping

Medium damping

Hard damping

„ To set the vibration damper, turn lever (12) to desired stage and release it.

The damping behaviour can be coordinated between the damping levels by two additional setting positions each.

Lumbar support

160

BM000-051

The intensity of the arching of seat backrest can be adapted individually so that the spine is supported and the pressure on the back is relieved.

„ In order to adapt the intensity of the arching in the upper area of the backrest, press „+“ or

„-“ on switch (14) until the desired setting is reached.

„ In order to adapt the intensity of the arching in the lower area of the backrest, press on “+” or “-” on switch (13) until the desired setting is reached.

Seat heating and seat climate control

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Start-up 11

Setting driver’s seat 11.2

BM000-052

The seat surface can be vented via seat climate control so that a cool and dry seating is enabled.

The switch (9) has three positions:

Pos.

0

I

II

Explanation

Seat heating and seat climate control OFF

Seat climate control ON (seat heating OFF)

Seat heating ON (seat climate control OFF)

„ In order to switch on seat climate control, switch the switch (9) to position I.

Æ The left light indicates the operation of seat climate control.

„ To switch on the seat heating, switch the switch (9) to position II.

Æ The right lamp indicates the operation of the seat heating.

Setting the left armrest

BM000-047

Tilt the armrest (8) up or down as requested.

„ Remove cover cap (11) to adjust the armrest height.

„ Loosen hexagon nut, move armrest into desired position and tighten hexagon nut.

„ Press cover cap (11) on hexagon nut.

Setting the right armrest

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 161

11 Start-up

11.2

Setting driver’s seat

11.2.2

BM000-048

The right armrest (13) and the control lever form a unit.

„ To set the right armrest, raise lever (14).

„ Fold right armrest up or down, forward or backward and release the lever (14).

Æ The setting remains the same.

Steering column adjustment

162

BM000-054

„ To adjust the inclination of the steering column around the lower pivot point (a), actuate the unlocking pedal (1) and move the steering column (3) into the required position.

„ To lock the steering column (3), release the unlocking pedal (1).

„ To adjust the height of the steering wheel (c) and the inclination of the steering column around the upper pivot point (b), release the release lever (2) and move the steering column

(3) into the required position.

„ To lock the steering column (3), lock the release lever (2).

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Start-up 11

Setting driver’s seat 11.2

11.2.3

Setting the terminal

BX001-672

The position of the terminal can be adjusted to the driver and to the visible conditions by turning the support (11) and the terminal.

Adjusting the inclination of the terminal forwards/backwards:

„ Loosen the lever (2) and adjust the inclination of the terminal forwards/backwards (8).

„ Tighten the lever (2).

Adjusting the inclination of the terminal sideways:

„ Loosen the screw (1) and adjust the inclination of the terminal sideways (7).

„ Tighten the screw (1).

Rotating the terminal to the left/right:

„ Loosen the screw (3) and rotate the terminal to the left/right (6).

„ Tighten the screw (3).

Adjusting the height of the terminal:

„ Loosen the screw (4) and rotate (10) the support (11) until the required height has been reached.

„ Tighten the screw (4).

Swivelling the terminal to the left/right:

„ Loosen the lever (5) and swivel the support (11) to the left/right (9).

„ Tighten the lever (5).

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 163

11 Start-up

11.2

Setting driver’s seat

11.2.4

Monitor for camera monitoring

For "Additional camera" version

BM000-043

„ Manually adjust the monitor (1) for the camera monitoring system so that the road and the working area at the side and behind the machine are in full view.

POC function

The POC function (Power on Control) of the additional camera automatically switches on the monitor as soon as the ignition is turned to step "II". The POC function is activated in the factory and can be deactivated as necessary.

„ Press on the monitor.

164

EQ002-382

„ Press until "POC" (1) is selected.

„ To deactivate the POC function, press

„ To select "Close" press .

.

„ To leave the menu, press .

„ To activate the POC function again, follow a similar procedure.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Start-up 11

Setting driver’s seat 11.2

INFORMATION

Even if the POC function is deactivated, the monitor automatically switches on during reversing. After reversing is completed, the monitor automatically switches off.

„ For further information see the manufacturer's operating manual.

11.2.5

Sun visor

11.2.6

BM000-044

„ Manually adjust the position of the sun visor (1) as required.

Adjustable air nozzles

BXG000-044

Adjust the air nozzles (1) to prevent the discs from misting over.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 165

11 Start-up

11.3

General aspects

11.2.7

Inside rear mirror

11.3

11.3.1

BM000-042

„ Manually set the inside rear mirror (1) so that the required outside area is visible in the mirror.

General aspects

Instructional seat

WARNING

Danger of accident due to distraction of the driver

The driver may be distracted by a second person in the cabin, possibly causing him not to pay adequate attention to his driving. This may result in serious accidents with personal injury.

„ The passenger seat may only be used while the driver is being instructed.

„ While the machine is being operated, there must be no other person in the cabin or on the machine except for the driver, unless the driver is being instructed.

166

BXG000-042

„ Before using the passenger seat (1), fold down its seating area.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

11.3.2

Cooling box (version with "Insulated thermobox")

Start-up 11

General aspects 11.3

11.3.3

BX001-142

The cooling box (1) is located below the instructional seat (2) in the cabin.

„ To use the cooling box, connect the 12 V plug (4) to the 12 V socket (3) on the left next to the driver's seat.

Topping up fresh water

11.3.4

BM000-172

The reservoir for fresh water (2) is in the storage compartment above the right front wheel.

„ Open the storage compartment (1).

„ In order to top up the reservoir (2), open the cover (3).

„ Close the cover (3).

„ Close the storage compartment (1).

Drawer for first-aid kit and operating instructions

BM000-085

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 167

11 Start-up

11.3

General aspects

The drawer (2) for the first-aid kit and the operating instructions is located below the front of the driver’s seat (1).

„ To remove the first-aid kit or the operating instructions, pull the drawer (2) forwards.

168

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

12

12.1

Commissioning – mowing operation 12

Connecting the front mounted mower 12.1

Commissioning – mowing operation

Checks before commissioning – mowing operation

ü

The front mounted mower has been mounted, refer to page 169 .

ü The side mounted mowers have been mounted,

refer to page 174 .

ü The standard swath deposit kit or the cross conveyors are mounted,for standard swath deposit,

refer to page 180 for cross conveyor,

refer to page 185

.

ü All mowers have been checked for missing and worn blades, retaining bolts, leaf springs and mowing discs or mower drums, and replacements have been made as necessary

refer to page 287

.

ü The tine conditioners have been checked for wear and any that were missing have been replaced,

refer to page 287 .

ü

All guard cloths are complete and undamaged, refer to page 301

.

Connecting the front mounted mower

WARNING

Risk of injury due to unexpected movement of the machine

During the connecting/decoupling process of the front mounted mower, the machine may start to move unexpectedly and may therefore result in injury.

„ Only one person may carry out the connecting/decoupling process.

„ Make sure there is nobody in the danger zone during the connecting/decoupling process.

„ Stop the connecting/decoupling process immediately if there is somebody in the danger zone.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

ü The Main Mode Switch is in the "II" position ,

refer to page 92 .

ü The Main Mode Switch is in the "Maintenance mode" position,

refer to page 91 .

ü

The front mounted mower is safety supported, refer to page 31 or

with the "Parking support" version

: The parking support is in the support position, refer to page 217 .

ü The mowing functions "Connect front mounted mower" menu has been opened in the terminal.

„ Press "Connect" in the terminal.

„ To start the connecting process, press in the terminal.

„ To depressurise the lower links, press the "Front mounted mower" key on the control lever and keep it pressed until the next screen is displayed in the terminal,

refer to page 87

.

„ Press both lower links down to the bottom position.

„ Press "Next" in the terminal.

„ Start the diesel engine.

„ Turn the Main Mode Switch to "Field mode".

„ Press the or key to approach field position,

refer to page 89 .

„ Press "Next" in the terminal.

„ Move the machine up to the front mounted mower in such a way that the lower link hooks are below the holding fixture at the front mounted mower.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 169

12 Commissioning – mowing operation

12.1

Connecting the front mounted mower

170

BM000-252

„ Set the Main Mode Switch to "Maintenance mode".

„ Press the "Raise front mounted mower" key on the control lever until the lower link hooks (2)

of the lower links (1) engage at the front mounted mower, refer to page 87

.

„ If the two lower links do not raise evenly, control the lower links separately:

„ Raise the left lower link by simultaneously pressing the "Raise front mounted mower" key and the "M1" key.

„ Raise the right lower link by simultaneously pressing the "Raise front mounted mower" key and the "M2" key.

„ If the two lower link hooks do not engage in the two holding fixtures at the front mounted mower, rectify the machine position in the following way:

„ Set the main mode switch to "Field mode" position.

„ Move the machine up to the front mounted mower in such a way that the lower link hooks can run into the holding fixtures.

„ Set the main mode switch to the "Maintenance mode" position.

„ Press the "Raise front mounted mower" key on the control lever until the lower link hooks (2) of the lower links (1) engage at the front mounted mower,

refer to page 87 .

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 31 .

„ Turn the ignition key to the "II" position.

„ To depressurise the top link and the side guard for the version "Hydraulically folding side guards" , press the "Lower front mounted mower" key at the control lever until the next

screen is displayed in the terminal, refer to page 87

.

1

2

3

1

BM000-248

„ Mount the bolt (3).

„ Mount the linch pin (2).

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Commissioning – mowing operation 12

Connecting the front mounted mower 12.1

BM000-254

„ For the version with "Hydraulically foldable side guards": Connect the hydraulic hoses

(1) to the machine.

BM000-252

„ Fit the locking screws (3) of the lower link hooks (2).

BM000-253

„ Position the universal shaft (1).

„ Tighten the nut (3) with a socket wrench (2) (tightening torque=80 Nm).

„ Pull the universal shaft guard forwards and let it engage.

„ Proceed in the same manner to mount the universal shaft at the front mounted mower.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 171

12 Commissioning – mowing operation

12.2

Decoupling the front mounted mower

12.2

172

BM000-250

„ Connect the lubrication line (3) at the front mounted mower.

„ Attach the plug connection (1) on the machine side.

„ To complete the connecting process, press "Finish" .

„ With the "Parking support" version: Move the parking support into the transport position,

refer to page 216

.

„ For "Top link holder" version : Remove the top link holder.

„ Set the parameter KMC-60 "Top link position" in the mowing functions menu "Cutting height settings".

„ Check the lifting unit functions.

„ Calibrate the mower load relief,

refer to page 353 .

Decoupling the front mounted mower

WARNING

Risk of injury due to unexpected movement of the machine

During the connecting/decoupling process of the front mounted mower, the machine may start to move unexpectedly and may therefore result in injury.

„ Only one person may carry out the connecting/decoupling process.

„ Make sure there is nobody in the danger zone during the connecting/decoupling process.

„ Stop the connecting/decoupling process immediately if there is somebody in the danger zone.

ü The mowing functions "Connect front mounted mower" menu has been opened in the terminal.

ü The diesel engine has been started.

ü The Main Mode Switch is in "Field mode" position.

ü With the "Parking support" version: The parking support is in the support position.

„ Press "Decouple" in the terminal.

„ To start the decoupling process, press .

„ Press the or key to approach field position,

refer to page 89 .

„ Press "Next" in the terminal.

„ Using the control lever, lower the front mounted mower and keep the key pressed until the next screen is displayed in the terminal,

refer to page 87 .

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Commissioning – mowing operation 12

Decoupling the front mounted mower 12.2

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 31

.

„ Turn the ignition key to position II.

„ Set the main mode switch to the "Maintenance mode" position.

„ To depressurise the top link and the side guard for the version "Hydraulically folding side guards" , press the "Lower front mounted mower" key at the control lever until the next

screen is displayed in the terminal, refer to page 87

.

„ If the front mounted mower is uncoupled without "Parking support" version, securely support

the front mounted mower, refer to page 31 .

1

2

3

1

BM000-248

„ For "Top link holder" version : Mount the top link holder.

„ Dismount the linch pin (2) and the bolt (3).

„ For "Top link holder" version : Place the top link (1) on the top link holder.

„ If decoupling is done without a top link holder, swivel the top link (1) upwards and fix it at the rail of the right-hand platform using a lashing strap.

BM000-250

„ Detach the plug connection (1).

„ Detach the lubrication line (3) from the front mounted mower.

„ For "Hydraulically foldable side guards" version : Decouple both hydraulic hoses (2).

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 173

12 Commissioning – mowing operation

12.3

Mounting the side mounted mowers

BM000-251

„ Use a suitable tool to loosen and slide the universal shaft guard (1) to the rear.

„ To dismount the universal shaft (2) from the machine, use a fork spanner (3) to unscrew the nut (4).

„ Proceed in the same manner to dismount the universal shaft (2) from the front mounted mower.

„ Put the universal shaft (2) aside.

12.3

BM000-252

„ Unscrew the locking screws (3) of the two lower link hooks (2).

„ Pull on the lower link hooks (2) to loosen them.

„ Press "Next" in the terminal.

„ To depressurise the lower links (1), press the "Lower front mounted mower" key on the

control lever and keep it pressed until the next screen is displayed in the terminal, refer to page 87

.

„ Press down both lower links.

„ To complete the decoupling process, press "Finish".

Mounting the side mounted mowers

The assembly of the side mounted mowers is described by way of example of the right side mounted mower.

„ Proceed analogously to mount the left side mounted mower.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

174

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Commissioning – mowing operation 12

Mounting the side mounted mowers 12.3

1

2

BM000-280

WARNING! Risk of injury due to raised mower. Never stand under the raised mower.

„ Hook the mower into a suitable hoist (1) with a payload of at least 3,000 kg.

„ Check the slings for secure seating and ensure that the hydraulic components are not damaged.

„ Carefully raise the mower up to the machine so that you can attach the mower to the outrigger arm (2).

„ Securely support the mower,

refer to page 31 .

1

2

1

3

4

BM000-278

„ To attach the mower to the outrigger arm, mount the bolt (1) with washers (4).

„ Fit 1 washer (2) and 1 retaining ring (3) on the end of the bolt.

2

1

2

3

BM000-283

„ Insert the bolt (2).

„ Mount the screw connection (3) (1 hexagon head screw, 1 detent edged washer, 1 washer,

1 nut).

„ Mount the roll pin (1).

„

Open the "Lift/lower right side mounted mower" lever, refer to page 345

. (For the assembly of the left side mounted mower, open the "Lift/lower left side mounted mower" lever.)

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 175

12 Commissioning – mowing operation

12.3

Mounting the side mounted mowers

1

2

3

4

BM000-284

„ Push in the bolt (2).

„ Mount the roll pin (1).

„ Push in the bolt (4).

„ Mount the roll pin (3).

1

2

3

3

4

4

5

5

2

BM000-285

„ Connect the hydraulic hoses (2, 3, 4, 5) to the central support; observe the correct assignment and sequence.

6

„ Mount the pipe clamps (1, 6); route the hydraulic hoses (2, 3, 4, 5) so that abrasion points and pinch points are avoided.

1

2

176

BMG000-054

„ Mount the lubrication line (1).

„ Mount the plug (2).

„ Close the "Lift/lower right side mounted mower" lever,

refer to page 345

. (For assembly of the left side mounted mower, close the "Lift/lower left side mounted mower" lever.)

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

1

3

Commissioning – mowing operation 12

Dismounting the side mounted mowers 12.4

5

12.4

2

4

BM000-410

„ Push the universal shaft (1) onto the PTO shaft end on the mower.

„ Tighten the screw (2) with a tightening torque of M

A

=85 Nm.

„ Push the universal shaft guard (4) over the housing (3).

„ Mount the clamp (5).

Dismounting the side mounted mowers

The disassembly of the side mounted mowers is described by way of example of the right side mounted mower.

„ Proceed analogously to disassemble the left side mounted mower.

ü

The side mounted mowers are in working position, refer to page 87

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

ü

The side mounted mower is securely supported, refer to page 31

.

1

2

3

3

4

4

5

5 6

2

BM000-285

„

Open the "Lift/lower right side mounted mower" lever, refer to page 345

. (When disassembling the left side mounted mower, open the "Lift/lower left side mounted mower" lever.)

„ Dismount the pipe clamps (1, 6).

„ Disconnect the hydraulic hoses (2, 3, 4, 5) at the central support.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 177

12 Commissioning – mowing operation

12.4

Dismounting the side mounted mowers

1

2

BMG000-054

„ Remove the lubrication line (1) and seal both sides to prevent dirt ingress.

„ Remove the plug (2).

3

1

2

4

178

BM000-284

„ Dismount the roll pin (3).

„ Remove the bolt (4).

„ Dismount the roll pin (1).

„ Remove the bolt (2).

„ Close the "Lift/lower right side mounted mower" lever,

refer to page 345

. (When disassembling the left side mounted mower, open the "Lift/lower left side mounted mower" lever.)

2

1

2

3

BM000-283

„ Dismount the screw connection (3) (1 hexagon head screw, 1 detent edged washer, 1 washer, 1 nut).

„ Dismount the roll pin (1).

„ Remove the bolt (2).

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

1 2

Commissioning – mowing operation 12

Dismounting the side mounted mowers 12.4

1

3

4

BM000-278

„ Dismount the washer (2) and the retaining ring (3) at the end of the bolt.

„ Dismount the bolt (1) with the washers (4).

1

4

2 3

BM000-411

„ Dismount the clamp (2).

„ Push down the universal shaft guard (1).

„ Loosen the screw (4).

„ Remove the universal shaft (3) from the PTO shaft end on the mower.

1

2

BM000-280

WARNING! Risk of injury due to raised mower. Never stand under the raised mower.

„ Hook the mower into a suitable hoist (1) with a payload of at least 3,000 kg.

„ Check the sling for secure seating and ensure that the hydraulics are not damaged.

„ Raise the mower and carefully put it aside.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 179

12 Commissioning – mowing operation

12.5

Mounting the standard swathing

12.5

Mounting the standard swathing

With version "Standard swathing"

1

180

(M)

(N)

(O)

(P)

(I)

(J)

(K)

(L)

(Q)

(R)

(E)

(F)

(G)

(H)

(A)

(B)

(C)

(D)

BM000-394

The assembly of the version "Swathing Standard" (1) is described by way of example of the right side mounted mower.

„ Proceed the same for assembly of the version "Swathing Standard" on the left side mounted mower.

The following mounting material is used for assembly of the version "Swathing Standard" (1) on the right side mounted mower:

Pos.

Designation

2

4

4

2

2

4

1

8

4

4

4

4

6

8

2

4

Quantity

6

2

Hexagon head screw M10 x 25

Hexagon head screw M16 x 50

Hexagon head screw M16 x 130

Locknut low shape M16

Detent edged washer SKM 10

Detent edged washer SKM 16

Disc 14 x 58

Disc 17 x 40 x 6

Support disc S 35 x 45 x 2.5

Ring 35 x 80 x 20

Square coach screw M8 x 30

Square coach screw M12 x 80

Ring nut M12

Locknut low shape M8

Detent edged washer SKM 8

Disc 8.4 x 24 x 2

Disc 13 x 37 x 3

Disc 17 x 37 x 3

Material surface

Zn8

Zn8

Zn8

Zn8

ZLÜ

ZLÜ

Zn8 A

Zn8

Zn8

Zn8

Zn8

Zn8

Zn8

ZLÜ

Zn8

Zn8

Strength class

8.8

8.8

8.8

10

S355MC

S355MC

8.8

8.8

C15

8

PA 6

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

2

Commissioning – mowing operation 12

Mounting the standard swathing 12.5

5

8

1

7

6

4 3

BM000-386

ü

The side mounted mowers are in working position, refer to page 87

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

ü

The side mounted mowers have been securely supported, refer to page 31 .

ü

The cross conveyors have been removed, refer to page 188 .

NOTICE! Damage to the sensor due to carelessness when working on the pulley! When mounting and dismounting the pulley, ensure that the sensor behind the pulley is not damaged.

„ To dismount the support (3), remove the screw connections (4).

„ Remove the screw (1) with the discs.

„ Remove the pulley (2) from the shaft.

„ Remove the roll pin (5).

„ Pull out the bolt (7).

„ Remove the entire segment (6).

„ Remove the journal (8) from both sides of the mower.

1

2 1

2

7

8

5

X

6

4

3

BM000-387

„ In the following sequence push the mounting material (I, J), the timing disc (1) and the mounting material (J, I) onto the shaft.

„ Mount the screw connection (2) (G, E, A).

„ Mount the support (3) using the screw connections (4) (E, A).

„ Align the sensor (5) so that the distance between sensor (5) and timing disc (1) X=3 mm .

Ensure that the sensor (5) is aligned at right angles to the timing disc (1) and is centred over the holes in the timing disc.

„ To set the distance between sensor (5) and timing disc (1), loosen both nuts (6).

„ Turn the nuts (6) until the dimension X=3 mm has been reached.

„ Tighten the nuts (6) to a tightening torque of M

A

=10 Nm.

„ Mount the guard (8) with the screw connections (7) (E, A).

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 181

12 Commissioning – mowing operation

12.6

Dismounting the standard swathing

2

1

1

12.6

3

BM000-388

„ Using a suitable hoist, pick up the pre-assembled swathing (2).

„ Mount the swathing on both sides using the screw connections (1) (C, F, H, H, F, D) and the screw connections (3) (B, F, H, H, F, D).

4

1 1

2 2

3 3

3

BM000-397

„ Mount the swath flaps (3) on both sides using the screw connection (1) (M, Q, R, L).

„ Mount the screw connections (2) (K, P, O, N).

„ "Baffles" version : Tighten the palm knobs (4) on the baffles as tightly as possible, as they can easily get lost due to vibrations.

„ In the mowing functions menu "Mower drive settings", set the parameter KMC-183 "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood installed" to "No".

Dismounting the standard swathing

WARNING

Risk of injury due to objects being ejected

If the machine is used without a cross conveyor or standard swath deposit kit, crops and foreign objects are ejected which could cause injury or even death.

„ Only use the machine with a cross conveyor or standard swath deposit kit.

182

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Commissioning – mowing operation 12

Dismounting the standard swathing 12.6

1

(E)

(F)

(G)

(H)

(I)

(A)

(B)

(C)

(D)

BM000-394

The removal of the version "Swathing Standard" (1) is described by way of example of the right side mounted mower.

„ Proceed the same for removal of the version "Swathing Standard" on the left side mounted mower.

The following mounting material is used for removal of the version "Swathing Standard" (1) on the right side mounted mower:

Pos.

Designation

2

3

2

Quantity

3

2

2

2

1

Hexagon head screw M10 x 25

Hexagon head screw M16 x 65

Locknut low shape M18 x 1.5

Detent edged washer SKM 10

Detent edged washer SKM 16

Support disc S 35 x 45 x 2.5

Disc 17 x 40 x 6

Disc (20) 21 x 37 x 3

Disc 14 x 58

Material surface

Zn8

ZN8

Zn8

Dacromet

ZLÜ

Zn8

Zn8

ZN8 A

Strength class

8.8

8.8

8

140 HV

1 1

2

3 3

3

BM000-389

ü

The side mounted mowers are in working position, refer to page 87

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

ü

The side mounted mowers have been securely supported, refer to page 31

„ Remove the screw connections (2).

„ Remove the screw connections (1) and put aside with the swath flaps (3).

2

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 183

12 Commissioning – mowing operation

12.6

Dismounting the standard swathing

2

1

1

3

BM000-388

„ Using a suitable hoist, pick up the swathing (2) and secure the swathing (2) to prevent it from falling.

„ Remove the screw connections (1, 3).

„ Using the hoist, put the swathing (2) aside.

3

1

2

6

4

5

BM000-392

„ Remove the screw connections (1) and put aside with the guard (2).

„ Remove the screw connections (5) and put aside with the support (4).

„ Remove the screw connection (3).

„ Remove the timing disc (6) and the mounting material from the shaft and put aside.

2

4

8

1

5

3

7 6

BM000-393

„ Mount the belt tensioner (3) with the bolt (1) and the roll pin (2).

„ Mount the support (6) using the screw connections (7) (A, D).

„ Mount the journal (8) on both sides of the mower using the mounting material (B, E, G, H, C).

184

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Commissioning – mowing operation 12

Mounting the cross conveyor 12.7

„ Push the belt pulley (5) with support discs (F) (as required) onto the shaft.

„ Mount the screw connection (4) (A, D, I).

„

Mounting the cross conveyor, refer to page 185

.

1

1

3

4

3

X

2

12.7

BM000-395

„ Align the sensor (3) behind the belt pulley on the conditioner so that the distance between sensor (3) and inside (2) of the belt pulley (1) X=3 mm . Ensure that the sensor (3) is aligned at right angles to the belt pulley (1) and is centred over the holes in the belt pulley.

„ To set the distance between sensor (3) and the inside (2) of the belt pulley (1), loosen both nuts (4).

„ Turn the nuts (4) until the dimension X=3 mm has been reached.

„ Tighten the nuts (4) to a tightening torque of M

A

=10 Nm.

Mounting the cross conveyor

With version "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood"

ü

The machine is in the working position, refer to page 87

.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, refer to page 31

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 185

12 Commissioning – mowing operation

12.7

Mounting the cross conveyor

BM000-282

„ Hook the cross conveyor into a suitable hoist (1) with a payload of at least 1000 kg.

„ Carefully raise the entire cross conveyor (1) to the machine and before lowering it make sure that the position of the journal support (2) and the journal (3) match on both sides.

186

BM000-281

„ Fit the screws (1, 2).

„ Mount the hydraulic hoses according to the respective version; observe the correct sequence.

1 2 4

3

BMG000-042

„ Connect the lubrication line (2) at the coupling point (3).

„ Attach the plug connection (4).

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Commissioning – mowing operation 12

Mounting the cross conveyor 12.7

1

2

3

BMG000-041

„ Attach the lubrication line (2) to the coupling point (3).

BM000-196

„ Mount the hydraulic hoses (1); observe the correct sequence. The ball (2) must be in alignment with the groove (3).

BM000-195

„ Mount the pipe clamp (1); route the hydraulic hoses in such a way as to prevent abrasion points and pinch points.

„ Mount the guard cloth between the cross conveyor and the machine frame,

refer to page 146

.

„ Ensure that the belt pulleys are in alignment. If required, compensate with support discs.

„

Place the kraftband on the auger drive and tension, refer to page 282 .

„

Mount the guard of the auger conveyor drive, refer to page 278 .

„ In the mowing functions menu "Mower drive settings", set the parameter KMC-183 "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood installed" to "Yes".

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 187

12 Commissioning – mowing operation

12.8

Dismounting the cross conveyor

12.8

Dismounting the cross conveyor

With version "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood"

WARNING

Risk of injury due to objects being ejected

If the machine is used without a cross conveyor or standard swath deposit kit, crops and foreign objects are ejected which could cause injury or even death.

„ Only use the machine with a cross conveyor or standard swath deposit kit.

ü

The machine is in the working position, refer to page 87

.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, refer to page 31

„ Remove the guard of the auger drive,

refer to page 278 .

„ Relieve the pressure on the auger drive kraftband and remove the kraftband,

refer to page 282

.

„ Dismount the deflector curtain between the cross conveyor and the machine frame from the machine frame and fold it back,

refer to page 146 .

BM000-195

„ To dismount the pipe clamp (1), loosen both nuts using two socket wrenches.

188

BM000-196

„ Clean the area around the hydraulic hoses at the central support.

„ Dismount both hydraulic hoses (1) of the swath hood, remember the sequence of the connections and make sure the ball (2) is in alignment with the groove (3).

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Commissioning – mowing operation 12

Dismounting the cross conveyor 12.8

1

2

3

BMG000-041

„ Disconnect the lubrication line (2) at the coupling point (3) and seal both sides to prevent dirt ingress.

If the machine is used with swath hoods:

„ Remove the sealing plug on the connecting piece (1) and retain for subsequent assembly.

„ Mount end of the lubrication line (2) at the mower to the connecting piece (1).

1 2 4

3

BMG000-042

„ Disconnect the plug connection (4).

„ Disconnect the lubrication line (2) at the coupling point (3) and seal both sides to prevent dirt ingress.

If the machine is used with swath hoods:

„ Remove the sealing plug on the connecting piece (1) and retain for subsequent assembly.

„ Mount end of the lubrication line (2) at the mower to the connecting piece (1).

BM000-279

„ Hook the cross conveyor into a suitable hoist (1) with a payload of at least 1000 kg.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 189

12 Commissioning – mowing operation

12.8

Dismounting the cross conveyor

BM000-281

„ To unscrew the screws (2), at first the hydraulic screw connections (3) of the hydraulic cylinder must be unscrewed according to the respective version. Pay attention to the sequence of the connections to ensure the hydraulic hoses are not mixed up. Seal the open hydraulic connections to prevent dirt ingress.

„ Dismount the screws (1).

„ Carefully raise the entire cross conveyor and put it aside.

„ If the machine is used with swath hoods, in the mowing functions menu "Mower drive settings", set the parameter KMC-183 "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood installed" to "No".

190

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

13

Driving and Transport 13

Preparing the machine for road travel 13.1

Driving and Transport

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety instructions

If the relevant safety instructions are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ To avoid accidents, the relevant safety instructions must be read and observed,

refer to page 17 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

refer to page 31

.

13.1

Preparing the machine for road travel

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

ü Soiling and crop residue have been removed from the machine, in particular from the lighting and identification elements.

ü

All mowers are in transport position, refer to page 87

ü

The side guards of the mowers are in transport position, refer to page 213

,

refer to page 192

.

ü For the "Side shift of front mounted mower" version: The front mounted mower is in

central position, refer to page 209

.

ü

The lockings of side mounted mowers are engaged, refer to page 192 .

ü The Main Mode Switch is in the "Road mode" position,

refer to page 91 .

13.1.1

Transport position

The machine must be in transport position when travelling on roads; to this end:

„

Fold up side mounted mowers, refer to page 87

.

„

Check the lock for side mounted mowers, refer to page 192

.

„ Lift the front mounted mower into the transport position,

refer to page 87 .

„ For the "Side shift front mounted mower" version : Move the front mounted mower into

the central position, refer to page 209

.

„

Fold up the side guards of the front mounted mower into transport position, refer to page 213

.

„ Make sure that the side guards of the side mounted mowers are in the transport position,

refer to page 192

. For the version with "Hydraulically foldable side guards" : Move the

side guards of the side mounted mowers manually into transport position, refer to page 213

.

„

The main mode switch is in the "Road mode" position, refer to page 91

. The axles lower automatically to the road position.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 191

13 Driving and Transport

13.1

Preparing the machine for road travel

13.1.2

Checking lockings of lateral mowers

WARNING

Danger of accident due to the side mounted mowers coming folded out during road travel

If the mowing units are not correctly locked in the transport position, they may unintentionally come folded out. This can result in serious accidents.

„ Perform a visual inspection to determine whether the side mounted mowers are locked correctly.

„ Do not place the machines in operation or stop them immediately if error messages appear regarding the transport position or locking of the side mounted mowers.

13.1.3

BM000-008

„ Perform a visual inspection on the left-hand and right-hand side of the machine to determine whether the catch (1) has completely enclosed the journal (2) of the side mounted mower.

If not:

„ Check the area for soiling and clean if required.

„ Check the catch for damage.

„ Fold in the side mounted mower again.

Checking side guards of lateral mowers

NOTICE

Machine damage due to increased machine height.

If the side guards of the side mounted mowers in transport position are not folded in, the machine height is raised considerably and this may cause damage to the machine.

„ Before travelling on the road, always ensure that the side guards of the side mounted mowers are folded in.

192

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Driving and Transport 13

Starting engine 13.2

13.2

BM000-005

„ Before travelling on the road, always check that the side guards (1) on the right/left of the

side mounted mowers are folded into the transport position, refer to page 213 .

ð The side guard are not in transport position:

For the version with "Hydraulically foldable side guards":

„ To fold up the side guards, actuate the "Fold up side guards" key, Operating and

display elements on the keypad, refer to page 89

.

For the "series" version:

„ Fold down side mounted mowers.

„ Check locking of the side guards,

refer to page 227

.

„ Move the side guards of the side mounted mowers manually into transport position.

„ Fold up side mounted mowers.

Starting engine

WARNING

Risk of poisoning from toxic exhaust gases

If the machine is operated in closed rooms without adequate ventilation, the pollutant load increases in the air.

Thus there is a risk of serious injuries or death.

„ Never allow the engine to run in closed rooms.

„ Vent the room sufficiently.

WARNING

Impact and crushing hazard for people in the vicinity of the machine due to movement of the machine!

When the machine is put into motion, there is a risk for people in the vicinity of the machine of being overrun or crushed by the machine.

„ Make sure that there is no one in the danger zone of the machine.

„ Actuate the horn before starting the engine.

„ Only start the engine from the driver's seat.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 193

13 Driving and Transport

13.2

Starting engine

WARNING

Risk of injury during operation

If the driver is not protected from the engine noise while working, his hearing will be permanently damaged.

„ Make sure that the doors and windows of the cabin are closed while the machine is used.

BXG000-059

ü The Main Mode Switch (2) is in the "Neutral" position (3),

refer to page 91 .

„ Press the main battery switch (1) to close the circuit,

refer to page 204

.

Æ The main battery switch LED is lit.

194

BMG000-005

„ Turn the ignition key (1) in the ignition lock clockwise to position “II”.

Æ The charging warning light (2) lights up.

„ Wait for at least 2 seconds, then turn the ignition key in the ignition lock into the position “III”.

When the engine starts:

„ Immediately release the ignition key.

Æ The ignition key automatically jumps to the operating position.

Æ The charging warning light (2) goes out.

„ Let engine run at idle until the coolant temperature display increases.

If the charging warning light (2) lights up:

„ Switch off engine and eliminate the fault.

If the engine does not start within 30 seconds:

„ Turn ignition key to “STOP” position.

„ After one minute delay repeat the starting process.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

13.2.1

Driving and Transport 13

Behaviour after the engine has stalled 13.3

If the engine still does not start:

„ Turn the ignition key to the "STOP" position.

„ Rectify the cause of the poor starting behaviour, see applicable engine manufacturer operating instructions.

Observing warning lights

1

13.3

BMG000-006

„ As long as the diesel engine is running, the indicator lamps on the steering column must be observed.

Charging warning light (1):

The charging warning light is not lit at all when the ignition key is in ignition step I; it is lit steady in ignition step II and briefly after the diesel engine starts.

If the charging warning light is lit continuously while the diesel engine is running, the output voltage of the alternator is not adequate to charge the batteries.

„ Check the cables and connections on the alternator and the batteries, batteries

refer to page 323

.

„ Check the V-belt on the alternator.

Behaviour after the engine has stalled

NOTICE

Heat accumulation after the engine has stalled

If a warm engine stalls, the heat accumulation, caused by the lack of cooling, may damage the engine.

„ Immediately start again when a warm engine is stalled.

„ Before finally switching engine off, allow it to run at idle speed for at least 3 minutes.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 195

13 Driving and Transport

13.4

Starting up the machine

13.4

Starting up the machine

WARNING

Danger to life by movements of the machine

People are at risk from the large movements of the machine, unusual driving behaviour and the option of riding on the outside of the machine while it is being driven.

„ Make sure that there is no second person on the machine when travelling.

„ Adapt driving speed of machine on road and field to the given conditions.

„ When driving down hills, on inclines or through obstacles, adjust driving behaviour to environmental conditions.

„ Make sure when driving around curves that the machine does not swing out.

13.4.1

Setting the acceleration behaviour

BM000-017

Four different acceleration stages can be selected, even while driving, with the "Acceleration stage" switch (2) attached to the control lever (1).

If the control lever (1) is actuated constantly in one direction and at a constant engine speed, the driving speed will increase slowest in acceleration stage I and fastest in acceleration stage

IV.

„ Switch to the required acceleration stage using the "Acceleration stage" switch (2).

Æ The selected acceleration stage (3) is displayed on the working screen of the terminal.

196

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

13.4.2

Notices on driving the machine

Driving and Transport 13

Starting up the machine 13.4

13.4.3

BM000-019

„ Adapt driving behaviour to the modified handling of the machine due to rear steering.

„ Take into consideration the different ways the machine handles in acceleration stages 1 - 4.

„ React to the different handling of the machine in road mode and field mode

„ If an error message is indicated on the terminal, immediately stop and eliminate the error. If this is not possible, inform a KRONE service partner.

„ Adapt driving behaviour to the particular terrain and ground conditions,

refer to page 209

.

Emergency steering forces

The steering also operates when the engine has stopped. However, considerably more force must be applied.

Driving forwards and stopping

BM000-018

Driving forwards from standstill:

„

Set the main mode switch to “road mode” or “field mode” position, refer to page 91

.

„

Release the parking brake, refer to page 201 .

„ Press and hold the activation key for traction drive (2).

„ Push control lever (1) to the front.

Æ The machine moves forward and accelerates.

„ Release the control lever (1) to keep the speed at constant level.

Æ The control lever automatically returns to the central position (0).

„ To slow down the machine, pull the control lever (1) backward while driving.

Æ The machine is decelerated until it is at standstill.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 197

13 Driving and Transport

13.4

Starting up the machine

13.4.3.1

Cruise control

The cruise control can be activated only when travelling forwards.

When cruise control is activated, the machine is accelerated or decelerated with the set acceleration stage to the speed saved for operation with the cruise control.

Saving speed for operation with cruise control

BM000-022

„ Accelerate the machine to the desired speed.

„ While driving, press and hold down the activation key for the traction drive (2) and at the same time, move the control lever (1) to the right and back to the central position.

Æ The current driving speed is saved.

The saved speed (3) is displayed on the working screen of the terminal display.

The speed is saved for the operating mode the machine is currently in. One speed each can be saved for road travel and field mode.

If the operating mode (“Road mode”/”Field mode”) is changed, the display switches to the value saved for the corresponding operating mode (road or field speed).

Activating cruise control

198

BMG000-004

„ While driving, actuate the control lever (1) to the right.

Æ The machine is started with the set speed.

The icon with the value of the set speed appears on the display.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

13.4.4

Driving and Transport 13

Stopping the machine 13.5

Deactivating cruise control

Cruise control is deactivated by overriding the control lever, actuating the service brake or switching off the traction drive.

Driving backward and stopping

13.5

BM000-018

Reverse from standstill:

„

Set the main mode switch to “road mode” or “field mode” position, refer to page 91

.

„

Release the parking brake, refer to page 201 .

„ Press and hold down the activation key for traction drive (2).

„ Pull control lever (1) to the rear.

Æ The machine moves backward and accelerates.

„ Release the control lever (1) to keep the speed at constant level.

Æ The control lever automatically returns to central position (0).

„ To decelerate the machine, push control lever (1) to the front while driving.

Æ The machine is decelerated until it is at standstill.

Stopping the machine

The machine can be stopped with both control lever and service brake.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 199

13 Driving and Transport

13.5

Stopping the machine

13.5.1

Stopping machine by using control lever

Stopping from forward travel

BM000-025

„ Pull the control lever (1) backwards while driving.

Æ The machine decelerates until it stops.

Stopping from reverse travel

BM000-026

„ Move the control lever (1) to the front while driving.

Æ The machine decelerates until it stops.

Quickly braking the machine

200

BM000-027

„ To slow down the machine quickly, move the control lever (1) to the left while driving.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Driving and Transport 13

Applying parking brake 13.6

Fast change of direction of travel (fast reversing)

During fast reversing, the machine decelerates to a standstill and accelerates in the opposite direction to 70% of the previous driving speed.

BM000-028

Fast reversing is possible in field mode only.

ü The machine is in the “field mode”. The field mode is selected,

refer to page 91

.

„ To activate fast reversing, press the activation key for traction drive (2) while driving and hold it down. At the same time, move the control lever (1) to the left and back to the central position.

13.5.2

Stopping machine with the service brake

WARNING

Risk of injury due to defective service brake

If the service brake has a restricted function, the machine cannot be brought to a standstill in time and people and material assets are at risk.

„ Before starting the machine, always check service brake and ensure its functionality.

Braking the machine slightly

„ Depress the foot brake slightly.

Æ When the brake pedal is released, the machine continues moving at the reduced driving speed.

Braking the machine forcefully (hazard braking)

„ Depress the service brake very forcefully.

Æ The machine is braked to an immediate standstill.

13.6

Applying parking brake

WARNING

Risk of injury due to the unsecured machine rolling away

If the unsecured machine starts moving, there is a risk of people being struck or run over.

„ When the “Parking brake” key has been pressed, check the status of the parking brake on the terminal or via the LED in the “Parking brake” key.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 201

13 Driving and Transport

13.6

Applying parking brake

INFORMATION

If the "Parking brake" key is pressed while driving, the traction drive is braked and, when the machine has stopped, the parking brake is applied.

The parking brake is automatically released or applied under certain operating conditions and can be manually actuated by pressing the "Parking brake" key (1).

BXG000-013

To apply the parking brake manually via the keypad:

„ Press the "Parking brake" key (1).

To release the parking brake manually via the keypad:

„ When the diesel engine is running, depress the brake pedal.

„ Press the "Parking brake" key (1).

The status of the parking brake is indicated by the LED in the "Parking brake" key:

„ The parking brake has been applied when the LED is lit.

„ The parking brake has been released when the LED is not lit.

202

EQG002-020

The status of the parking brake is also displayed on the working screen of the terminal:

• The parking brake has been applied when the "Parking brake"  indicator lamp appears on the terminal.

• The parking brake has been released when the "Parking brake" indicator lamp is not lit on the terminal.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

13.7

Driving and Transport 13

Switching off the engine 13.7

Automatic actuation of the parking brake:

• The parking brake is automatically applied when the driver's seat is not occupied.

• The parking brake is automatically applied when the diesel engine is switched off.

• The parking brake is automatically released when the machine starts.

• The parking brake is automatically released when the brake pedal is depressed

Switching off the engine

NOTICE

Engine will be damaged by heat accumulation

If the engine is immediately switched off after operation under load, the heat accumulation, caused by the lack of cooling, may damage the engine.

„ Before switching off the engine, let it run at idle speed for at least 3 minutes.

„ Stop the machine,

refer to page 199

.

„ To cool down the engine, leave the engine running for three minutes at a low idle speed.

13.8

BM000-029

„ Turn the ignition key (1) anti-clockwise to the "STOP" position.

„ Move the main mode switch into the "Neutral" position,

refer to page 91

.

Wheel chocks

1

1

BXG000-003

1

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 203

13 Driving and Transport

13.9

Main battery switch

The machine is equipped with 2 wheel chocks (1). They are located in the storage compartment above the right front wheel.

„ Ensure that the wheel chocks (1) are always carried along.

„ When parking, secure the machine against rolling away using both wheel chocks (1).

„ Place the wheel chocks (1) tightly up against the wheels, either in front of or behind them, to prevent the machine from rolling away.

13.9

Main battery switch

The main battery switch is used to switch on or interrupt the machine’s power supply.

1

2

BXG000-002

The main battery switch (2) is located in the storage compartment (1) below the left platform.

The main battery switch is designed as a momentary switch with integrated LED.

The power supply is automatically interrupted after 24 hours.

If the main battery switch is pressed for not longer than 1 second, the power supply is automatically interrupted after a delay of about 120 seconds. This guarantees the run-down time (cleaning) of the exhaust aftertreatment system.

If the main battery switch is pressed for longer than 2 seconds, the power supply is interrupted immediately. There is no run-down time (cleaning) of the exhaust aftertreatment system.

„ After using the machine, in emergencies and for repairs, interrupt the power supply.

NOTICE! Damage to the exhaust aftertreatment system Do not press the main battery switch for longer than 1 second.

„ To switch on or interrupt the power supply, press the main battery switch:

Æ When the LED is lit, the power supply is switched on

Æ When the LED is flashing, the run-down time is running (approx. 120 second) to allow cleaning of the exhaust aftertreatment system.

Æ When the LED is not lit, the power supply is interrupted.

„ To interrupt the power supply as quickly as possible in an emergency, press the main battery switch for 2 seconds.

Æ The power supply is interrupted immediately.

204

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Driving and Transport 13

Parking the machine 13.10

13.10

Parking the machine

WARNING

Risk of injury due to the unsecured machine rolling away

If the machine is not secured against rolling away when it has been switched off, there is a risk of people being injured by the machine rolling away in an uncontrolled manner.

„ Secure the machine against rolling using wheel chocks.

„

Fold up side mounted mowers, refer to page 87

.

Æ

The lockings of side mounted mowers are engaged, refer to page 192 .

„ Check whether the outer side guards (1) of the left/right side mounted mowers are folded into transport position,

refer to page 192 .

„ Fold up the side guards of front mounted mower,

refer to page 213 .

„ Move front mounted mower to central position,

refer to page 209 .

„

Switch Main Mode Switch to "neutral" position, refer to page 91

.

„ Apply the parking brake,

refer to page 201

.

„

Shut down and secure the machine, refer to page 31

.

13.11

Recovering the Machine

WARNING

Danger of accidents due to uncontrolled movement of the machine!

When recovering the machine there is a danger that the driver will loose control of the machine, since the diesel engine is stopped, which increases steering and braking forces. As a result, people may be seriously injured or killed.

„ Ensure that there is nobody inside the danger zone.

„ Only move the machine out of the danger zone.

„ Note that steering and braking forces are increased when the diesel engine is stationary.

NOTICE

Damage to the machine due to incorrect operation

If retrieval is not performed correctly, power transmission components or the diesel engine may be damaged.

„ Turn the Main Mode Switch to "Neutral mode".

„ Release the parking brake, if required release manually,

refer to page 201 ,

refer to page 206

.

„ Switch off the diesel engine.

„ Pull the fuses F30 and F98 so that the hydraulic motors are at idle,

refer to page 337 .

„ Switch on the ignition so that the direction indicators/flashing warning lamps and the brake lamps function.

„ Only move the machine out of the danger zone (at max. 8 km/h).

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 205

13 Driving and Transport

13.11 Recovering the Machine

1

BM000-256

„ To retrieve the machine, select the suspension points (1) on the front of the machine.

„ Turn the Main Mode Switch to "Neutral mode".

„

Release parking brake, refer to page 201 .

If the machine no longer builds up the oil pressure required for releasing the parking brake:

„

Release the parking brake manually, refer to page 206 .

„ Switch off the diesel engine.

„ Pull the fuses F98 and F30,

refer to page 337 .

„ Turn the ignition key in the ignition lock to the "I" position so that the direction indicators/ flashing warning lamps and the brake lamps function.

„ Move the machine out of the danger zone.

13.11.1

Release the parking brake manually

4 3

1 II

2 II

3

I

I

2

206

BXG000-062

Securing the machine against rolling away:

„

Shut down and secure the machine, refer to page 31

„ Place the wheel chocks on the right and left, in front of and behind the wheels of the front axle.

The parking brake can be released with the hand pump (1):

„ Swivel the stop cock (2) into the closed position (II).

„ Insert the pump lever (3) into the pump holder (4) on the hand pump.

„ Release the parking brake by pumping the hand pump.

If the effort during pumping increases considerably:

„ Check whether the brake has been released by moving the machine.

Æ As long as the stop cock (2) is in the closed position (II), the parking brake is released.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Restoring the braking function on the parking brake:

„ Swivel the stop cock (2) into the open position (I).

Driving and Transport 13

Preparing the machine for shipment 13.12

13.12

Preparing the machine for shipment

NOTICE

Damage to the exhaust gas aftertreatment system due to water penetrating through the exhaust pipe.

If the machine is being transported opposite to the direction of travel on an lorry trailer, rain water may penetrate into the exhaust pipe into the exhaust gas aftertreatment system and this may cause damage to the exhaust gas aftertreatment system.

„ Only transport the machine on a lorry trailer facing in the direction of travel.

13.12.1

Lashing points

WARNING

Danger to life caused by uncontrolled machine movement.

If the machine is not properly lashed during transport on a lorry or ship, the machine may move in an uncontrolled manner and endanger people.

„ Before transporting the machine, secure it properly by using the provided lashing points and suitable lashing material.

Appropriate lashing points are provided on the machine for attachment of the lashing material.

BM000-330

1 Lashing point at rear left

2 Lashing point at rear right

3 Lashing point right front

4 Lashing point left front

13.12.2

Removing the machine wheels

The wheels must be removed if this is necessary to transport the machine. The machine may only be jacked up by authorised technicians,

refer to page 357 .

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 207

14 Operation

14.1

Field Mode

14 Operation

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety instructions

If the relevant safety instructions are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ To avoid accidents, the relevant safety instructions must be read and observed,

refer to page 17 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

refer to page 31

.

14.1

Field Mode

WARNING

Risk of injury due to movement of the machine or machine parts

If people remain in or enter the danger zone of the machine during operation, there is an increased risk of injury.

„ Do not start the machine until all safety devices have been fitted and are in sound condition.

„

Make certain there is no one in the danger zone of the machine (safety distance, refer to page 20 ).

If people enter the danger zone:

„ Stop the machine immediately.

„ Instruct persons to leave the danger zone.

„ Do not restart the machine until there is nobody in the danger zone.

The settings for field mode, including mowing functions, sidehill levelling (for the "Hydraulic side shift front mounted mower" version), settings for cutting height and headland,

refer to page 109

and refer to page 134 .

14.1.1

Working position

For use in the field, the machine must be in the working position, for this:

„

Turn the main mode switch in the "Field mode" position, refer to page 91 .

„

Fold down the mowers into working position, refer to page 87

.

„ Fold down the side guards of the front mounted mower or with the "Hydraulically foldable side guards" version ensure that the side guards are folded down into the working position,

refer to page 213

.

„ Make sure that the side guards of the side mounted mowers are folded down into the working position,

refer to page 213

.

208

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

14.1.2

Operation 14

Field Mode 14.1

Field mode on slopes

„ Dangers when operating the machine on slopes,

refer to page 24 .

„ Before working on a slope, increase the tyre pressure by 0.4 bar more than indicated in the technical data,

refer to page 68

„ After working on the slope, the tyre pressure must be set to the values in the tyre pressure table,

refer to page 68 .

BM000-267

„ Do not bring the machine from the transport position into the working position or from the working position into the transport position as long as the machine is positioned and used across a slope.

14.1.2.1

Moving front mounted mower into the central position

For the "Side shift front mounted mower" version

1

2

BM000-139

„ To move the front mounted mower to the central position, actuate the "Side shift front mounted mower left" key or the "Side shift front mounted mowing right" key on the control

lever alternately, refer to page 87

.

Æ The front mounted mower is in the central position when the top link (1) and the marking (2) on front guard of the cabin are in line.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 209

14 Operation

14.1

Field Mode

14.1.3

Operating mowers

WARNING

Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine due to uncontrolled lowering of a mower

When lowering a mower into the working position, people or animals in the swivel range may be seriously injured.

„ Do not lower the mowing units until you are absolutely sure that neither people, animals nor objects are in the swivel range of the mowing units.

ü The circuit is closed (LED on main battery switch is lit),

refer to page 204 .

ü

The main mode switch is in the “field mode” position, refer to page 91

.

„

Start the engine, refer to page 194

.

Operating all mowers simultaneously

„ To fold out all mowers from the transport position into the headland position, press the release button, subsequently press the "Lower/Fold out all mowers simultaneously" key on the control lever,

refer to page 87 .

„ To lower all mowers, press the "Lower/Fold out all mowers simultaneously" key on the control lever,

refer to page 87 .

„ Fold down the side guards of the front mounted mower,

refer to page 213

„ Make sure the side guards of the side mounted mowers have been folded down automatically; if not, set the locking,

refer to page 227

.

„ Connect the guard cloths "front" and "side guard" using the turnlock fastener.

„ To fold in all mowers from the headland position into the transport position,

„ loosen the turnlock fasteners of the guard cloth "front" and "side guard".

„ Press the release button, subsequently press the "Raise/Fold in all mowers simultaneously" key on the control lever,

refer to page 87 .

„ Make sure the side guards of the side mounted mowers have been folded up automatically;

if not, set the locking, refer to page 227

.

„

Fold up the side guards of the front mounted mowers, refer to page 213

.

„ To raise all mowers, press the "Raise/Fold in all mowers simultaneously" key on the control lever,

refer to page 87 .

Raising/lowering the front mower

„ To lower the front mounted mower, press the "Lower front mounted mower" key on the control lever,

refer to page 87 .

„ Fold down the side guards of the front mounted mower,

refer to page 213

„ To raise the front mounted mower, press the "Raise front mounted mower" key on the control lever,

refer to page 87 .

„

Fold up the side guards of the front mounted mowers, refer to page 213

.

210

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Operation 14

Field Mode 14.1

Moving the front mounted mower to the side (for "Hydraulic front mounted mower side shift" version)

„ To move the front mounted mower to the left, press the "Front mounted mower left" key on the control lever,

refer to page 87 .

„ To move the front mounted mower to the right, press the "Front mounted mower right" key on the control lever,

refer to page 87 .

Operating the right side mounted mower

„ To fold out the right side mounted mower from the transport position into the headland position, press the release button, subsequently press the "Lower/Fold out right side

mounted mower" key on the control lever, refer to page 87

.

„ To lower the right side mounted mower, press the "Lower/Fold out right side mounted mower" key on the control lever,

refer to page 87 .

„ Make sure the side guard of the side mounted mowers has been folded down automatically;

if not, set the locking, refer to page 227

.

„ Connect the guard cloths "front" and "side guard" using the turnlock fastener.

„ To fold in the right side mounted mower from the headland position into the transport position,

„ loosen the turnlock fasteners of the guard cloth "front" and "side guard".

„ Press the release button, subsequently press the "Raise/Fold in right side mounted mower" key on the control lever,

refer to page 87

.

„ Make sure the side guard of the side mounted mowers has been folded up automatically; if

not, set the locking, refer to page 227 .

„ To raise the right side mounted mower, press the "Raise/Fold in right side mounted mower"

key on the control lever, refer to page 87

.

Operating the left side mounted mower

„ To fold out the left side mounted mower from the transport position into the headland position, press the release button, subsequently press the "Lower/Fold out left side mounted mower" key on the control lever,

refer to page 87 .

„ To lower the left side mounted mower, press the "Lower/Fold out left side mounted mower"

key on the control lever, refer to page 87

.

„ Make sure the side guard of the side mounted mowers has been folded down automatically;

if not, set the locking, refer to page 227

.

„ Connect the guard cloths "front" and "side guard" using the turnlock fastener.

„ To fold in the left side mounted mower from the headland position into the transport position,

„ loosen the turnlock fasteners of the guard cloth "front" and "side guard".

„ Press the release button, subsequently press the "Raise/Fold in left side mounted mower" key on the control lever,

refer to page 87

.

„ Make sure the side guard of the side mounted mowers has been folded up automatically; if

not, set the locking, refer to page 227 .

„ To raise the left side mounted mower, press the "Raise/Fold in left side mounted mower"

key on the control lever, refer to page 87

.

14.1.4

Fast change of direction of travel (fast reversing)

During fast reversing, the machine decelerates to a standstill and accelerates in the opposite direction to 70% of the previous driving speed.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 211

14 Operation

14.1

Field Mode

Fast reversing is possible in field mode only.

14.1.5

BMG000-007

ü The main mode switch is in the “Field mode” position.

To activate fast reversing:

„ While driving, press and hold down the activation key for the traction drive (2), move the control lever (1) to the left and back to the central position.

Switching the mower drive on and off

ü The circuit is closed (LED on main battery switch is lit),

refer to page 204 .

ü

The engine is started, refer to page 194 .

ü The Main Mode Switch is in the "field mode" position,

refer to page 91

.

ü

All the mowers are in the headland position, refer to page 210

.

ü The side guards are folded down,

refer to page 89 and

refer to page 213

.

„ To check the operating state of the mower drives, observe the LED at top left on the

respective key, refer to page 89

.

For more detailed information on the keypad see

refer to page 89 .

Switching all mower drives on or off

„ To switch on all mower drives, first press and then on the keypad.

„ To switch off all mower drives press the key on the keypad.

Switching the front drive on or off

„ To switch on the front drive, first press and then on the keypad.

„ To switch off the front drive press on the keypad.

212

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

14.2

Operation 14

Folding up/folding down side guards 14.2

Switching the right/left mower drives on or off

„ To switch on the left mower drive, first press and on the keypad.

„ To switch off the left mower drive press on the keypad.

„ To switch on the right mower drive, first press and on the keypad.

„ To switch off the right mower drive press on the keypad.

Folding up/folding down side guards

For the "Series" version

Front mounted mowers

2

1

1

4

3

BMG000-040

ü The front mounted mower is in working position,

refer to page 87

.

ü

The machine has been shut down and secured, refer to page 31 .

Folding up side guard (transport position)

„ Open the turnlock fasteners (3).

„ In order to unlock the side guard (1), press down the ratchet by means of a screwdriver (2).

„ Fold up the side guard (1) until the side guard engages in the latch.

Folding down side guard (working position)

„ To fold down the side guard (1), pull the side guard out of the latch while the locking is (4) pulled and fold it down.

„ Secure the guard cloths by means of the turnlock fasteners (3).

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 213

14 Operation

14.2

Folding up/folding down side guards

Side mounted mowers

The side guards of the side mounted mowers fold up and down automatically when folding the mowers up and down.

„ Before the side mounted movers are folded into the transport position, release the turnlock fasteners on the guard cloths.

„ After folding the side mounted mowers into the working position, close the turnlock fasteners on the guard cloths.

„ Make sure that the side guards on the side mounted mowers have folded automatically into the transport position and have also folded down automatically into the working position,

refer to page 192

.

For the version with "Hydraulically foldable side guards"

The side guards on the front mounted mower and the side mounted mowers are folded up and down hydraulically.

WARNING

Crush hazard caused by lowering the loading side guards

While the hydraulic side guard is being lowered there is a crush hazard between the side guard and the top guard sheet .

„ Make certain while the hydraulic side guard is being lowered that there are no persons remaining in the danger zone.

1 2 1

2

1

BMG000-046

Folding up side guards into transport position

„ Open the turnlock fasteners (2).

„ To fold up the side guards (1), actuate the "Fold up side guards" key,

refer to page 89 .

Folding down side guards into working position

„

To fold own the side guards (1), press the "Fold down side guards" key refer to page 89

.

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 31 .

„ Secure the guard cloths using the turnlock fasteners (2).

214

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

14.3

Operation 14

Front guard 14.3

Automatic folding up/down of the side guards

WARNING! Risk of injury from automatic fold-up and fold-down of the side guards! When pressing the keys "Raise/fold in all mowers simultaneously" and "Lower/fold down all mowers simultaneously", ensure that there is nobody inside the danger zone of the machine.

„ Before the mowers are folded into transport position, make sure that the turnlock fasteners on the guard cloths are open.

• If the key "Raise/fold in all mowers simultaneously" is actuated and the release button has already been pressed, the side guards will automatically fold up as of the headland position,

refer to page 89 .

• If the "Lower/fold down all mowers simultaneously" key is pressed and the release button has already been pressed, the side guards fold down automatically as of the headland position,

refer to page 89 .

Front guard

WARNING

Risk of injury due to objects being ejected

If the front guard is folded up during work, objects can be ejected. As a result, people may be seriously injured.

„ Fold down the front guard.

„ Connect the guard cloths of the front guard and the side guard using the turnlock fasteners.

14.3.1

Folding up the front guard

The front guard can be folded up for maintenance and repair work.

This is described below using the example of the side mounted mower; the procedure for the front mounted mower is identical.

2

3 4

1

KMG000-006

ü

The machine is in the working position, refer to page 87

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

„ Open the turnlock fasteners (3).

„ To fold up the front guard (1), press the catch with a screwdriver (2) and fold up the front guard.

„ Fix the front guard (1) in place with the wedge (4).

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 215

14 Operation

14.4

Operating support jack

14.3.2

Fold down the front guard

ü

The machine is in the working position, refer to page 87

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

14.4

KMG000-082

„ Hold the front guard (1) firmly in place and push the wedge (4) upwards.

„ Fold down the front guard (1).

„ Ensure that the front guard (1) is engaged in the lock (2) on the right and left sides of the machine.

„ Close the turnlock fasteners (3).

Operating support jack

For the version with “support jack”

INFORMATION

In order to increase the base of the support jack when the ground is soft, use a suitable support.

14.4.1

Moving support jack into transport position

1

2

1

2

KMG000-065

„ Raise the machine via front hydraulics until the support jack (2) can be inserted.

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 31 .

„ Pull the tension bar (1), insert the support jack (2) and lock it with the tension bar (1).

216

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Operation 14

PowerSplit 14.5

14.4.2

Moving support jack into support position

14.5

2

1

1

2

KMG000-064

„ Raise the machine via front hydraulics until the support jack (2) can be lowered.

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 31 .

„ Pull the tension bar (1), lower the support jack (2) and lock it with the tension bar (1).

PowerSplit

The PowerSplit is used to increase the efficiency of the machine. The continuous engine performance is adjusted to the application conditions and therefore helps to optimise the fuel consumption.

The PowerSplit automatically switches between ECO-Power and M-Power, depending on the speed of the diesel engine.

ECO-Power automatically switches to M-Power if the engine speed drops below 1550 rpm during mowing.

M-Power automatically switches to ECO-Power when the engine speed exceeds 1550 rpm again and the engine load is above the switchover load (factory basic setting 80%).

M-Power always switches back to ECO-Power mode abruptly as soon as the engine is relieved to the necessary extent.

EQ003-142

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 217

14 Operation

14.5

PowerSplit

EQ003-141

Setting the PowerSplit:

„ In the main menu -> Menu Engine -> Submenu "Diesel engine settings" set the status of the

"PowerSplit" to "Discontinuous switchover" or "Continuous switchover".

In the case of discontinuous switchover, the switchover occurs abruptly at the set rotational speed.

In the case of continuous switchover, the switchover occurs continuously and starts 100 rpm before the set rotational speed.

EQ003-143

Following activation of the PowerSplit, the indicator lamp on the terminal is lit for the engine management (1) or for the automatic switchover of the engine management.

As soon as the "ECO/M-Power" key for manual ECO-Power/M-Power switchover is pressed on the keypad, the automatic operation of the PowerSplit is interrupted and the selected engine characteristic ECO-Power or M-Power is retained.

218

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

15

Settings 15

Setting in the terminal 15.1

Settings

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety instructions

If the relevant safety instructions are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ To avoid accidents, the relevant safety instructions must be read and observed,

refer to page 17 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

refer to page 31

.

15.1

15.1.1

Setting in the terminal

Manual settings

In the menu mowing functions "Manual operation" manual settings can be made to the mowers.

EQ002-224

ü The menu mowing functions "Manual operation" has been opened.

• The left side mounted mower is manually operated in the display range (1).

• The front mounted mower is manually operated in the display range (2).

• The right side mounted mower is manually operated in the display range (3).

„ To increase the cutting height, press .

„ To reduce the cutting height, press .

„ To release the ratchet, press .

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 219

15 Settings

15.1

Setting in the terminal

„ To lock the ratchet, press .

„ To release the pendulum stop, press .

„ To lock the pendulum stop, press .

15.1.2

Setting cutting height

The cutting height can be adjusted to different ground conditions. The menu mowing functions

"Cutting height, Cutting height" can be used to change two cutting heights for the mowers and to store them.

Save cutting height 1 and cutting height 2

ü The menu mowing functions "Cutting height, Cutting height" has been opened.

220

EQ002-087

The current cutting height for all mowers is shown in the display range (3).

„ To change the values for each mowing unit, press change the values for each mowing unit.

. Then use or

„ To change the values for all mowing units proportionally, press

to change the values for all mowing units.

. Then use

„ To change the values for cutting height 1, press

Æ The values are accepted then in the display range (1).

.

„ To change the values for cutting height 2, press

Æ The values are accepted then in the display range (2).

.

„ To activate the values in display ranges (1) or (2) press, .

to

or

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Settings 15

Setting in the terminal 15.1

INFORMATION

In order to obtain an optimum crop flow the cutterbar should always be inclined slightly forwards. If, however, a higher cut is required:

„ For version with "High-cut skids"

: Mount high-cut skids, front mounted mower, refer to page 224

, side mounted mowers,

refer to page 232 .

15.1.3

Setting the mower relief

The mower load relief adjusts the ground pressure of the cutter bar to the local conditions. In order to protect the sward the load on the cutter bar must be relieved so that it does not jump when mowing, yet does not leave any skid marks on the ground.

The "Mower load relief, relief" menu displays the current mower load relief and it is possible to store 2 settings for the mower load relief.

ü The "Mowing functions" menu has been opened.

Saving mower relief 1 and mower relief 2

EQ002-088

• The first value of the mower relief is displayed and saved in display range (1).

• The second value of the mower relief is displayed and saved in display range (2).

• The current mower relief of all mowers is displayed and saved in display range (3).

„ To change the values for each mowing unit, press change the values for each mowing unit.

. Then use or to

„ To change the values for all mowing units proportionally, press

to change the values for all mowing units.

. Then use

„ To save the values for mower relief 1, press .

Æ The values are accepted then in the display range (1).

„ Press to save the values for mower relief 2.

Æ The values are accepted then in the display range (2).

„ To save the values in the display ranges (1) or (2), press .

or

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 221

15 Settings

15.2

Settings on front mounted mower

15.2

Settings on front mounted mower

15.2.1

Adjusting the front mounted mower side guards

222

BMG000-029

The protective equipment can be adapted to harvesting conditions by adjusting the guards. In order to avoid that crop stalks bend because the guards are too low, set the guards higher. To avoid that stones are slung away when the crops are low, set the guards lower.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

„ Fold up the side guards (1),

refer to page 213 .

„ Loosen the screws (4).

„ Use the console (3) to adjust the height of the side guard (1).

„ Tighten the screws (4).

Readjusting the front guard support

2

1

3

BMG000-035

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

15.2.2

Settings 15

Settings on front mounted mower 15.2

After the side guards have been adjusted, the two front guard supports must be readjusted. To do this:

„ Loosen the screws (3) on both front guard supports (2).

„ Adjust the two front guard supports (2) with the oblong holes (1) so that the front guard is supported.

„ Tighten the screws (3) on both front guard supports.

Set conditioner speed

BM000-199

Two conditioner speeds can be set on the belt drive of the front mounted mower. This affects the conditioning effect and the power requirement.

Maximum rotational speed: 1000 rpm (inner belt pulleys (1): large belt pulley on top, small belt pulley on bottom)

Minimum rotational speed: 700 rpm (outer belt pulleys (2): small belt pulley on top, large belt pulley on bottom)

ü The front mounted mower is in working position,

refer to page 87

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

ü

The guard for the conditioner drive is dismounted, refer to page 277

.

„ To set the conditioner speed to 700 rpm, tension the kraftband (5) on the two outer pulleys

(2). To do this:

„

Release the tension on the belt drive on the front mounted mower, refer to page 280 .

„ Position the kraftband (5) on the two outer pulleys (2).

„

Tension the belt drive on the front mounted mower, refer to page 280

.

„ To set the conditioner speed of the front mounted mower to 1000 rpm, tension the kraftband

(5) on the two inner pulleys (1). To do this:

„

Release the tension on the belt drive on the front mounted mower, refer to page 280 .

„ Position the kraftband (5) on the two inner pulleys (2).

„

Tension the belt drive on the front mounted mower, refer to page 280

.

„

Mount the guard for the conditioner drive, refer to page 277 .

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 223

15 Settings

15.2

Settings on front mounted mower

15.2.3

Setting the degree of conditioning

15.2.4

KMG000-066

The degree of conditioning can be changed by adjusting the conditioning sheet using the lever

(1).

ü

The machine is in the working position, refer to page 87

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

„ Adjust the lever (1).

Æ In direction " + ": The distance between the tines and the conditioning sheet is reduced. The degree of conditioning is increased.

Æ In direction " ": The distance between the tines and the conditioning sheet is increased. The degree of conditioning is reduced.

Increasing cutting height at front mounted mower with high-cut skids

For version with “high-cut skids”

15.2.5

KMG000-025

The cutting height can be increased by means of high cut skids. Mount high cut skids according to figure under the cutting discs or under the mower drum.

ü The front mounted mower is raised,

refer to page 87 .

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

ü The front mounted mower has been securely supported,

refer to page 31 .

„ Insert the high-cut skid (2) into the sliding skid (1) and screw it in place.

Setting wide spreading

Removing the swath flap sets the crop down more widely.

224

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Settings 15

Settings on front mounted mower 15.2

15.2.6

BM000-218

ü

The machine is in the working position, refer to page 87

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

Removing and mounting swath flaps right/left

Removing swath flaps

„ Pull the spring cotter pin (5) and remove the bolt (1).

„ Unscrew the ring screw (3).

„ Remove the swath flap (4) and store it with the mounting parts in a secure place for later assembly.

Mounting swath flaps

„ Mount the swath flap (4) with the bolt (1), the spring cotter pin (5) and the ring screw (3) on the hood (2).

Setting swath width

1

BMG000-032

ü The front mounted mower is in working position,

refer to page 87

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

„ Unscrew the ring screw (1) on the right-hand and left-hand side of the machine.

„ To set the swath width, move the ring screw (1) in the oblong hole. Set the swath width in a way that ensures the tyres of the machine do not drive over the swath.

„ Tighten the ring screw (1) by hand.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 225

15 Settings

15.3

Settings on the side mounted mowers

15.2.7

Checking deflector sheets

15.3

15.3.1

BM000-219

ü

The machine is in the working position, refer to page 87

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

ü

The swath flaps right/left are dismounted, refer to page 225

„ In case of uneven swathing, check that the deflector sheets (1) are not deformed and align them, if necessary.

Settings on the side mounted mowers

Adjusting the side mounted mower side guards

226

KMG000-078

The protective equipment can be adapted to harvesting conditions by adjusting the guards. In order to avoid that crop stalks bend because the guards are too low, set the guards higher. To avoid that stones are slung away when the crops are low, set the guards lower.

ü

The side mounted mowers are in working position, refer to page 87

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Settings 15

Settings on the side mounted mowers 15.3

Setting the side guard (1)

„ Press down the ratchet using a screwdriver (8) and fold up the side guard (1).

„ Loosen the screws (4).

„ Set the height of the side guard (1) by means of the console (5).

„ Tighten the screws (4).

Setting the side guard (2)

„ Fold up the front guard (3),

refer to page 215 .

„ Loosen the screws (6).

„ Set the height of the side guard (2) by means of the console (7).

„ Tighten the screws (6).

„ Set both side guards equally.

Readjusting the front guard support

2

1

15.3.2

3

BMG000-035

After the side guards have been adjusted, the front guard support must be readjusted. To do this:

„ Loosen the screws (3) on the front guard support (2).

„ Adjust the front guard support (2) with the oblong holes (1) so that the front guard is supported.

„ Tighten the screws (3).

Checking/setting locking of side guards

KMG000-042

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 227

15 Settings

15.3

Settings on the side mounted mowers

The locking (2) prevents during use that the side guard (1) is folded up and foreign bodies are slung away. Therefore make sure every time before using the machine that the side guard (1) of the machine is folded down and secured by the locking (2).

15.3.3

Check the lock

„

Move the machine to the working position, refer to page 210

.

ð If the side guard folds down, it is correctly set.

ð If the side guard does not fold down, the locking must be set.

„ Move the machine to the transport position.

ð If the side guard folds down, the side guard is correctly adjusted.

ð If the side guard does not fold down, the lock must be adjusted.

Setting the locking

ü

The machine is in the working position, refer to page 87

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

„ Loosen the screw connection (3).

„ Readjust the locking (2) in the oblong hole.

„ Tighten the screw connection (3).

„ Check the locking (2).

Setting the conditioner speed

228

KMG000-040

Two conditioner speeds can be set on the main gearbox. These influence the effect of the conditioner and the power requirement.

Minimum rotational speed ( ): 700 rpm

Maximum rotational speed ( ): 1000 rpm

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

ü

The side mounted mowers are in working position, refer to page 87

.

„ Unscrew the wing screw (1) from the actuating lever (2).

„ Turn the actuating lever (2) 180 degrees.

INFO: To turn the actuating lever more easily, turn the mower drum manually.

„ Secure the actuating lever (2) with the wing screw (1).

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

15.3.4

Settings 15

Settings on the side mounted mowers 15.3

The arrow (3) points in the direction of travel and indicates the rotational speed that is set.

Setting the auger speed

With version "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood"

The auger speed can be set by replacing the pulleys and adjusting the conditioner speed at the

main gearbox, refer to page 228 .

The following options are available for setting the auger speed:

NOTICE

Machine damage due to an excessively high auger speed

An excessively high auger speed can result in imbalance and thus damage the machine.

„ Never set the conditioner speed to 1000 rpm if the large pulley is mounted at the conditioner and the small pulley is mounted at the auger conveyor.

Auger speed low high high

Conditioner speed main gearbox

700 rpm

700 rpm

1000 rpm

Pulley at conditioner Pulley at auger conveyor small pulley large pulley large pulley small pulley small pulley large pulley

Replacing pulleys

ü

The side mounted mowers are in working position, refer to page 87

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

ü

The guard for the auger drive is dismounted, refer to page 278

.

BM000-275

„ To dismount the support (1), unscrew the two screws (2) and the discs.

„ To dismount the support (3), unscrew the two screws (4) and the discs.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 229

15 Settings

15.3

Settings on the side mounted mowers

BM000-273

„

Release the tension of the kraftband of the auger drive, refer to page 282

.

„ Remove the kraftband.

„ NOTICE! Damage to the sensor due to carelessness when working at the pulley!

When mounting and dismounting the pulleys, make sure that the sensor behind the pulley is not damaged.

„ Unscrew the screws (1); observe the number of mounted discs.

„ Pull the pulleys (2) off the shafts; observe the number of mounted discs.

„ Slide the pulleys (2) together with the previously dismounted discs onto the respective shaft according to the desired rotational speed.

„ To check alignment, position a straight bar centrally at the left-hand and right-hand pulley.

ð The pulleys are not aligned to each other.

„ Use discs to compensate the position of the pulleys.

ð The pulleys are aligned to each other.

„ Mount the pulleys (2) using the previously dismounted screws (1) and discs.

„ Position the kraftband on the pulleys.

„ Check whether the tension roll is positioned centrally on the kraftband.

ð The tension roll is not positioned centrally on the kraftband.

„ Use discs to compensate the position of the tension roll.

ð The tension roll is positioned centrally on the kraftband.

„

Tension the belt tension of the auger drive, refer to page 282

.

230

BM000-275

„ Mount the support (1) using the previously dismounted screws (2) and discs.

„ Mount the support (3) using the previously dismounted screws (4) and discs.

„

Mount the guard for the auger drive, refer to page 278 .

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

15.3.5

Settings 15

Settings on the side mounted mowers 15.3

Adjusting the scraper sheet

For version "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood"

The scraper sheet (1) on the auger tray (right and left) is used to strip off the crop stalks in order to prevent crop blockages in the area of the auger conveyor.

2

X 1

1

2

3

15.3.6

BM000-122

ü

The side mounted mowers are in working position, refer to page 87

.

ü The swath hoods are open,

refer to page 89 .

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

To achieve optimum working results, a dimension of X= 0-2 mm between auger conveyor (2) and scraper sheet (1) must be maintained.

„ Loosen the screws (3).

„ Move the scraper sheet (1) in the oblong holes until the dimension between the scraper sheet (1) and the auger conveyor (2) is X= 0‑2 mm .

„ Tighten the screws (3).

„ Perform a test run to ensure that the auger conveyor does not brush the scraper sheet.

„ If the auger conveyor brushes the scraper sheet, adjust the distance.

Setting the degree of conditioning

KMG000-066

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 231

15 Settings

15.3

Settings on the side mounted mowers

The degree of conditioning can be changed by adjusting the conditioning sheet using the lever

(1).

ü

The machine is in the working position, refer to page 87

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

„ Adjust the lever (1).

Æ In direction " + ": The distance between the tines and the conditioning sheet is reduced. The degree of conditioning is increased.

Æ In direction " ": The distance between the tines and the conditioning sheet is increased. The degree of conditioning is reduced.

15.3.7

Increasing the cutting height at the side mounted mowers by means of high-cut skids

For version with “high-cut skids”

15.3.8

KMG000-025

The cutting height can be increased by means of high cut skids. Mount high cut skids according to figure under the cutting discs or under the mower drum.

ü

The mowers are in the headland position, refer to page 87

.

ü The mowers are safely supported,

refer to page 31 .

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

„ Insert the high-cut skid (1) into the sliding skid (2) and screw it in place.

Setting wide spreading

I

3

232

1 2

2 3

KMG000-100

ü

The machine is in the working position, refer to page 87

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

„ Swivel the swath flaps (2) all the way outwards (I).

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Settings 15

Settings on the side mounted mowers 15.3

For the version with “deflector sheets”

Depending on the operating conditions, the deflector sheets (3) may have to be readjusted to provide for equal distribution across the entire area.

„ Loosen the palm knobs (1).

„ Shift the deflector sheets (3) to the desired position.

„ Tighten the palm knobs (1) manually.

„ Ensure that the palm knobs are tightened as tight as possible. Otherwise they may be lost due to vibrations.

15.3.8.1

Setting wide spreading sheet

15.3.9

KM000-028

ü

The machine is in the working position, refer to page 87

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

„ Loosen the palm knobs (1) on right and left sides of machine.

„ Move the wide spreading sheet (2) to the desired position.

For swathing, set the wide spreading sheet all the way down.

For wide spreading, adjust the wide spreading sheet to the amount of forage.

„ Tighten the palm knobs (1) manually.

„ Ensure that the palm knobs are tightened as tight as possible. Otherwise they may be lost due to vibrations.

Impact damage protection system

WARNING

Risk of accident due to changed driving behaviour

If the value for the spring on the impact damage protection system is changed, the trigger moment of the impact damage protection system also changes. As a result, the impact damage protection system may trigger in the transport position in case of abrupt loads and the driving behaviour may change. This can lead to accidents.

„ Never change the value for the spring on the impact damage protection system.

The side mounted mowers are equipped with a so-called impact damage protection system in order to prevent damage when driving into obstacles. After the impact damage protection system has been triggered, the side mounted mower swivels back. Reversing the side mounted mower causes the impact damage protection system to engage again.

The trigger moment has been set at the factory.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 233

15 Settings

15.3

Settings on the side mounted mowers

1

X

BM000-335

Setting dimension for the spring (1) on the impact damage protection system:

X = 90 mm

15.3.10

Dismounting the bottom flap

With version "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood"

To prevent blockages in the feed channel chamber in rocky ground, the bottom flaps (1) can be dismounted.

234

BM000-226

Removal

ü The side mounted mowers are in transport position,

refer to page 87 .

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

„ Loosen the screw connections (2).

„ Open the bottom flap (1) and detach it upwards.

Store the dismounted bottom flaps in a safe place for later mounting.

Installation

ü The side mounted mowers are in transport position,

refer to page 87 .

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

„ Attach the bottom flap (1).

„ Close the bottom flap and tighten the screw connections (2).

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

16

Maintenance - General Information 16

Maintenance - General Information

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety instructions

If the relevant safety instructions are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ To avoid accidents, the relevant safety instructions must be read and observed,

refer to page 17 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

refer to page 31

.

WARNING

Risk of injury during trial run of the machine

If a trial run is conducted after repairs, maintenance, cleaning work or technical adjustments, the machine could respond unpredictably. As a result, people may be seriously injured or killed.

ü The machine is in working position.

„ Make certain there are no persons in the danger zone when the engine and mower drive start.

„ Start the trial run of the machine from the driver’s seat only.

NOTICE

Damage to the machine due to incorrectly performed or unfinished maintenance work

If maintenance work is not carried out by qualified personnel, the machine could be damaged.

A qualified service centre has the required technical knowledge, qualifications and tools to perform the required work on the machine in a proper manner. This applies in particular to safety-relevant work.

„ Always have the following work performed by a qualified specialist workshop:

- Safety-relevant work

- Service and maintenance work

-Repair work

- Modifications as well as installations and conversions

- Working on electronic parts

„ This chapter does not list all the necessary maintenance work of the engine. It is necessary to observe the maintenance instructions of engine manufacturer. The maintenance instructions are available at each qualified specialist workshop having access to the Workshop Information System (WIS) or after having participated in motor training at KRONE premises.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 235

16 Maintenance - General Information

16.1

Maintenance table

16.1

Maintenance table

16.1.1

Maintenance – Before the season

Hydraulic system

Check hydraulic tank oil level

Check hydraulic hoses

Gearbox oil level check

Input gearbox on front mounted mower

refer to page 332

Main gearbox on front mounted mower

refer to page 333

Main gearbox side mounted mower left/right

refer to page 334

Cutterbar

Transfer gearbox

Wheel hub gearbox front/rear

refer to page 296

refer to page 330

refer to page 335

Engine

If engine openings were covered, remove the covers

Change engine oil

Check coolant level

Check the coolant hoses for leaks

Clean/replace air filter

Check that detachable connecting elements

(screws, hose clamps, pipe connections, hoses) are tight and retighten if required

Mowing units

Check/change blades

Check/replace mowing discs/mower drum

Check/replace retaining bolts

Check guard cloths

Tighten screws / nuts

Vent friction clutch

refer to page 319

refer to page 322

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

refer to page 257 refer to page 257

refer to page 262

refer to page 258

refer to page 290

refer to page 294

refer to page 292

refer to page 301

refer to page 243

refer to page 302

Air conditioning/heating

Change receiver-dryer unit To be performed by an authorised technician only

Electrical system

Clean battery

refer to page 324

Check the charge state of the batteries and recharge, if required.

refer to page 324

Check the electrical connection cables and, if necessary, have them repaired or changed by a KRONE service partner

236

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Maintenance - General Information 16

Maintenance table 16.1

Wheels / tyres

Visually inspect tyres for cuts and breaks

Check tyre pressure

refer to page 273 refer to page 273

General maintenance work

Ensure that all bolts and cotter pins are mounted

Check all screws/nuts to make certain they are tight and retighten them, if necessary

Tighten the screw connections on the central support/chassis

refer to page 274

refer to page 308

Lubricate the machine according to the lubrication chart

Check the lighting

16.1.2

Maintenance – After the season

Rear axle for front wheel drive

Check hub bearings for wear and play To be performed by an authorised technician only,

refer to page 364

.

16.1.3

Maintenance - once after 1 hour

Tyres

Tighten the wheel nuts on front wheels/rear wheels

refer to page 274

16.1.4

Maintenance – 6 times after every 10 hours

Tyres

Tighten the wheel nuts on front wheels/rear wheels

refer to page 274

16.1.5

Maintenance - Once after 50 hours

Oil change in gearbox

Input gearbox on front mounted mower

refer to page 332

Main gearbox on front mounted mower

refer to page 333

Main gearbox side mounted mower left/right

refer to page 334

Wheel hub gearbox front/rear

Transfer gearbox

refer to page 335

refer to page 330

Exhaust aftertreatment system

Check that the tightening torque of the profile clamp is correct

General maintenance work

Re-adjust the transport lock

refer to page 261

refer to page 275

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 237

16 Maintenance - General Information

16.1

Maintenance table

16.1.6

Maintenance – Once after 500 hours

Engine

Check the intake and exhaust gas system for condition, attachment and leaks.

Electrical system

Check the batteries and cable connections.

Check the state of the sensors, actuators, cable holders and plugs.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

Oil change in gearbox

Wheel hub gearbox front/rear

refer to page 335

16.1.7

Maintenance – Once after 1,000 km

Rear axle for front wheel drive

Check hub bearings for wear and play To be performed by an authorised technician only,

refer to page 364

.

16.1.8

Maintenance – at the beginning of the cold season

Cooling system (engine)

Check corrosion and frost protection concentration in the coolant

refer to page 256

16.1.9

Maintenance - Every 10 hours, but at least once a day

Engine

Clean engine compartment

Check engine piping for leaks

Check engine oil level

refer to page 248

refer to page 258

refer to page 249

Fuel system (engine)

Check the water separator on the fuel prefilter and drain water if required.

Check fuel level

Check urea fill level

refer to page 251

refer to page 129

,

refer to page 252

refer to page 129

,

refer to page 254

Cooling system (engine)

Check coolant level

refer to page 257

Gearbox oil level check

Input gearbox on front mounted mower

Main gearbox on front mounted mower

refer to page 332

refer to page 333

Main gearbox side mounted mower left/right

refer to page 334

Cutterbar

refer to page 296

238

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Maintenance - General Information 16

Maintenance table 16.1

Mowing units

Check/change blades

Check/replace mowing discs/mower drum

Check/replace retaining bolts

Check guard cloths

Tighten screws / nuts

Cabin

Clean fresh air filter

Top up windscreen washer system

Check warning lights

Check lighting function

Air conditioning/heating

Clean capacitor

Central lubrication

Check filling level of reservoir

General maintenance work

Clean the entire machine

Check the fire extinguishers

Tyres

Visually check tyres for cuts and breaks

Exhaust aftertreatment system

Exhaust aftertreatment system visual inspection

Rear axle for front wheel drive

Check hub covers for damage and that they are secure

refer to page 290

refer to page 294

refer to page 292

refer to page 301

refer to page 243

refer to page 268

refer to page 264

refer to page 195

refer to page 78

refer to page 269

refer to page 317

refer to page 275

refer to page 273

refer to page 260

refer to page 271

16.1.10

Maintenance - Every 50 hours

Wheels / tyres

Retighten wheel nuts on the front/rear wheels

refer to page 274

Check tyre pressure

refer to page 273

Fuel system (engine)

Drain water and sediments in the fuel tank.

refer to page 250

Cooling system (engine)

Clean dust discharge valve of air filter

Cleaning air filter

refer to page 263

refer to page 262

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 239

16 Maintenance - General Information

16.1

Maintenance table

16.1.11

Maintenance - every 100 hours

Cabin

Clean circulation filter

refer to page 268

Air conditioning/heating

Check refrigerant condition and filling quantity

(dryer)

refer to page 267

General maintenance work

Perform manual lubrication according to lubrication chart

Universal shafts

Lubricate universal shafts

refer to page 305

refer to page 306

16.1.12

Maintenance - every 250 hours

Oil change in gearbox

Input gearbox on front mounted mower

Main gearbox on front mounted mower

refer to page 332

refer to page 333

Main gearbox side mounted mower left/right

refer to page 334

Drive belt

Check/adjust drive belt conditioner drive front mounted mower

Check/adjust drive belt auger drive

Check drive belt front mower

refer to page 271

,

refer to page 279

refer to page 271

,

refer to page 281

refer to page 271

Check drive belt side mounted mowers right/ left

Check/adjust cooler sieve belt

refer to page 271 refer to page 271

,

refer to page 273

Check/adjust drive belt fan drive and exhaust

refer to page 271

,

refer to page 272

Retighten screws

Check screws of the steering cylinder

Check screws of the axial track rods.

Air conditioning/heating

Check collector

Universal shafts

Lubricate universal shafts

refer to page 270

refer to page 266

refer to page 306

16.1.13

Maintenance - Every 500 hours

Hydraulic system

Change hydraulic oil in the hydraulic oil tank

refer to page 319

Change return suction filter

refer to page 321

Change high-pressure filter working hydraulics

refer to page 322

240

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Maintenance - General Information 16

Maintenance table 16.1

Engine

Check engine oil level.

Check engine piping for leaks, soiling and damage.

Check belt drive and change it if required

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

Fuel system (engine)

Drain condensation water from the fuel prefilter with water separator.

Change fuel prefilter with water separator

refer to page 251

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

refer to page 260

Check fuel lines for leaks

Check that detachable connecting elements

(screws, hose clamps, pipe connections, hoses) are tight

Exhaust aftertreatment system

Exhaust aftertreatment system visual inspection

Check that the tightening torque of the profile clamp is correct.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

Cooling system (engine)

Check coolant level To be performed by an authorised technician only.

Check engine piping for leaks, soiling and damage.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

Clean the dust discharge valve of the air filter.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

Electrical system

Check the state of the control unit bearing.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

Drive belt

Check the belt tension of all drive belts.

Cabin

Replace the fresh air filter.

Replace circulation filter.

Check the functions of the driver's seat.

Electrical system

Clean battery

Rear axle for front wheel drive

Check hub bearings for wear and play

refer to page 271

refer to page 268 refer to page 268

refer to page 155

refer to page 324

,

refer to page 278

To be performed by an authorised technician only,

refer to page 364

.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 241

16 Maintenance - General Information

16.1

Maintenance table

16.1.14

Maintenance - every 1,000 hours but at least at the end of the season

Oil change in gearbox

Input gearbox on front mounted mower

refer to page 332

Main gearbox on front mounted mower

refer to page 333

Main gearbox side mounted mower left/right

refer to page 334

Transfer gearbox

Cutterbar

Wheel hub gearbox front/rear

refer to page 330

refer to page 296

refer to page 335

Changing the filter

Transfer gearbox To be performed by an authorised technician only,

refer to page 365

.

Intermediate gear

Lubricate the intermediate gear

Engine

Check all lines, hoses and electric cables for chafe marks

Check engine piping for leaks, soiling and damage.

Check belt drive and change it if required

Check the intake and exhaust gas system for condition, attachment and leaks.

Check that engine mount and diesel engine brackets are tight.

Fuel system (engine)

Replace the fuel prefilter.

refer to page 307

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

Replace the fuel fine filter.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

Cooling system (engine)

Clean/replace air filter

Electrical system

Check the batteries and cable connections.

refer to page 262

Check the state of the sensors, actuators, cable holders and plugs.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

16.1.15

Maintenance – Every 1,000 hours, but at least before the season

Engine

Change engine oil

Change the engine oil filter

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

242

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Maintenance - General Information 16

Tightening torques 16.2

16.1.16

Maintenance – Every 2,000 hours

Engine

Check all lines, hoses and electric cables for chafe marks

Check engine piping for leaks, soiling and damage.

Check belt drive and change it if required

Check the intake and exhaust gas system for condition, attachment and leaks.

Check that engine mount and diesel engine brackets are tight.

Replace the oil separator filter element

Check/adjust valve play

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

Cooling system (engine)

Check corrosion and frost protection concentration in the coolant.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

16.1.17

Maintenance – Every 2 years

Cooling system (engine)

Change coolant To be performed by an authorised technician only,

refer to page 365

.

16.1.18

Maintenance - as required

Electrical system

Clean battery

Cooling system (engine)

Change air filter main element (according to maintenance display / annually).

Change air filter safety element (with every

3rd change of the main element / annually).

refer to page 324

Fuel system (engine)

Vent the fuel system (do not detach the injection lines)

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

To be performed by an authorised technician only.

16.2

Tightening torques

Metric thread screws with control thread

INFORMATION

The table does not apply to countersunk screws with hexagon socket in case the countersunk screw is tightened via hexagon socket.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 243

16 Maintenance - General Information

16.2

Tightening torques

M16

M20

M22

M24

M27

M30

M4

M5

M6

M8

M10

M12

M14

DV000-001

X Thread size

X Strength class

5.6

8.8

Tightening torque (Nm)

3.0

5.9

10

29

42

25

49

85

135

210

425

571

730

1,100

1,450

1 Strength class on screw head

10.9

310

610

832

1,050

1,550

2,100

4.4

8.7

15

36

72

125

200

12.9

365

710

972

1,220

1,800

2,450

5.1

10

18

43

84

145

235

Metric thread screws with fine thread

244

DV000-001

X Thread size 1 Strength class on screw head

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Maintenance - General Information 16

Tightening torques 16.2

X

M12 x 1.5

M14 x 1.5

M16 x 1.5

M18 x 1.5

M20 x 1.5

M24 x 2

M27 x 2

M30 x 1.5

Strength class

5.6

8.8

Tightening torque (Nm)

88

145

222

368

465

787

1,148

800

10.9

130

213

327

525

662

1,121

1,635

2,100

Metric thread screws with countersunk head and hexagon socket

INFORMATION

The table applies only to countersunk screws with hexagon socket and metric thread tightened via hexagon socket.

12.9

152

249

382

614

775

1,312

1,914

2,650

M4

M5

M6

M8

M10

M12

M14

M16

M20

DV000-000

X Thread size

X Strength class

5.6

8.8

Tightening torque (Nm)

2.5

4.7

8

23

34

20

39

68

108

168

340

1 Strength class on screw head

10.9

3.5

7

12

29

58

100

160

248

488

12.9

4.1

8

15

35

67

116

188

292

568

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 245

16 Maintenance - General Information

16.2

Tightening torques

Locking screws on the gearboxes

INFORMATION

The tightening torques only apply to assembly of locking screws, viewing glasses, ventilation and breather filters and bleed valves in gearboxes with cast housings or aluminium or steel housings. The term “locking screw” includes the drain plug, the inspection screw as well as the ventilation and breather filters.

This table applies only to locking screws with external hexagon in connection with copper seal ring and for bleed valves made of brass with shaped seal ring.

Thread

M10x1

M12x1.5

G1/4“

M14x1.5

M16x1.5

45

M18x1.5

50

M20x1.5

Locking screw and sight glass with copper ring 1

Bleed valve made of brass

Ventilation/breather filter made of steel

Steel and cast Aluminium

Ventilation/breather filter made of brass

Steel and cast

Maximum tightening torque (Nm) (±10%)

Aluminium

8

14

14

40

45

16

24

30

32

24

30

G1/2“

M22x1.5

M24x1.5

G3/4“

M33x2

G1“

M42x1.5

G1 1/4“

32

35

60

60

80

80

100

100

1  Always replace copper rings.

246

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

17

Maintenance - Engine 17

Maintenance - Engine

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety instructions

If the relevant safety instructions are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ To avoid accidents, the relevant safety instructions must be read and observed,

refer to page 17 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

refer to page 31

.

WARNING

Danger to health from dust from the damaged catalytic converter of the exhaust aftertreatment system

If the catalytic converter of the exhaust aftertreatment system is damaged, there is a risk to health from inhaling the emerging dust or insulation material.

„ If the catalytic converter of the exhaust aftertreatment system is damaged, ensure that nobody inhales dusts from inside the catalytic converter or insulation.

NOTICE

Damage to the machine due to incorrectly performed or unfinished maintenance work

If maintenance work is not carried out by qualified personnel, the machine could be damaged.

A qualified service centre has the required technical knowledge, qualifications and tools to perform the required work on the machine in a proper manner. This applies in particular to safety-relevant work.

„ Always have the following work performed by a qualified specialist workshop:

- Safety-relevant work

- Service and maintenance work

-Repair work

- Modifications as well as installations and conversions

- Working on electronic parts

„ This chapter does not list all the necessary maintenance work of the engine. It is necessary to observe the maintenance instructions of engine manufacturer. The maintenance instructions are available at each qualified specialist workshop having access to the Workshop Information System (WIS) or after having participated in motor training at KRONE premises.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 247

17 Maintenance - Engine

17.1

Engine overview

17.1

Engine overview

1

17.2

2 3

4

5

8

6

7

9

BMG000-050

1 Oil filter

2 Exhaust gas turbocharger

3 Oil sump

4 Catalytic converter

5 Engine control

6

7

8

9

Refrigerant compressor

Alternator

Oil filler neck

Oil dipstick

Dirt deposits in engine compartment

WARNING

Risk of fire due to dirt deposits in the engine compartment

A mixture of dust, oil and plant residue inside the engine compartment is a source of fire and presents an increased fire hazard.

„ Always keep the engine compartment clean.

17.2.1

Cleaning engine compartment with compressed air

WARNING

Eye damage caused by flying dirt particles!

When cleaning the machine with compressed air or with high-pressure cleaner, the dirt particles are slung away at high speed. The dirt particles may hit the eyes and hurt them.

„ Keep persons away from working range.

„ When performing cleaning work with compressed air or with high-pressure cleaner, wear suitable working clothes (for example eye protection).

„ If necessary, blow away the dirt and contamination and wipe off oil deposits.

248

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

17.3

Maintenance - Engine 17

Engine oil level 17.3

Engine oil level

NOTICE

Engine damage due to excessively low or high oil level

If the oil level is too low, the amount of oil in the engine is too low, the lubrication points in the engine are not adequately supplied and there is a risk of engine damage. If the oil level is too high, the engine or the exhaust gas aftertreatment system may be damaged.

„ Check oil level according to the engine maintenance table,

refer to page 236 .

„ Check oil level only when machine is in a horizontal position.

„ Do not start the engine if the oil level is below the bottom mark (min. mark) of the oil dipstick.

„ Drain or extract oil which has been topped up too much.

17.3.1

Checking engine oil level

1 max.

min.

BXG000-029

The oil dipstick is on the left-hand side of the machine.

ü The left side mounted mower is folded out.,

refer to page 87 .

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

ü The main frame of the machine is aligned horizontally.

ü The diesel engine has cooled off to the ambient temperature.

„ Thoroughly clean the area around the oil dipstick (1).

„ Pull out the oil dipstick (1), wipe it off with a clean cloth and reinsert it up to the stop.

„ Pull out the oil dipstick (1) and identify the engine oil level.

ð When the engine oil level is between "min" and "max", the oil level is correct.

„ Reinsert the oil dipstick (1).

ð If the engine oil level is above the "max" marking:

„ Contact your KRONE service partner.

ð If the engine oil level is below the "min" marking:

„

Top up the engine oil, refer to page 250

.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 249

17 Maintenance - Engine

17.4

Cleaning fuel tank

17.3.2

Topping up engine oil

1

17.4

max.

min.

BMG000-052

The oil filling pipe is on the left-hand side of the machine.

ü The left side mounted mower is folded out.,

refer to page 87 .

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

ü The main frame of the machine is aligned horizontally.

ü The diesel engine has cooled off to the ambient temperature.

„ Clean around the locking cover (1).

„ Unscrew the locking cover (1).

„ NOTICE! Only engine oils that are approved by the engine manufacturer may be used,

refer to page 64 .

„ Top up the engine oil via the oil filler neck up to the "max." mark on the oil dipstick.

„ Clean the locking cover (1), set it in place and tighten it.

„ Start the diesel engine, run at idle speed and check the oil pressure.

„ Switch off the diesel engine.

„

After 2-3 minutes check the engine oil level, refer to page 249

.

Cleaning fuel tank

Draining water and sediment

250

BMG000-027

ü Run the fuel tank as close as possible to empty.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

„ Provide a sufficiently large container for the fuel.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

17.5

Maintenance - Engine 17

Fuel prefilter/water separator 17.5

The drain sleeve is located in the direction of travel at the front right underneath the machine.

„ Unscrew the locking cap on the discharge neck (1).

„ Take the hose included with delivery out of the rear storage compartment and screw it onto the discharge neck (1).

ð The collected water sediment and fuel flow out of the fuel tank.

„ Remove the hose and close the discharge neck (1) with the locking cap.

„

Fill the machine with fuel, refer to page 252 .

„ If necessary vent the fuel system,

refer to page 255 .

Fuel prefilter/water separator

BXG000-030

The fuel prefilter is located on the left-hand machine side behind the maintenance flap.

Drain condensation water from the water separator of the fuel prefilter.

ü The left side mounted mower is folded out.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

ü The maintenance flap is open.

ü A sufficiently large collecting vessel is on hand.

„ Check whether condensation water has collected in the sight glass of the water separator (2).

ð No condensation water has collected:

„ No further measures are necessary.

ð Condensation water has collected:

„ „Place the collecting vessel under the drain hose of the water separator (2).

„ Loosen the bleed screw (1) two counterclockwise turns.

„ To open the stop cock (4), press the handle (3) while simultaneously turning it 90° counterclockwise.

Æ The collected condensation water runs out of the water separator.

„ To close the stop cock (4), turn the handle (3) 90° clockwise. The handle (3) engages independently.

„ Tighten the bleed screw (1) to a tightening torque of 6 Nm.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 251

17 Maintenance - Engine

17.6

Refuelling

17.6

Refuelling

NOTICE

Machine damage due to use of unauthorised or contaminated fuel.

If refuelling with unauthorised or contaminated fuel or with fuel which has a high sulphur content, the engine and the exhaust gas after-treatment system will be damaged.

„ Refuel only with standard, sulphur-free diesel fuel, according to EN 590.

„ Do not refuel with contaminated fuel.

„ Observe the operating instructions of engine manufacturer, chapter “Refuelling”.

„ Do not use the following fuels:

- Fuels containing more than 0.005% (50ppm) sulphur

- Marine diesel fuel

- Aviation turbine fuel

- Heating oil

- Fatty acid methyl ester FAME (bio-diesel fuels)

NOTICE

Machine damage by water in the fuel

If the machine is parked with tank unfilled, condensation water may form and when it is cold, freezing could result.

„ Refuel daily at the end of operation.

252

BMG000-009

Filling quantity: refer to page 64

.

„ Follow the instructions in the following, supplied document: Engine operating instructions, chapter entitled Lubricants and consumables.

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 31 .

„ Fold open the flap (1).

„ Clean around the filler neck (3).

„ Unscrew the tank cap (2).

„ Fill the fuel tank with fuel.

„ Close the tank cap (2) tight.

„ Fold down the flap (1).

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

17.7

Maintenance - Engine 17

Urea filter 17.7

Urea filter

CAUTION

Risk of injury from escaping ammonia vapours!

If the urea tank cap is opened at high temperatures, ammonia vapours may escape. Ammonia vapours have a pungent smell and irritate in particular:

- Skin

- Mucous membranes

- Eyes.

This can lead to burning of the eyes, nose and throat as well as irritation of the throat and tearing eyes.

„ Do not inhale ammonia vapours.

CAUTION

Risk of injury from contact with urea solution

The urea solution must not come in contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.

„ If urea solution comes into contact with the eyes or skin, immediately rinse off with plenty of clear water.

„ If urea solution is swallowed, rinse out the mouth immediately with plenty of clear water and drink a lot of water.

„ If urea solution soils clothing, immediately change clothing.

„ If allergic reactions occur, consult a doctor immediately.

„ Keep children away from the urea solution.

The exhaust aftertreatment system is equipped with a maintenance-free filter.

BM000-201

The urea filter (1) is integrated in a fixed position in the extraction module (2).

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 253

17 Maintenance - Engine

17.8

Topping up urea solution

17.8

Topping up urea solution

CAUTION

Risk of injury from contact with urea solution

The urea solution must not come in contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.

„ If urea solution comes into contact with the eyes or skin, immediately rinse off with plenty of clear water.

„ If urea solution is swallowed, rinse out the mouth immediately with plenty of clear water and drink a lot of water.

„ If urea solution soils clothing, immediately change clothing.

„ If allergic reactions occur, consult a doctor immediately.

„ Keep children away from the urea solution.

CAUTION

Risk of injury from escaping ammonia vapours!

If the urea tank cap is opened at high temperatures, ammonia vapours may escape. Ammonia vapours have a pungent smell and irritate in particular:

- Skin

- Mucous membranes

- Eyes.

This can lead to burning of the eyes, nose and throat as well as irritation of the throat and tearing eyes.

„ Do not inhale ammonia vapours.

NOTICE

Damage to the machine due to incorrect handling of the urea solution

The machine or the exhaust aftertreatment system could be damaged due to incorrect handling of the urea solution.

„ Use only urea solution according to DIN 70070 /I SO 22241.

„ To prevent damage to the urea tank at very low temperatures, do not overfill the urea tank.

„ To prevent damage to the exhaust gas after-treatment system due to contaminants, seal the tank properly.

„ To prevent damage to the exhaust gas after-treatment system, the urea solution must not be mixed with additives or diluted with tap water.

254

BMG000-008

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

17.9

Maintenance - Engine 17

Vent fuel filter 17.9

Filling quantity: refer to page 64

„ Follow the instructions in the following, supplied document: Engine operating instructions, chapter entitled Lubricants and consumables.

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 31

.

„ Fold open the flap (1).

„ Clean around the filler neck (3).

„ Unscrew the tank cap (2).

„ Fill the urea tank with urea solution until the pump nozzle switches off.

„ Close the tank cap (2) tight.

„ Fold down the flap (1).

Vent fuel filter

BXG000-031

It may be necessary to vent the fuel filter

• after the filter element on the fuel prefilter was changed

• after prolonged machine standstill

• after filling the previously drained fuel system

• after initial operation

The vent the fuel filter:

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

„ Follow the instructions in the following, supplied document: Engine operating instructions, section "Venting the fuel system".

„ Turn the red locking (2) of the pump 90° counterclockwise.

„ Activate the pump by making pumping movements with the knob (1) until the fuel system is completely vented.

„ To end the venting process and start the diesel engine, turn the lock (2) of the pump 90° clockwise.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 255

17 Maintenance - Engine

17.10 Engine coolant

INFORMATION

The low-pressure circuit of the diesel engine is vented by permanently installed throttle bores, no additional measures are necessary.

„ Start the diesel engine.

ð If the engine fails to start after 20 seconds.

„ Take a 1-minute break.

ð If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts:

„ Repeat the venting procedure.

17.10

Engine coolant

NOTICE

Damage to the cooling system by using incorrect coolant

If a mixture of coolant containing silicate and a silicate-free coolant is used, this may cause damage to the cooling system of the diesel engine.

„ Never use a mixture of coolant containing silicate and a silicate-free coolant as an engine coolant.

The engine cooling system has been filled with coolant at the factory that ensures frost protection, corrosion protection and further protective effects.

The engine coolant is a mixture of water, anti-corrosion agent and frost protection agent.

The engine coolant has the following properties:

• Heat transfer

• Corrosion protection

• Cavitation protection (protection against pitting)

• Frost protection

• Increase in the boiling point

The engine coolant must remain in the engine cooling system irrespective of the time of year, even in countries which have high outdoor temperatures.

When replacing engine coolant, ensure that

„ The coolant meets the requirements of at least the following specification: LH-01-COL3A.

The engine manufacturer recommends using the anti-corrosion antifreeze Liebherr

Antifreeze OS Concentrate or Liebherr-Antifreeze OS Mix (ready-to-use mixture of 50% water and 50% anti-corrosion antifreeze).

„ that the water which is used meets the requirements of the Drinking Water Guideline of the

World Health Organisation (WHO) of 2006.

„ the engine coolant contains 50% vol. anti-corrosion agent and frost protection agent. This is equivalent to frost protection down to -37° C.

„ the percentage of anti-corrosion agent and frost protection agent in the engine coolant does not exceed 55% vol. This is equivalent to frost protection down to -45° C. Otherwise, the frost protection and the heat supply will deteriorate.

„ the engine coolant is not mixed with a different anti-corrosion agent and frost protection agent.

„ a low coolant level is not topped up not only with water, but also with the correct percentage of an approved anti-corrosion agent and frost protection agent.

256

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Maintenance - Engine 17

Checking the engine coolant level 17.11

17.11

Checking the engine coolant level

WARNING

Risk of fire from frost protection agent

If frost protection agent comes into contact with hot components in the warm engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injuries.

„ Leave the engine to cool down before filling with anti-freeze.

„ Keep anti-freeze away from the filler neck.

„ Before starting the engine, thoroughly clean components contaminated with frost protection agent.

WARNING

Danger of injury due to scalding

The engine cooling system is under pressure, especially when the engine is warm. If the cover is opened when the engine is warm, hot coolant may spray out. There is risk of injury.

„ Leave the engine to cool down before opening the cover.

„ When opening the cover, wear suitable gloves and goggles.

„ To relieve the pressure, open the cover by a half turn.

BXG000-032

The coolant compensation tank (1) for the engine coolant is located above the cooling system in the rear of the machine and is accessible from outside.

„ Check the coolant level in the coolant compensation tank (1) in the viewing pane (2).

ð The coolant level must reach up to the middle of the viewing pane (2); refill coolant if necessary.

Topping up the engine coolant

Filling quantity: refer to page 64

Follow the instructions in the following, supplied document: Engine operating instructions, chapter Consumables "Coolant".

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 257

17 Maintenance - Engine

17.12 Checking engine piping

Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 31

.

„ Turn the locking cover (3) on the filler neck of the coolant compensation tank (1) to the right catch point and allow residual pressure to escape slowly.

„ Fully open the locking cover (3) and remove it.

„ Fill with coolant up to the middle of the viewing pane (2).

„ Set the locking cover (3) in place on the filler neck of the coolant compensation tank and close it.

17.12

Checking engine piping

17.12.1

Checking pipework in the air conditioning and heating system

258

BM000-168

„ Check all lines, hoses and sleeves for leaks and condition and replace if required.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Maintenance - Engine 17

Checking engine piping 17.12

17.12.2

Check pipework of the engine cooling system and the charge air

BMG000-048

„ Check all lines, hoses and sleeves for leaks and condition and replace if required.

17.12.3

Checking pipework of the air intake

BM000-164

„ Check all lines, hoses and sleeves for leaks and condition and replace if required.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 259

17 Maintenance - Engine

17.12 Checking engine piping

17.12.4

Checking fuel lines

BM000-165

„ Check all lines, hoses and sleeves for leaks and condition and replace if required.

17.12.5

Check pipework of the exhaust aftertreatment system

260

BM000-167

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Maintenance - Engine 17

Checking engine piping 17.12

BM000-166

„ Check all lines, hoses and sleeves for leaks and condition and replace if required.

„ Tighten the union nuts on the air lines to a maximum tightening torque M

A

= 15 Nm.

17.12.6

Checking the profile clamp of the catalytic converter

BMG000-051

ü The right side mounted mower is folded out.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

ü The side hood on the right is open.

ü The exhaust system has cooled down to the ambient temperature.

„ Tighten the profile clamp (1) with a tightening torque of M

A

=9 +2/-1 Nm.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 261

17 Maintenance - Engine

17.13 Cleaning air filter

17.13

Cleaning air filter

NOTICE

Engine damage caused by dirty or damaged air filter or safety cartridge

If the machine is operated with a soiled or damaged air filter or safety cartridge, the diesel engine may be damaged.

„ Clean or replace the air filter and the safety cartridge according to the maintenance table,

refer to page 236 .

„ Immediately replace a damaged air filter or a damaged safety cartridge.

„ Do not clean and reuse the safety cartridge but always replace it by a new one.

1

2 3

5

4

BMG000-010

Interval for testing and changing:

refer to page 236

.

„

„Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 31

.

„ Release the clamps (2) and remove the cover (1).

„ By gently turning the filter element (3), carefully pull it out of the filter housing (4).

„ Clean the interior area and the sealing surfaces of the filter housing (4).

„ Blow out the filter element (3) with compressed air (max. 5 bar) from the inside to the outside.

If the filter element is excessively soiled or damaged, replace the filter element. If the installation date of the filter element is 4 years old, replace the filter element.

„ Install the cleaned or a new filter element (3).

„ Attach the lid (1) so that the dust discharge valve (5) is pointed downwards.

„ Secure the cover (1) with the clamps (2).

262

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Cleaning dust discharge valve

Maintenance - Engine 17

Cleaning air filter 17.13

BM000-170

ü The left side mounted mower is folded down.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

ü The left side hood is open.

„ Remove the rubber grommet of the dust discharge valve (1) and clean it.

„ Clean the connector for the rubber grommet.

„ Slide on the rubber grommet completely.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 263

18 Maintenance – Basic Machine

18.1

Checking/refilling windscreen washer system

18 Maintenance – Basic Machine

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety instructions

If the relevant safety instructions are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ To avoid accidents, the relevant safety instructions must be read and observed,

refer to page 17 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

refer to page 31

.

18.1

Checking/refilling windscreen washer system

264

BMG000-012

The reservoir (2) for the windscreen washer system is behind the fresh water tank (1) in the storage compartment above the right front wheel. The orifice for refilling is on the rear wall of the storage compartment and is closed by a cover sheet (4).

„ Check the level of the windscreen washer system daily.

If the cleaning fluid can be seen in the reservoir, the fluid level is correct.

If no cleaning fluid can be seen in the reservoir, refill:

„ To refill the cleaning fluid, swivel the cover sheet (4) to the side.

„ Open the cover (3) and add cleaning fluid.

„ Close the cover (3).

„ Swivel back the cover sheet (4) and close the orifice.

INFORMATION

„ To achieve a better cleaning effect under extreme crop and road conditions, add windscreen cleaner/anti-freeze.

„ In winter drain the washer system or fill with special anti-freeze.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

18.2

Maintenance – Basic Machine 18

Maintaining air conditioning and heating 18.2

Maintaining air conditioning and heating

WARNING

Risk of injury from touching refrigerant

During repair, upkeep, maintenance and cleaning work on the refrigerant circuit, refrigerant may be emitted; refrigerant may be emitted in liquid or gaseous form and is hazardous to people and the environment.

„ Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key and take it with you.

„ Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back.

„ Take suitable protective measures (for example wear protective goggles and protective gloves).

„ Repair, upkeep, maintenance and cleaning work must be carried out only by authorised specialists.

„ If the refrigerant causes burns, always consult a doctor and take the refrigerant data sheet

R 134a (excerpt) with you,

refer to page 67 .

„ Ensure sufficient ventilation when working on the cooling system.

„ During refill and repair work do not allow refrigerants to escape; dispose of them into a recycling container.

„ Spare parts that are used must correspond to the technical requirements of the machine manufacturer. For this reason, use KRONE original spare parts only.

„ Extreme caution is advised when welding close to the air conditioning system.

NOTICE

Environmental damage due to chemicals

The air conditioning is operated with refrigerant R134a (tetrafluorethane). This substance contains no chlorine atoms, and thus is not harmful to the ozone in the atmosphere of the world. Nonetheless, the refrigerant must not be drained; it must be collected at a recycling plant.

„ Collect the refrigerant with a recycling plant.

„ Thus do NOT separate the connecting pipes beforehand.

„ Have all maintenance and repair work on the air conditioning carried out only by your

KRONE dealer with a suitable disposal and recycling equipment.

18.2.1

Components of air conditioning

The air conditioning components and their position in the machine.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 265

18 Maintenance – Basic Machine

18.2

Maintaining air conditioning and heating

BM000-271

1 Control panel for automatic climate control

2 Evaporator

3 Expansion valve

4 Capacitor

5 Dryer/receiver

6 Pressure switch

7 Compressor

18.2.2

Carrying out a visual inspection at the receiver/dryer

266

BMG000-018

The receiver (2) with pressure switch (1) is located on the left behind the tailgate.

As the receiver (2) is pressurised, it is subject to the pressurised container regulations during production and testing. According to this regulation the pressurised tank is classified as test group II in accordance with the permissible overpressure p in bar, the volume l in litres and the pressure product p x l.

According to Section 10 of the Pressurised Vessel Regulations these pressurised containers must be subjected to recurring tests by an expert in accordance with section 32. In this case the recurring tests consist, as a rule, of external inspections of tanks in use. In combination with the inspection the receiver (2) must be visually inspected twice a year. Special attention shall be given to corrosion and mechanical damage. If the container is not in a correct state, it must be

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Maintenance – Basic Machine 18

Maintaining air conditioning and heating 18.2

replaced by a qualified service centre for safety reasons to ensure sufficient protection to the user and third parties due to the hazard which may be caused in handling or operating pressurised containers.

INFORMATION

The ambient temperature must exceed the temperature set at the thermostat (generally

+1°Celsius) for the compressor to switch on.

18.2.3

Checking the condition and filling quantity of refrigerant

Regularly check the dryer/receiver unit and replace it when required, but at least once a year.

BX001-239

Check the filling quantity

Interval for checking refrigerant level: refer to page 236

The amount of refrigerant is checked on the sight glass (2) via the white float (5).

„ Start the engine.

„ Switch on the air conditioning and set to maximum cooling.

If the white float (5) is at the top, the refrigerant level is correct.

If the white float (5) is at the bottom, the refrigerant must be topped up by a qualified service

centre, filling quantity refer to page 67

.

Checking the refrigerant condition

Checking the interval for refrigerant condition:

refer to page 236

.

„ Observe the label (4) on the dryer (1).

If the indicator perl (3) is orange, the refrigerant condition is OK.

If the indicator perl (3) has turned colourless, the dryer/receiver unit must be changed by a specialist workshop.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 267

18 Maintenance – Basic Machine

18.2

Maintaining air conditioning and heating

18.2.4

Replacing/cleaning fresh air filter

18.2.5

BX001-240

INFORMATION

If filters are not properly maintained, the fresh air filter may become very soiled and it can no longer be guaranteed that adequate fresh air will flow into the cab.

A fresh air filter (4) in the form of a wedge filter is located in the upper cab area behind the ventilation grid (2) on the left hand side in direction of travel. The fresh air filter protects the driver in the cab against airborne contamination outside the cab. Always check the fresh air filter before starting to drive the machine.

„ Open the closing device (1) by turning it 90° clockwise and remove the ventilation grid (2).

„ To unlock the filter, reverse the locking lever (3) to the left.

„ Pull out the fresh air filter (4), check for soiling and clean if required.

Clean fresh air filter (4) by shaking it out, never use compressed air to clean it. If heavily soiled, replace the fresh air filter (4).

„ Reinsert the fresh air filter (4).

„ Lock fresh air filter by means of locking lever (3).

„ Insert the ventilation grid (3) and close it via the closing device (1).

Replacing/cleaning circulation filter

BMG000-019

268

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

18.3

Maintenance – Basic Machine 18

Cleaning cooler and cooler compartment 18.3

INFORMATION

If the filters are not adequately maintained, the circulation filter may become heavily soiled and cause a reduction in the output of the air conditioning and the heating.

„ To clean the circulation filter, loosen the screws (2) and remove the ventilation grid (1) together with the filter element.

„ Clean filter element with compressed air and replace it, if necessary.

„ Mount the ventilation grid (1) together with the filter element, ensuring that the filter element is correctly inserted.

„ Press in the screws (2).

Cleaning cooler and cooler compartment

BM000-115

The rotating screen, capacitor battery, combination cooler (charge air, coolant and oil) and diesel cooler are located behind the tailgate in the cooler compartment.

„ Open the tailgate (1).

„ Every day remove dirt from around the area of the cooler and clean the ambient area to prevent the risk of fire and wipe off any oil residue.

„ If there is a large accumulation of dust and if the crops are very dry, clean the above locations more frequently.

2

3

4

1

BXG000-033

Preferably clean the cooler and the capacitor while the engine is cold.

ü The tailgate is open.

„ Open the seal (1) on the rotating screen frame (4) and swing up the rotating screen.

„ Loosen the locking on the capacitor (3) and rotate the capacitor to the side.

„ Clean the cooler (2) and the cooler compartment with compressed air. Ensure that the blades are not damaged.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 269

18 Maintenance – Basic Machine

18.4

Maintaining chassis

„ Blow through the condenser block with compressed air from the inside to the outside without damaging the fins.

„ Swivel back the capacitor and secure it.

„ Close the rotating screen frame (4).

„ Close the tailgate.

18.4

18.4.1

Maintaining chassis

Checking attachment of steering cylinder

18.4.2

BMG000-021

Check the screws of steering cylinder with the following tightening torques:

„ The screws (1) of the steering cylinder are mounted to a tightening torque of 730 Nm.

Checking fitting of track rod

270

BMG000-020

Check the screw of track rod with the following tightening torques:

„ The axial ball joint (1) is mounted with a tightening torque of 550 Nm on the piston rod of the steering cylinder.

„ The clamping screw (2) of the track rod is mounted with a tightening torque of 70 +20 Nm.

„ The castle nut (3) of the track rod head is mounted with a tightening torque of 450 +50 Nm and secured by means of a cotter pin.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

18.4.3

Maintenance – Basic Machine 18

Maintaining belt drives 18.5

Checking the hub cover of the rear axle, with front wheel drive version

18.5

BM000-270

Check the hub covers (1) for damage and tight fit:

„ Replace lost or worn hub covers (1) immediately to prevent dirt entering the interior of the hub and damaging the bearing.

If a hub cover is missing or if a hub cover is dismounted, the seal must be replaced before a new installation.

Check the screws of the hub covers:

„

Shut down and secure the machine, refer to page 31

.

„ Make sure the hub covers have been mounted correctly and are in a perfect state.

„ Check the screws of the hub cover for tight fit.

Maintaining belt drives

18.5.1

Checking kraftband

INFORMATION

If worn or soiled, the complete power transmission of the kraftband and pulley is not guaranteed.

„ Visually check each kraftband of the belt drives inside and outside for wear and damage

(e.g. cracks, rocks) and replace, if necessary.

„ Check each kraftband for soiling (oil, grease) and clean or replace it, if necessary.

18.5.2

Checking pulley

BX001-249

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 271

18 Maintenance – Basic Machine

18.5

Maintaining belt drives

INFORMATION

If worn or soiled, the complete power transmission of the kraftband and pulley is not guaranteed.

„ Check the edges of the pulley (1) for wear and, if required, have them replaced by your

KRONE service partner.

„ Check the pulley (1) for damage and replace if required.

„ Check the pulley (1) for soiling (oil, grease) and clean if required.

18.5.3

Checking the belt tension

Checking/setting belt tension of fan drive and exhaust fan

6

1 2 3

4

5

BM000-138

„ Swing up the left side hood.

„ Check whether the pretension angle is 20°.

ð If the arrow (6) points to 20° on the pretensioning scale (1) the belt tension is set correctly.

ð If the arrow (6) does not point to 20° on the pretensioning scale (1) the belt tension must be set.

„ To set the belt tension, undo the retaining screw (3) on the tensioner housing (2) and undo the nuts (4) on the quick clamp device (5).

„ To rotate the tensioner housing (2) turn the quick clamp device (5) until the arrow (6) displays a pretension angle of 20° on the twist scale (1).

„ Tighten the retaining screw (3) and the nuts (4).

„ Close the left side hood.

272

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Maintenance – Basic Machine 18

Maintaining tyres and wheels 18.6

Checking/setting belt tension of rotating screen drive

1

2

3

4

BM000-140

„ Swivel open the tailgate.

„ Check whether the pretension angle is 20°.

ð If the arrow points to (2) 20° on the twist scale (1), the belt tension is set correctly.

ð If the arrow (2) does not point to 20° on the twist scale (1), the belt tension must be set.

„ Undo the screw slightly (4) to set the belt tension.

„ Use a key (WAF 55) to turn the tensioner housing (3) anti-clockwise until the arrow (2) displays a pretension angle of 20° on the scale of the twist angle (1).

„ Tighten the screw (4).

„ Close the tailgate.

Maintaining tyres and wheels 18.6

18.6.1

Checking/maintaining tyres

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

Inspect the tyres visually

„ Visually inspect tyres for cuts or breaks.

Æ If there are cuts or breaks in the tyres, have the tyres repaired or replaced by a KRONE service partner.

Maintenance intervals for visual inspection of the tyres,

refer to page 236 .

Checking/adapting the tyre pressure

„

Check the tyre pressure, refer to page 68

.

Æ If the tyre pressure is too high, deflate air.

Æ If the tyre pressure is too low, increase the tyre pressure.

Check the maintenance intervals for tyre pressure, refer to page 236 .

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 273

18 Maintenance – Basic Machine

18.7

Tighten the screw connections on the central support/chassis

18.6.2

Retighten wheel nuts

18.7

BM000-125

Front axle Rear axle

„ Retighten the nuts for attaching the wheels in the illustrated sequence.

„ Retighten the nuts on the front and rear axle to 630 Nm.

Intervals at which the nuts on the wheels must be tightened,

refer to page 236

.

Tighten the screw connections on the central support/chassis

1

2

2

1

BM000-336

„ Carry out the steps on the right-hand and left-hand side of the machine:

„ Tighten the screw connections (M 20 x 1.5) (2).

„ Tighten the screw connections (M16) (1).

274

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Maintenance – Basic Machine 18

Re-adjust the transport lock 18.8

18.8

Re-adjust the transport lock

1

18.9

2 3

1

BM000-349

ü

The side mounted mowers are in working position, refer to page 87

.

ü

The machine is shut down and secured, refer to page 31

.

„

For the maintenance interval, refer to page 236 .

„ The following steps have to be carried out on the left- and right-hand side of the machine:

„ Loosen the 6 screws at the transport lock (1).

„ Hand-tighten the screws (2, 3).

„ Centrally align the transport lock (1).

„ Fold up the side mounted mowers in transport position,

refer to page 87 .

„ Fold in the side mounted mower in working position,

refer to page 87 .

„

„Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 31

.

„ Press the aligned transport lock (1) down as far as it will go. Be sure to avoid lateral shifting of the transport lock (1).

„ Tighten the 6 screws at the transport lock (1).

Checking the fire extinguisher

BPG000-034

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

„ Ensure that the fire extinguisher (1) is mounted on the machine.

„ Ensure that access to and view of the fire extinguisher (1) are not obstructed.

„ Ensure that the fire extinguisher (1) is filled by weighing the fire extinguisher (1).

„ Ensure that the seal on the extinguishing head and the security seal are neither defective nor missing.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 275

18 Maintenance – Basic Machine

18.9

Checking the fire extinguisher

„ Ensure that the operating instructions on the type plate of the fire extinguisher (1) are legible and face outwards.

„ Check the fire extinguisher for visible material damage, corrosion, leakage, a clogged hose and/or nozzle.

„ Ensure that the pressure gauge pointer indicates the green area.

276

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

19

19.1

Maintenance – mowing units 19

Dismounting/mounting the conditioner drive guard 19.1

Maintenance – mowing units

Dismounting/mounting the conditioner drive guard

19.2

KM000-387

ü

The machine is in the working position, refer to page 87

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

Dismounting

„ Release the locking screw (2) and remove the guard (1).

Mounting

„ Mount the guard (1) and lock the locking screw (2).

Dismounting/mounting the guard for the front mounted mower input gearbox

2

1

2

BMG000-031

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

ü

The machine is in the working position, refer to page 87

.

Dismounting

„ Remove the hexagon head screws (2).

„ Remove the guard (1) and store it in a secure place.

Mounting

„ Put on the guard (1) in place and secure with the hexagon head screws (2).

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 277

19 Maintenance – mowing units

19.3

Dismounting/mounting the auger drive guard

19.3

Dismounting/mounting the auger drive guard

ü

The side mounted mowers are in working position, refer to page 87

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

19.4

BMG000-055

„ The side guard is folded up and secured,

refer to page 226

.

Removing

„ Remove the hexagon head screws (2).

„ Remove the guard (1) and store it in a secure place.

Mounting

„ Put on the guard (1) in place and secure with the hexagon head screws (2).

Maintaining belt drives

INFORMATION

If crops are thick, belt pulleys with 4 grooves can be mounted on the front mounted mower if required.

19.4.1

Checking kraftband

INFORMATION

If worn or soiled, the complete power transmission of the kraftband and pulley is not guaranteed.

„ Visually check each kraftband of the belt drives inside and outside for wear and damage

(e.g. cracks, rocks) and replace, if necessary.

„ Check each kraftband for soiling (oil, grease) and clean or replace it, if necessary.

278

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Maintenance – mowing units 19

Maintaining belt drives 19.4

19.4.2

Checking pulley

19.4.3

BX001-249

INFORMATION

If worn or soiled, the complete power transmission of the kraftband and pulley is not guaranteed.

„ Check the edges of the pulley (1) for wear and, if required, have them replaced by your

KRONE service partner.

„ Check the pulley (1) for damage and replace if required.

„ Check the pulley (1) for soiling (oil, grease) and clean if required.

Checking/adjusting the belt tension of the front mounted mower conditioner drive

KM000-383

ü

The machine is in the working position, refer to page 87

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

ü

The guard for the conditioner drive is dismounted, refer to page 277

.

ü

The belt drive is tensioned, refer to page 280 .

„ Check whether the display (1) ends flush with the upper edge of the compression spring (2).

If the display (1) ends flush with the upper edge of the compression spring (2), the belt tension is correct.

If the display (1) does not end flush with the upper edge of the compression spring (2), the belt tension must be adjusted.

„ Detension the belt drive,

refer to page 280

.

„ Loosen the nut (4).

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 279

19 Maintenance – mowing units

19.4

Maintaining belt drives

When the display is above the compression spring:

„ Unscrew the sleeve (3) further (turn counterclockwise).

When the display is under the compression spring:

„ Screw the sleeve (3) in further (turn clockwise).

„ Tighten the nut (4).

„ Tension the belt drive,

refer to page 280 .

„ Repeat the process until the display (1) ends flush with the upper edge of the compression spring (2) with the belt drive tensioned.

„ Mount the guard (5) for the conditioner drive,

refer to page 277

.

19.4.4

Tensioning/detensioning the conditioner drive belt tension front mounted mower

ü

The guard for the conditioner drive is dismounted, refer to page 277

.

ü

The machine is in the working position, refer to page 87

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

„

Remove the blade key from the rear storage compartment, refer to page 60

.

Detensioning the belt drive

BM000-259

„ Remove the linch pin (1).

WARNING! Risk of injury! The blade key (3) is under spring tension during the detensioning process. If the blade key is released too early, it will spring back. Do not release the blade key during detensioning.

„ To detension the belt drive, insert the blade key (3) in the tensioning device (2) and press down.

280

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Tensioning the belt drive

Maintenance – mowing units 19

Maintaining belt drives 19.4

19.4.5

BM000-260

WARNING! Risk of injury! The blade key (1) is under spring tension during the tensioning process. If the blade key is released too early, it will spring back. Do not release the blade key during tensioning.

„ Slide the blade key (1) into the tensioning device (3).

„ To tension the belt drive, press the blade key upwards until the tensioning device engages.

„ To secure the tensioning device, mount the linch pin (2).

Checking/adjusting the belt tension of the auger drive

BMG000-039

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

ü

The guard for the auger drive is removed, refer to page 278

.

ü

The belt drive is tensioned, refer to page 282 .

„ Check whether the display (1) ends flush with the upper edge of the compression spring (2).

If the display (1) ends flush with the upper edge of the compression spring (2), the belt tension is correct.

If the display (1) does not end flush with the upper edge of the compression spring (2), the belt tension must be adjusted.

„ Detension the belt drive,

refer to page 282

.

„ Loosen the nut (4).

Display above the compression spring

„ Unscrew the sleeve (3) further (turn counterclockwise).

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 281

19 Maintenance – mowing units

19.4

Maintaining belt drives

Display under the compression spring

„ Screw the sleeve (3) in further (turn clockwise).

„ Tighten the nut (4).

„ Tension the belt drive,

refer to page 282 .

„ Repeat the process until the display (1) ends flush with the upper edge of the compression spring (2) with the belt drive tensioned.

„

Set the guard for the auger drive in place, refer to page 278

.

19.4.6

Tensioning/detensioning the auger drive belt drive

ü

The guard of the auger conveyor drive is dismounted, refer to page 278

.

ü

The machine is in the working position, refer to page 87

.

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 31 .

„

Remove the blade key from the rear storage compartment, refer to page 60

.

282

BM000-144

Relieving the belt drive

„ Pull out the linch pin (1).

WARNING! Risk of injury! While relieving the belt drive, the blade key (2) is under spring tension. If the blade key is released too early, it will spring back. While relieving, do not release the blade key.

„ To relieve the belt drive, insert the blade key (2) in the tensioning device (3) and pull it towards the rear.

Tensioning the belt drive

WARNING! Risk of injury! While relieving the belt drive, the blade key (2) is under spring tension. If the blade key is released too early, it will spring back. While relieving, do not release the blade key.

„ Slide the blade key (2) into the tensioning device (3).

„ To tension the belt drive, push the blade wrench forward until the tensioning device engages.

„ To secure the tensioning device, insert the linch pin (1) into the borehole.

„ Check the belt tension,

refer to page 280 .

„

Mount the guard for the auger drive, refer to page 278 .

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

19.4.7

Maintenance – mowing units 19

Maintaining belt drives 19.4

Changing kraftband “belt drive side mounted mowers”

Changing the kraftband is described based on the example of the "Right side mounted mower belt drive". The kraftband of the "Left side mounted mower belt drive" is changed in a similar manner.

ü All mowing units are in working position,

refer to page 87 .

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

„ The side hood is open.

BM000-272

„ Loosen the safety chain (2).

„ Unscrew the screws (1) and put the universal shaft (3) aside.

BM000-173

„ Dismount the oil pan guard (2).

„ Remove the guard sheet (3).

„ Dismount the belt guard (4).

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 283

19 Maintenance – mowing units

19.4

Maintaining belt drives

284

BM000-174

„ Unscrew the upper screws (4) of the belt guard (3).

„ Unscrew the screws (1) and remove the belt guard (2) together with the belt guard (3).

„ Dismount the belt guard (5).

„ Remove the bolt (7) and protect the hydraulic cylinder (6) against falling down.

„ To dismount the reel (10), raise the rocker arm (9).

„ Remove the kraftband (11) from the lower belt pulley (12) and set it on the upper belt pulley (12).

„ Raise the rocker arm (9) until it is no longer positioned in front of the upper belt pulley (8).

Secure the rocker arm (9) in this position to protect it against falling down.

„ Remove the kraftband (11) from the upper belt pulley (8), turn it and remove it down and to the rear between the belt pulley (8) and the main frame.

„ Replace the kraftband (11) with a new one. Note the running direction.

„ To lower the rocker arm (9) release the retainer.

„ Place the kraftband (11) on the belt pulley (12).

„ Raise the rocker arm (9) and mount the reel (10).

„ To mount the bolt (7), loosen the hydraulic cylinder retainer (6) and lower it until the hole pattern of the hydraulic cylinder (6) and the rocker arm (9) coincide.

„ Mount the belt guard (5).

„ Insert the belt guard (2) together with the belt guard (3) and mount with the screws (1).

„ Fit the upper screws (4) of the belt guard (3).

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Maintenance – mowing units 19

Maintaining belt drives 19.4

BM000-173

„ Mount the belt guard (4).

„ Attach the guard sheet (3).

„ Mount the oil pan guard (2).

BM000-272

„ Insert the universal shaft and fit the screws (1) medium tight using screw glue; tightening torque=72 Nm.

„ Mount the safety chain (2).

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 285

19 Maintenance – mowing units

19.4

Maintaining belt drives

19.4.8

Change kraftband "belt drive of front mounted mower"

286

BM000-175

ü All mowing units are in working position,

refer to page 87 .

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

ü The side hood on the right is open.

„ Dismount the universal shaft (11).

„ Dismount the belt guard (2).

„ To dismount the belt guard (9) together with the belt guard (10), unscrew the screws (8 and

12).

„ Dismount the hose clamp (4).

„ To dismount the belt guard (3) together with the support, unscrew the screws (5).

„ Remove the bolt (6) and protect the hydraulic cylinder (7) against falling down.

„ Evenly remove the kraftband (1) from the two pulleys.

„ Replace the kraftband (1) with a new one. Note the running direction.

„ To mount the bolt (6), loosen the hydraulic cylinder retainer (7) and lower it until the hole pattern of the hydraulic cylinder (7) and the rocker arm coincide.

„ Insert the belt guard (3) together with the support and mount with the screws (5).

„ Mount the hose clamp (4).

„ Insert the belt guard (9) together with the belt guard (10) and mount with the screws (8 and

12).

„ Mount the belt guard (2).

„ Slide on the universal shaft (11) and fit the clamping screw; tightening torque=80 Nm.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

19.5

Maintenance – mowing units 19

Checking the tines on the tine conditioner 19.5

Checking the tines on the tine conditioner

NOTICE

Loss of tines

Bent and broken tines will cause an imbalance. Therefore the machine may be damaged.

„ Check the tine conditioner for bent and damaged tines each time before it is used.

„ To prevent the loss of tines, check the bearing bolts of the tine bearings and replace them in time.

19.6

19.6.1

KMG000-017

Broken tines must be replaced in pairs on opposite sides.

ü

The machine is in the working position, refer to page 87

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

„ Dismount bent and damaged tines (1).

„ Adjust and mount bent tines.

Cutterbar

Rotary hub

BMG000-026

Abbreviations used in this figure:

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 287

19 Maintenance – mowing units

19.6

Cutterbar

RE = eccentric bearing housing (clockwise), without distinctive groove

LE = eccentric bearing housing (rotating anticlockwise), with distinctive groove

For protection against overload of mowers, the rotary hubs (1) are secured with nuts (2) and shear pins (3).

When driving onto obstacles (e.g. stones), the both shear pins in the rotary hub will shear off.

The rotary hub incl. nut turns upward on the pinion shaft.

• The cutting discs or drums which move the crop to the left (LH) in the direction of travel have left-handed thread.

• The cutting discs or drums which transport the crop to the right (RH) in the direction of travel have right-handed thread.

To distinguish between right-hand (clockwise) rotation (RH) and left-hand (anti-clockwise) rotation (LH), the nuts (2) and the pinion shafts (4) for the left-hand rotation (LH) have a distinctive groove (a, b).

• The nuts (2) with left-handed thread (LH) have distinctive grooves (a) on the bevel.

• The pinion shafts (4) with left-handed thread (LH) have a distinctive groove (b) on the face.

19.6.2

Replacing the shear bolt at the rotary hub

NOTICE

Wrong installation position

The machine may be damaged if the installation position of the bearing housings is not observed.

„ Clockwise rotating (RH) cutting discs / mower drums always have right-handed pinion shaft and nut (no groove mark on pinion shaft and nut).

„ Anti-clockwise rotating (LH) cutting discs / mower drums always have left-handed pinion shaft and nut (with groove mark on pinion shaft and nut).

288

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Maintenance – mowing units 19

Cutterbar 19.6

BM000-233

ü

The machine is in the working position, refer to page 87

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

„ Dismount the cutting disc or the mower drum at the rotary hub with the defective shear bolt.

„ Remove the retaining ring (7).

„ Unscrew the screws (8).

„ Dismount the nut (2) by using the special key (10) included with delivery.

„ Dismount the hub (1).

„ Remove the damaged shear pins (3).

„ Check the nut and the hub for damage.

INFO : Replace damaged parts by KRONE original spare parts.

„ Fill the space above the bearing with grease (c).

„ Place the hub on the pinion shaft.

INFO : Observe the position of the shear pins. The slots of the shear pins (3) must be mounted facing each other horizontally , see detail (I).

„ Punch the new shear pins from the outside through the hub (1) and the shaft (4) until the end of the pin reaches the surface of the hub (d).

„

Mount the nut (2) with the special key (10), refer to page 60

with a tightening torque of

300 Nm .

„ Fit the screws (8) with detent edged washers.

„ Mount retaining ring (7).

„ Mount the cutting disc (5) or the mower drum (6).

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 289

19 Maintenance – mowing units

19.6

Cutterbar

19.6.3

Check/change blades

WARNING

Missing, damaged or incorrectly mounted blades and blade supports

If blades are missing, damaged or incorrectly mounted, dangerous unbalanced rotation may be caused and parts may fly around. People may be seriously injured or killed as a result.

„ Check the blades at least once a day and the retaining bolts every time after changing the blades or after contact with foreign objects.

„ Immediately replace missing, damaged or incorrectly mounted blades and blade supports.

„ To avoid imbalance, always replace missing and damaged blades in kits and never mount unevenly worn blades on a cutting disc/mower drum.

19.6.3.1

Checking the blade for wear

WARNING

Risk of injury due to low material thickness on the blades

If the material thickness on the blades is too low, the blades may loosen due to high rotating speed. Thus there is a risk of serious injuries or death.

„ Replace the blades at the latest when the wear limit is reached.

ð The wear limit is reached when the borehole of the blade touches the marking (1) on the blade or the dimension X is equal to or less than 13 mm .

290

KM000-038

ü

The machine is in the working position, refer to page 87

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

„

Fold up the front guard, refer to page 215

.

WARNING! Risk of injury due to sharp blades! Wear suitable protective gloves.

„ Clean the area around the blades, cutting discs and mower drums.

„ Check wear limit.

ð If the dimension is X>13 mm , the wear limit is not reached.

ð If the dimension X is ≤13 mm or the borehole touches the marking (1), the blade must be replaced.

„

Fold down the front guard, refer to page 215

.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Maintenance – mowing units 19

Cutterbar 19.6

19.6.3.2

Changing blades for the “blade screw connection” version

KM000-044

ü

The machine is in the working position, refer to page 87

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

„

Fold up the front guard, refer to page 215

.

WARNING! Risk of injury due to sharp blades! Wear suitable protective gloves.

„ Clean the area around the blades, cutting discs and mower drums.

„ Remove the damaged or worn blade.

„

Check the fastening elements of the blade, refer to page 292 . Also replace worn or

damaged fastening parts.

INFO: The blades for anti-clockwise and clockwise rotating cutting discs/mower drums differ.

When installing the blades, ensure that the direction of rotation is correct. The arrow on the blade must match the direction of rotation of the corresponding cutting disc/mower drum.

„ Insert the new blade (5) between the wear skid (2) and the cutting disc (1).

„ Insert the retaining bolt (3) from below through the wear skid (2), the blade (5) and the cutting disc (1).

INFO: Only use the locknut (4) once.

„ Screw the locknut (4) from above onto the retaining bolt (3) and tighten it; tightening torque

refer to page 243

.

„ Repeat the process for all blades.

„

Fold down the front guard, refer to page 215

.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 291

19 Maintenance – mowing units

19.6

Cutterbar

19.6.3.3

Changing blades for the “blade quick fastener” version

1

2 3

4

19.6.4

4

5

2

3

KM000-045

ü

The machine is in the working position, refer to page 87

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

„

Fold up the front guard, refer to page 215

.

WARNING! Risk of injury due to sharp blades! Wear suitable protective gloves.

„ Clean the area around the blades, cutting discs and mower drums.

„ To remove the blade (2), insert the blade wrench (1) between the cutting disc (4) and the blade carrier (3) as far as it will go, press it down with one hand and hold it.

„

Check the fastening parts of the blade (2), refer to page 292 . Also replace worn or damaged

fastening parts.

INFO: The blades for anti-clockwise and clockwise rotating cutting discs/mower drums differ.

When installing the blades, ensure that the direction of rotation is correct. The arrow on the blade must match the direction of rotation of the corresponding cutting disc/mower drum.

„ To insert the new blade (2), insert the blade key (1) between the cutting disc (4) and the blade carrier (3) as far as it will go, press it down with one hand and hold it.

„ Guide the blade (2) onto the retaining bolt (5) and release the blade key (1) in a controlled manner with your hand.

„ Repeat the process for all blades.

„

Fold down the front guard, refer to page 215

.

Checking/replacing retaining bolts

WARNING

Risk of injury due to low material thickness on the retaining bolts

If the material thickness on the retaining bolts is too low, the blades may loosen due to the high rotating speed. As a result, people may be seriously injured or killed.

„ Whenever a blade is changed, check the material thickness of the retaining bolts.

„ When the retaining bolts are damaged or worn, replace them in kits per cutting disc/ mower drum.

„ The retaining bolts must be replaced at the latest when the material thickness at the thinnest point is below 14 mm .

Blade screw connection design Blade quick fastener design

292

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Maintenance – mowing units 19

Cutterbar 19.6

19.6.5

KM000-039 / KM000-040

Checking/replacing blade carrier

"Blade quick fastener" version

WARNING

Risk of injury due to low material thickness and/or worn application seam on the blade carriers

If the material thickness is too low and/or an application seam on the blade carrier is worn, blades may loosen due to the high rotating speed. As a result, people may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The blade carriers must be checked at least once a day or after contact with foreign objects.

„ Whenever a blade is changed, check the material thickness of the blade carriers.

„ The material thickness of the blade carriers must not be less than 3 mm at the weakest point.

„ The blade carriers must be replaced at the latest when the application seam (1) is worn at one point.

„ The blade carriers must only be replaced by KRONE original spare parts.

KM000-041

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 293

19 Maintenance – mowing units

19.6

Cutterbar

19.6.6

Checking/replacing cutting discs/mower drums

WARNING

Deformed cutting discs/mower drums

If cutting discs/mower drums are deformed, blades may become detached due to high rotating speed. As a result, people may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The cutting discs/mower drums must be checked at least once a day or after contact with foreign objects.

„ If cutting discs/mower drums are deformed, the dimension X=48 mm must not be exceeded.

„ The cutting discs/mower drums must only be replaced by KRONE original spare parts.

KM000-042

19.6.6.1

Checking the wear limit on cutting discs/mower drums

WARNING

Abrasion on cutting discs/mower drums

Due to abrasion limits on the cutting discs/mower drums, the blades or parts may loosen because of high rotating speed. Thus there is a risk of serious injuries or death.

The wear limit for abrasion limits (2) on the cutting discs/mower drums is reached when the material thickness is less than 3 mm .

„ The cutting discs/mower drums must be replaced at the latest when the material thickness is below the minimum material thickness of 3 mm.

„ The cutting discs/mower drums must only be replaced by KRONE original spare parts.

294

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Maintenance – mowing units 19

Cutterbar 19.6

19.6.7

KM000-043

Checking/replacing linings on cutterbar

NOTICE

Impact stops are checked irregularly

The impact stops are subject to natural wear and must be inspected daily for wear and replaced if required. If there is no inspection, the machine may be damaged.

„ Adjust the welding current and the welding material to the cutterbar material and to the impact stop. If required, carry out a test weld.

KM000-081

„ Open the welding seams of the old lining.

„ Remove lining.

„ Deburr the contact areas.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 295

19 Maintenance – mowing units

19.6

Cutterbar

19.6.8

KM000-080

„ Fit the new lining (3).

„ Weld short I seams on the upper side of the cutterbar in the sections (1) (each should be approx. 30 mm). INFORMATION: The edges (2) must not be welded.

„ On the bottom of the cutterbar, weld the lining (3) to the cutterbar along the whole length in section (5). INFORMATION: The edges (4) must not be welded.

Oil level inspection and oil change on the cutter bar

Front mounted mower cutter bar

Checking oil level

Before checking the oil level on the cutterbar, the cutterbar must be aligned levelly by means of a spirit level.

296

KM000-284

„ Comply with the safety routine "Safe execution of oil level check, oil and filter element exchange",

refer to page 32 .

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 31 .

Aligning cutterbar in transverse direction (direction of travel)

„ Place the spirit level (1) diagonally on the cutterbar.

„ Align the cutterbar using the spirit level (1) and readjust, if necessary, via cutting height

setting, refer to page 220 .

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Maintenance – mowing units 19

Cutterbar 19.6

Aligning the cutterbar in longitudinal direction

„ Place the spirit level (1) on two cutting discs.

„ Align the cutterbar using the spirit level (1); align it horizontally using wedges, if necessary.

KM000-036

„ Release the locking screw of the inspection hole (1).

ð The oil level must reach up to the inspection hole (1).

If the oil reaches the inspection hole (1):

„

Mount the locking screw of the inspection hole (1), refer to page 246 .

If the oil does not reach the inspection hole (1):

„ Top up new oil via the inspection hole (1) up to the inspection hole (1).

„

Mount the locking screw of the inspection hole (1), refer to page 246 .

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 297

19 Maintenance – mowing units

19.6

Cutterbar

Change oil

BMG000-037

ü The front mounted mower is raised.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

„ Comply with the safety routine "Safe execution of oil level check, oil and filter element exchange",

refer to page 32 .

ü A suitable container is available for escaping oil.

„ To be able to lower the cutterbar on the side of the drain plug (2), place a square piece of timber underneath the cutterbar on the opposite side.

„

Set the Main Mode Switch to the "Maintenance mode" position, refer to page 91

.

„ Lower the front mounted mower until the cutterbar rests on the square piece of timber and is lower in the direction of the drain plug (2).

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 31 .

„ Unscrew the drain plug (2) and drain the oil.

„ Mount the drain plug (2).

„ Raise the front mounted mower again.

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 31 .

298

KM000-284

Aligning the cutterbar in transverse direction (direction of travel)

„ Position the spirit level (1) transversely on the cutterbar.

„ Align the cutterbar using the spirit level (1) and readjust, if necessary, via cutting height

setting, refer to page 220 .

Aligning the cutterbar in longitudinal direction

„ Position the spirit level (1) on two cutting discs.

„ Use the spirit level (1) to align the cutterbar, if necessary use wedges to align it horizontally.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Maintenance – mowing units 19

Cutterbar 19.6

KM000-036

„ Refill with fresh oil up to the inspection hole (1) via the inspection hole (1).

„

Screw in the locking screw of the inspection hole (1), refer to page 246 .

Cutterbar side mounted mowers

Checking oil level

Before checking the oil level on the cutterbar, the cutterbar must be aligned levelly by means of a spirit level.

KM000-284

„ Comply with the safety routine "Safe execution of oil level check, oil and filter element exchange",

refer to page 32 .

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 31 .

Aligning cutterbar in transverse direction (direction of travel)

„ Place the spirit level (1) diagonally on the cutterbar.

„ Align the cutterbar using the spirit level (1) and readjust, if necessary, via cutting height

setting, refer to page 220 .

Aligning the cutterbar in longitudinal direction

„ Place the spirit level (1) on two cutting discs.

„ Align the cutterbar using the spirit level (1); align it horizontally using wedges, if necessary.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 299

19 Maintenance – mowing units

19.6

Cutterbar

KM000-036

„ Release the locking screw of the inspection hole (1).

ð The oil level must reach up to the inspection hole (1).

If the oil reaches the inspection hole (1):

„

Mount the locking screw of the inspection hole (1), refer to page 246 .

If the oil does not reach the inspection hole (1):

„ Top up new oil via the inspection hole (1) up to the inspection hole (1).

„

Mount the locking screw of the inspection hole (1), refer to page 246 .

Change oil

300

BMG000-038

ü The side mounted mowers are in transport position,

refer to page 87 .

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

„ Comply with the safety routine "Safe execution of oil level check, oil and filter element exchange",

refer to page 32 .

ü A suitable container is available for escaping oil.

„ Unscrew the drain plug (1) and drain the oil.

„

Mount the drain plug (1), tightening torque refer to page 246 .

„ Move the side mounted mower into the working position.

Before checking the oil level on the cutterbar, the cutterbar must be aligned levelly by means of a spirit level.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Maintenance – mowing units 19

Check guard cloths 19.7

KM000-284

„ Comply with the safety routine "Safe execution of oil level check, oil and filter element exchange",

refer to page 32 .

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 31 .

Aligning cutterbar in transverse direction (direction of travel)

„ Place the spirit level (1) diagonally on the cutterbar.

„ Align the cutterbar using the spirit level (1) and readjust, if necessary, via cutting height

setting, refer to page 220 .

Aligning the cutterbar in longitudinal direction

„ Place the spirit level (1) on two cutting discs.

„ Align the cutterbar using the spirit level (1); align it horizontally using wedges, if necessary.

19.7

KM000-036

„ Remove the locking screw from the inspection hole (1).

„ Refill with fresh oil up to the inspection hole (1) via the inspection hole (1).

„ Screw in the locking screw of the inspection hole (1).

Check guard cloths

ü All mowing units are in working position,

refer to page 87 .

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 301

19 Maintenance – mowing units

19.8

Vent friction clutch

19.8

BMG000-045

„ Carry out a visual inspection of the guard cloth (1) to ensure that there are no cracks and damage.

Æ The machine can be used when there are no cracks or damages.

Æ Replace guard cloths in case of cracks or damage.

Vent friction clutch

Front mounted mowers

302

KM000-072

The friction clutch protects the machine from damage. It is designed with a permanently adjusted turning torque M

R

. The torque is applied to the housing of the friction clutch (2).

Before initial start-up and once a year before the season, the friction clutch must be bled. This will detach adhesions from the friction lining. Therefore functionality will be maintained and the service life increased.

ü The front mounted mower is in working position,

refer to page 87

.

ü

The machine is shut down and secured, refer to page 31

.

ü The universal shaft of the front mounted mower is disassembled.

Vent friction clutch

„ Tighten the 4 nuts (1).

„ Turn the friction clutch.

Restart the friction clutch

„ Release the 4 nuts (1) by turning a quarter of a turn.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Maintenance – mowing units 19

Vent friction clutch 19.8

To place the machine in service again, switch on the PTO shaft. When the friction clutch has been bled, the mowing discs/mower drums must not also rotate, should this be the case, the friction clutch is stuck or rusty and must be taken apart (remove any friction lining from the plates, if necessary smooth the friction linings with sandpaper). Then re-attach the universal shaft and bleed the friction clutch again.

Side mounted mowers

1

2

1

4

5

1 3

4

BM000-347

The friction clutch protects the machine from damage. It is designed with a permanently adjusted turning torque M

R

. The torque is applied to the housing of the friction clutch (2).

Before initial start-up and once a year before the season, the friction clutch must be bled. This will detach adhesions from the friction lining. Therefore functionality will be maintained and the service life increased.

ü

The side mounted mowers are in working position, refer to page 87

.

ü

The machine is shut down and secured, refer to page 31

.

ü The universal shafts of the side mounted mowers are disassembled.

Vent friction clutch

„ Loosen the 6 nuts (1) crosswise and disassemble.

„ Undo the 6 screws (4) until the screw ends are flush with the shaft flange (3).

„ Undo the coupling hub (5).

Restarting the friction clutch

„ Tighten the 6 screws (4) with a tightening torque of M

A

=20 Nm.

„ Mount the 6 nuts (1) to a tightening torque of M

A

=49 Nm.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 303

19 Maintenance – mowing units

19.8

Vent friction clutch

To place the machine in service again, switch on the PTO shaft. When the friction clutch has been bled, the mowing discs/mower drums must not also rotate, should this be the case, the friction clutch is stuck or rusty and must be taken apart (remove any friction lining from the plates, if necessary smooth the friction linings with sandpaper). Then re-attach the universal shaft and bleed the friction clutch again.

304

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

20

Maintenance - Lubrication 20

Maintenance - Lubrication

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety instructions

If the relevant safety instructions are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ To avoid accidents, the relevant safety instructions must be read and observed,

refer to page 17 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

refer to page 31

.

NOTICE

Environmental damage caused by consumables

If consumables are not stored and disposed of properly, they may escape into the environment. As a result, the environment will be damaged, even by small quantities.

„ Store the consumables in suitable containers according to the statutory provisions.

„ Dispose of used consumables according to statutory provisions.

NOTICE

Damage to bearing points

When using lubricating greases not approved and when mixing different lubricating greases, the lubricated parts may be damaged.

„ Only use approved lubricating greases,

refer to page 66 .

„ Do not use graphite-containing lubricating greases.

„ Do not mix different lubricating greases.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 305

20 Maintenance - Lubrication

20.1

Lubricating universal shafts

20.1

Lubricating universal shafts

BM000-149

1 Universal shaft drive

Right side mounted mower with freewheel*

2 Universal shaft drive

Left side mounted mowing unit with freewheel*

3 Universal shaft drive front output**

4

5

6

* Version W

Lubrication intervals version P

**

Universal shaft drive front mounted mower **

Universal shaft cutterbar drive*

Universal shaft drive conditioner drive with freewheel*

Version P

306

BM000-151

Lubrication intervals version W

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Maintenance - Lubrication 20

Lubricate the intermediate gear 20.2

20.2

BM000-150

„ Lubricate all joints, guard bearings and section tubes with multi-purpose grease at the lubrication intervals indicated.

Additionally for universal shafts with freewheel:

„ Lubricate the freewheel (1) by means of the grease nipple with multi-purpose grease at the lubrication interval indicated.

Lubricate the intermediate gear

„

Lubrication interval, refer to page 236

.

BM000-197

ü The side mounted mowers are in working position.

ü

The machine is shut down and secured, refer to page 31

.

ü The swath cloth is dismounted under the machine.

ü With version "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood": The deflector curtain between the cross conveyor and machine frame is dismounted.

„ Remove the dirt in the area around the locking screws (1).

„ Remove the 2 locking screws (1).

„ Carefully remove the residue of the screw locking agent from the threads of the open boreholes so that no residue gets inside.

„ Screw the two M8 x 1 conical grease nipples into the open boreholes.

„ NOTICE! Damage to the intermediate gear due to use of incorrect lubricating grease!

Use only XHP 222 lubricating grease.

„ Lubricate with 65 g of lubricating grease per conical grease nipple.

„ Dismount the 2 conical grease nipples.

„ Mount the previously dismounted locking screws with a screw locking agent (for example

Loctite medium strength).

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 307

20 Maintenance - Lubrication

20.3

Lubrication chart - machine

20.3

Lubrication chart - machine

The information on maintenance intervals is based on average load of the machine. In case of an increased load and under extreme working conditions, the time periods must be reduced.

The types of lubrication are marked by means of icons in the lubrication chart, refer to table.

Type of lubrication

Grease

Lubricant

Multi-purpose grease

Comment

„ Apply two strokes of lubricating grease from the grease gun per grease nipple.

„ Remove excess lubricating grease at the grease nipple.

308

BMG000-036

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

4)

7)

Every 100 operating hours

1) 2)

Maintenance - Lubrication 20

Lubrication chart - machine 20.3

3)

6) 5)

8)

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 309

21 Maintenance – Central Lubrication System

21.1

Distributor blocks of central lubrication system

21 Maintenance – Central Lubrication System

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety instructions

If the relevant safety instructions are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ To avoid accidents, the relevant safety instructions must be read and observed,

refer to page 17 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

refer to page 31

.

NOTICE

Damage to the machine due to the use of incorrect and contaminated lubricants

Unauthorised or contaminated lubricants in the central lubrication system will cause faults in the central lubrication system and damage the bearing positions.

„ When working on the central lubrication system, use clean and suitable tools.

„ Use authorised lubricants only.

„ Ensure that dirt or dirty lubricant cannot get into the central lubrication system.

21.1

Distributor blocks of central lubrication system

INFORMATION

The distributor blocks have one grease nipple each (red cap) for lubrication with a grease gun if required.

310

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Maintenance – Central Lubrication System 21

Distributor blocks of central lubrication system 21.1

The lubrication point is assigned by the numbers on the lubrication lines to the distributor blocks.

BM000-216

Distributor block

1) Main distributor

Lubrication point

A2 Rear axle on chassis

A3 Central support

A4

B1

B3

B4

Left mower

Front lifting unit

Rear axle

Right mower

Distributor block

2) Front lifting unit

Lubrication point

A1 Front axle

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

Cylinder lift bottom

Cylinder lift top

Cylinder front lift top

Cylinder front lift bottom

Lower link

High-pressure line distributor block front mounted mower

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 311

21 Maintenance – Central Lubrication System

21.1

Distributor blocks of central lubrication system

Distributor block

2) Front lifting unit

Lubrication point

B1 Front axle

B2

B3

Cylinder lift bottom

Cylinder lift top

B4

B5

B6

Cylinder front lift top

Cylinder front lift bottom

Lower link

Distributor block

3) Subdistributor front mounted mower

Lubrication point

A1 Bearing

A3 Bearing

Distributor block

4) Central support

B3

B4

B5

B6

A7

B1

B2

B7

Lubrication point

A1 Cylinder rod ratchet

A2 Ratchet bearing

A3

A4

A5

A6

Belt tensioner bottom left

Cylinder base ratchet

Lifting cylinder ground

Outrigger bolt rear left

Outrigger bolt front left

Cylinder rod ratchet

Ratchet bearing

Belt tensioner bottom right

Cylinder base ratchet

Lifting cylinder ground

Outrigger bolt rear right

Outrigger bolt front right

312

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Maintenance – Central Lubrication System 21

Distributor blocks of central lubrication system 21.1

Distributor block

5) Outrigger arm side mounted mower right

Lubrication point

A1 Outrigger cylinder

A2

A3

Rod bottom rear

Cutting cylinder base

A4

A6

B2

Cutting cylinder rod

HL conditioner housing on right

Rod bottom front

B3

B4

B5

Pendulum stop cylinder rod

Pendulum stop cylinder base

Mower bearing

Distributor block

6) Side mounted mower right

Lubrication point

B1 Outside

B2 Outside

B3 Inner bearing

Distributor block

7) Rear axle

Lubrication point

A1 Cylinder rod running gear

A2

A3

Push rod

Steering knuckle top

A4

B1

B2

Steering knuckle bottom

Cylinder rod running gear

Push rod

B3

B4

B5

Steering knuckle top

Steering knuckle bottom

V-arm

Distributor block Lubrication point

8) Rear axle on chassis A1 Lifting cylinder base right

A2

A3

B1

B2

B3

Axle strut right

V-arm

Lifting cylinder base left

Axle strut left

V-arm

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 313

21 Maintenance – Central Lubrication System

21.2

Lubricants

Distributor block

9) Outrigger arm

Side mounted mower left

Distributor block

10) Side mounted mower left

Lubrication point

A1 Outrigger cylinder

A2

A3

Rod bottom rear

Cutting cylinder base

A4

A6

B2

Cutting cylinder rod

HL conditioner housing on left

Rod bottom front

B3

B4

B5

Pendulum stop cylinder rod

Pendulum stop cylinder base

Mower bearing

Lubrication point

A1 Outside

A2

A3

Outside

Inner bearing

21.2

314

Lubricants

To ensure problem-free operation of the central lubrication system, we recommend using the following greases which we have tested. Sodium soap greases must not be used in the on-road or off-road area because of their solubility in water. Grease can be changed from conventional grease to bio-degradable greases (and vice-versa) for the products listed here without resulting disadvantage.

Standard commercial greases or greases recommended by the vehicle or grease manufacturer are used as lubricants. Greases should still exhibit adequate suction and flow performance at –

25 °C (max. flow pressure 700 mbar). They must not have a tendency to bleed out, as this may result in depositions in the lines during extended operation.

MoS2 greases (up to 5% molybdenum disulphide) can be conveyed with progressive pumps and distributor blocks.

Lubricant types NLGI class 2

Manufacturer Type designation

AGIP

ARAL

BECHEM

BP

CASTROL

Autol Top 2000

Long-term grease H

High–Lub L4742

Energrease LS EP 9346

Energrease LS-EP2

Spheerol EP L2

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Manufacturer

ESSO

ELF

FINA

FUCHS

KROON OIL

MOBIL

Mobilgrease

MOGUL

ÖMV

OPTIMOL

SHELL

TEXACO

TOTAL

Zeller & Gmelin

Maintenance – Central Lubrication System 21

Lubricants 21.2

Type designation

Exxon multi-purpose grease Li

ELF Multi 2

EP multi-purpose grease

Li

Li

LZR 2

Lithep Grease

Mobilux EP 2

MB 2

Li

Li

Li

Li

LV 1 EP

ÖMV Signum M283

Olit EP 2

Retinax EP L2

Multifak EP2

Multis EP2

Divinol multi-purpose grease 2 Li

Li

Li

Li

Li

Li

Li/Ca

Saponification

–25 °C

–25 °C

–25 °C

–20 °C

–15 °C

–20 °C

–20 °C

Minimum conveying temperature

–20 °C

–20 °C

–20 °C

–25 °C

–10 °C

–15 °C

–20 °C

Lubricating greases with fast bio-degradable times

Manufacturer Type designation

ARAL

AVIA

BECHEM

DEA

FINA

FUCHS

LUBRITECH

ÖMV

TEXACO

Zeller & Gmelin

BAB EP 2

Syntogrease

UWS VE 42

Dolon E EP2

Biolical EP S2

Plantogel 0120S

Stabyl Eco EP2

ÖMV ecodur EP2

Starfak 2

Divinol E2

Li/Ca

Li

Li/Ca

Li/Ca

Li/Ca

Li

Li/Ca

Ca

Ca

Li

Saponification

Minimum conveying temperature

-20 °C

-25 °C

-25 °C

-20 °C

-25 °C

-25 °C

-20 °C

-25 °C

-20 °C

-25 °C

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 315

21 Maintenance – Central Lubrication System

21.3

Filling the lubricant tank

21.3

Filling the lubricant tank

BMG000-022

The lubricant tank can be filled via the conical grease nipple (1) or via the connector (2).

There are two different ways to top up the container by means of a standard grease gun:

• directly via conical grease nipple (1)

• via filler neck screwed in instead of conical grease nipple.

Topping up the lubricant tank via filler neck

BX001-386

„ Dismount the conical grease nipple (3) on the lubricant tank and mount the filler neck

27 001 594 * (4).

„ Mount the coupling sleeve 27 001 595 * (2) on the filling pump (1).

Topping up the lubricant tank via filling cylinder

316

BMG000-023

„ Dismount the double nipple (1) on the reducer (2).

„ Mount the connecting piece 27 001 998 * (3) with seal ring.

„ To fill, remove the protective caps on the connecting piece (3) and on the filling cylinder

940 393 * (4).

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

21.4

21.5

Maintenance – Central Lubrication System 21

Check filling level 21.4

Check filling level

NOTICE

Damage to the machine due to lack of lubrication

If the machine is not adequately lubricated, the affected components will be damaged.

„ Ensure that the lubricant tank of central lubrication system is always adequately full.

„ Visually check the filling level by the transparent lubricant tank.

The following error message appears in the terminal when the lubricant tank is empty:

„ “Lubrication tank of central lubrication” empty

To ensure that the machine can be lubricated sufficiently again:

„ Stop the machine and refill the lubricant tank.

Starting intermediate lubrication

21.6

BMG000-014

The lubrication interval is preset ex works. The factory setting is 30 min for the interval duration and 27 for the number of clock cycles per lubrication interval (corresponds to a grease quantity of 25 ml).

To start intermediate lubrication manually:

„ Open the "Central Lubrication" "Maintenance" menu on the terminal and press the "Start intermediate lubrication" key.

The central lubrication system performs intermediate lubrication.

Searching for the error in the central lubrication system

Jam in the system or at a connected lubrication point

„ Unscrew the outlet screw connections from the main distributor to the subdistributor one after the other. If lubricant suddenly exits under pressure when one of the outlet screw connections is loosened, the connected subdistributor is blocked. If lubricant does not exit from any of the outlet screw connections, the main distributor is blocked. Clean or replace the main distributor.

„ Reinstall the outlet screw connections.

„ Loosen the outlet screw connections on the blocked subdistributor. If lubricant suddenly exits under pressure when unscrewing one of the outlet screw connections, the connected lubrication point is blocked. If lubricant does not exit from any of the outlet screw connections, the subdistributor is blocked. Clean or replace the blocked subdistributor.

„ Remove the blockage at the lubrication point.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 317

22 Maintenance - Hydraulic System

22.1

Pressure limiting valves

22 Maintenance - Hydraulic System

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety instructions

If the relevant safety instructions are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ To avoid accidents, the relevant safety instructions must be read and observed,

refer to page 17 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

refer to page 31

.

WARNING

Hydraulic hoses are subject to ageing

Hydraulic hoses may wear depending on pressure, heat load and the effect of UV rays.

People can be seriously injured or killed by damaged hydraulic hoses.

The date of manufacture appears on the hydraulic hoses. This way the age can be ascertained quickly.

Replacement of the hydraulic hoses is recommended after a lifetime of six years.

„ Use original spare parts when replacing hoses.

NOTICE

Damage to the machine due to soiling of the hydraulic system

If foreign objects or liquids get into the hydraulic system, the hydraulic system may be severely damaged.

„ Clean hydraulic connections and components before removal.

„ Seal open hydraulic connections with protective caps.

„ Ensure that foreign objects or liquids do not get into the hydraulic system.

NOTICE

Storing and disposing of oils and used oil filters

If oil and used oil filters are not stored and disposed of properly, the environment may be damaged.

„ Store or dispose of used oil and oil filters according to statutory provisions.

22.1

Pressure limiting valves

The control blocks have been equipped with pressure limiting valves. These valves were preset in the factory and must not be changed.

318

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

22.2

22.3

Maintenance - Hydraulic System 22

Hydraulic oil 22.2

NOTICE

The pressure limiting valves on the machine have been preset in the factory. Work on the pressure limiting valves may be performed by KRONE customer service only.

Hydraulic oil

NOTICE

Damage to the hydraulic system caused by non approved hydraulic oils

If non-approved hydraulic oils or a mixture of different oils are used, the hydraulic system may be damaged.

„ Never mix different types of oil.

„ Never use engine oil.

„ Use approved hydraulic oils only.

Filling quantities and types of oil, refer to page 64 .

Maintaining hydraulic oil tank

BM000-137

Checking hydraulic oil tank level

The oil level in the hydraulic oil tank (1) is queried electrically and displayed on the terminal.

There is also a sight glass (2) on the hydraulic oil tank (1).

INFORMATION

To display the hydraulic oil level at the terminal, the machine must be in the transport position .

For the hydraulic oil level to be displayed correctly in the sight glass, the machine must be in the working position .

If the machine is in the working position, the sight glass displays the maximum filling level.

If the machine is in the transport position, the sight glass displays the minimum filling level.

Oil level check via sight glass:

ü

The machine is in the working position, refer to page 87

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 319

22 Maintenance - Hydraulic System

22.3

Maintaining hydraulic oil tank

The hydraulic oil must be topped up to the maximum level in the sight glass (2).

„ Top up hydraulic oil if necessary,

refer to page 320 .

Top up hydraulic fluid.

BM000-229

The oil filler neck is located under the cover sheet (1) on the top of the machine behind the cabin.

ü

The machine is in the working position, refer to page 87

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

„ Remove the screws (2) from the cover sheet (1) and take off the cover sheet.

„ Remove the cover (3) of the oil filler neck.

„ Add hydraulic oil and mount the cover (3).

„ Mount the cover sheet (1) using the screws (2).

Changing oil in the hydraulic oil tank

ü

The machine is in the working position, refer to page 87

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

320

BM000-230

„ Dismount the screws on the right side guard (1) and remove the guard.

„ Provide a collecting vessel (approx. 60 litres).

„ Thoroughly clean the area around the oil drain sleeve (2).

„

Remove the drain hose from the rear storage compartment, refer to page 60

and place one end in the collecting vessel. Attach the other end of the drain hose to the oil drain sleeve (2).

As a result, the oil drain valve is automatically opened and the hydraulic oil flows into the collecting vessel.

„ Dismount the drain hose and place it in the rear storage compartment.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Maintenance - Hydraulic System 22

Maintaining hydraulic oil tank 22.3

„

Fill the hydraulic oil up to the middle of the sight glass, refer to page 320 . Quantity and

specification,

refer to page 64 .

„ Run the diesel engine at a low idle speed for approx. 10 seconds.

„ Turn off the diesel engine.

„ Check the hydraulic oil tank level, top up the hydraulic oil if required.

„ Repeat the process until the oil level no longer drops.

„ Mount the right side guard (1).

Changing the return suction filter of the hydraulic oil tank

BM000-232

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

„ Remove the screws (2) from the cover sheet (1) and take off the cover sheet.

„ To bleed the pressure from the hydraulic oil tank, open the oil filler neck (3) of the hydraulic oil tank.

„ Unscrew the cover (4).

„ Gently turn the filter element, pull it out and drain the hydraulic oil.

„ Clean housing and cover

„ Wet the sealing surfaces and O-ring seals of the new filter element with oil and insert by gently turning it.

„ Install a new O-ring seal on the cover.

„ Re-fit the cover and (4) tighten it (20 Nm).

„ Start the diesel engine and run at idle speed.

„ Check the return suction filter for leaks.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 321

22 Maintenance - Hydraulic System

22.4

Changing high-pressure filter

22.4

Changing high-pressure filter

22.5

BM000-231

ü

The machine is in the working position, refer to page 87

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

„ Dismount the screws on the left side guard (1) and remove the guard.

„ Remove and clean the filter housing (2).

„ By gently moving the filter element back and forth, remove it downwards from the retainer piece and replace it with a new filter element.

„ Check the O-ring seal on the filter housing for damage and replace if necessary.

„ Wet the thread and the sealing surfaces with hydraulic oil.

„ Set the filter housing (2) in place and tighten it as far as it will go. Then turn back one quarter of a revolution.

„ Start the diesel engine and check the screw connections of the high-pressure filter for leaks.

Checking hydraulic hoses

Hydraulic hoses are subject to natural aging. This limits their service life. The recommended service life is 6 years, including a maximum storage time of 2 years. The date of manufacture is printed on the hydraulic hoses. When checking hydraulic hoses, the state-specific conditions

(e.g., BGVU) must be observed.

Performing a visual inspection

„ Visually inspect all hydraulic hoses for damage and leaks and have them replaced by an authorised specialist if necessary.

322

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

23

23.1

Maintenance – Electrics 23

Batteries 23.1

Maintenance – Electrics

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety instructions

If the relevant safety instructions are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ To avoid accidents, the relevant safety instructions must be read and observed,

refer to page 17 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

refer to page 31

.

NOTICE

Damage to the electrical system due to incorrect polarity of the battery

Non-observance of the correct polarity between the battery and alternator may severely damage the electrical system.

„ First connect the positive pole of the battery.

„ Then connect the negative terminal of the battery.

INFORMATION

An overview of all control units, circuit boards and fuses can be found in the circuit diagram, which is part of the other applicable documents that was delivered with the machine.

NOTICE

Damage to electronic components due to voltage peaks

If the supply voltage is interrupted while the machine is running, voltage peaks may occur.

This can cause electronic components to be damaged.

„ Switch off the diesel engine.

„ Interrupt the circuit with the main battery switch,

refer to page 204 .

Batteries

WARNING

Risk of injury due to a short circuit of the battery poles

When working on the batteries, carelessness may result in a short circuit of the battery poles.

A high current flows that may result in an electric shock, burns or explosion of the batteries.

As a result, people may be seriously injured.

„ When working on the batteries, make sure the positive pole does not come into contact with the negative pole or the frame.

„ Guard the battery poles with insulating caps against contact.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 323

23 Maintenance – Electrics

23.1

Batteries

BMG000-013

1 Battery compartment

2 Battery (12 V)

3 Battery (12 V)

The batteries (2) and (3) are located behind the cover of the battery compartment (1) in the storage compartment under the left platform.

23.1.1

23.1.2

Cleaning and maintaining batteries

„ To keep the battery surface clean and dry, clean the batteries with a damp or anti-static cloth only.

„ Protect the battery terminals and connecting terminals from corrosion by applying terminal grease to the battery terminals and connecting terminals.

„ Use a brush to remove any oxidation from the pole terminal.

„ When batteries are removed and placed in storage, regularly check the charge state or use a charge maintenance device. If the open-circuit voltage is below 12.3 V, recharge the battery.

„ Keep removed batteries cool, dry and charged.

Charging batteries

324

BMG000-015

The voltage of the machine wiring system is 24 V. Two 12-V batteries are connected in series to supply the vehicle electronics with 24 V.

To charge and maintain the charge, the batteries must be connected to a battery charger.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

23.1.3

Maintenance – Electrics 23

Batteries 23.1

The voltage of the battery charger must correspond to the voltage of the wiring system (24 V).

The vehicle electronics will be damaged if a battery charger with a higher or lower voltage is used.

ü

The machine is shut down and secured, refer to page 319

.

„ Open the storage compartment under the left platform.

„ Take off the cover cap (1).

„ First connect the positive cable of the charger to the external start point (3) under the battery compartment.

„ Then connect the negative cable of the charger to the short circuit to ground (2) under the battery compartment.

„ Switch on the battery charger

„ When the batteries are charged, switch off the battery charger.

„ Disconnect the negative cable of the battery charger from the ground connection (2).

„ Disconnect the positive cable of the battery charger from the external start connection (3).

„ Attach the cover cap (1).

„ Close the battery compartment.

Replacing batteries

Disconnecting the batteries

BMG000-016

ü

The machine is shut down and secured, refer to page 31

.

ü The battery compartment is open.

„ Remove the insulating caps (1) by loosening the cable ties.

„ Dismount the pole terminal (XC1/-) of the negative cable (2) from the negative pole of battery C1 (5).

„ Dismount the pole terminal (XC2/+.1) of the positive cable (3) from the positive pole of battery C2 (6).

„ Dismount the pole terminal (XC2/-) of the cable (4) from the negative pole of battery C2 (6).

„ Dismount the pole terminal (XC1/+) of the cable (4) from the positive pole of battery C1 (5).

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 325

23 Maintenance – Electrics

23.1

Batteries

Removing the batteries

BMG000-017

Each battery weighs approx. 37 kg.

ü

The batteries are disconnected, refer to page 325

.

„ Remove the screw (1) and set the retaining sheet (2) down to the side.

„ Dismount the side cover of the battery compartment (5).

„ Dismount the nut (6) to remove the screw (7) with the lashing strap over the batteries.

„ Remove battery C1 (3) and battery C2 (4) from the battery compartment.

Installing the batteries

326

BMG000-017

„ Insert battery C1 (3) and battery C2 (4) in the battery compartment.

„ Insert the retaining sheet (2) and mount the screw (1).

„ Tension the lashing strap over the batteries (4, 5).

„ Mount the screw (7) on the lashing strap with the nut (6).

„ Mount the side cover of the battery compartment (5).

„

Disconnect the batteries, refer to page 327

.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Maintenance – Electrics 23

Maintaining starter 23.2

Connecting a battery

23.2

BMG000-016

„ Mount the pole terminal (XC1/+) of the cable (4) on the positive pole of battery C1 (5)

(tightening torque = 6 ±1 Nm).

„ Mount the pole terminal (XC2/-) of the cable (4) on the negative pole of battery C2 (6)

(tightening torque = 6 ±1 Nm).

„ Mount the pole terminal (XC2/+.1) of the positive cable (3) on the positive pole of battery C2 (6) (tightening torque = 6 ±1 Nm).

„ Mount the pole terminal (XC1/-) of the negative cable (2) on the negative pole of battery C1 (5) (tightening torque = 6 ±1 Nm).

„ Attach the insulating caps (1) and fix with cable ties.

„ Close the battery compartment.

Maintaining starter

1

BXG000-064

If the starter (1) fails or is not working satisfactorily

„ Determine the possible cause of the fault.

„ Attempt to eliminate the possible cause according to the following list.

Fault: The starter fails or does is not working satisfactorily.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 327

23 Maintenance – Electrics

23.2

Maintaining starter

Possible cause

The connection cable to the starter is loose.

Remedy

„ Tighten the cable connections (2) to a tightening torque of

24 ±4 Nm and the cable connection (3) to a tightening torque of 4 +0.6/-0.3 Nm.

„ Clean the cable connections on the starter and engine.

The cable connections are corroded.

The magnetic switch of the starter is defective

„ Have the starter checked by a qualified service centre.

If the damage cannot be repaired based on the suggestions, contact your KRONE dealer.

328

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

24

24.1

Maintenance - Gearbox 24

Overview of gearboxes 24.1

Maintenance - Gearbox

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety instructions

If the relevant safety instructions are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ To avoid accidents, the relevant safety instructions must be read and observed,

refer to page 17 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

refer to page 31

.

Overview of gearboxes

BXG000-036

1 Input gearbox on front mounted mower 5

2 Main gearbox on front mounted mower 6

3 Transfer gearbox 7

4 Rear wheel hub gearbox (option)

Main gearbox left side mounted mower

Front wheel hub gearbox

Main gearbox right side mounted mower

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 329

24 Maintenance - Gearbox

24.2

Maintaining transfer gearbox

24.2

Maintaining transfer gearbox

BM000-135

„ Comply with the safety routine "Safe execution of oil level check, oil and filter element exchange",

refer to page 32 .

Check gear oil level

ü The main frame of the machine has been aligned horizontally.

ü 5 to 10 minutes have passed after the engine has been switched off.

ü Have a lint-free cloth at hand to clean the oil dipstick (1).

„ Thoroughly clean the area around the oil dipstick (1).

„ Unscrew the oil dipstick (1) with a hexagon wrench (8 mm), clean it with the cloth and screw it in completely.

„ Unscrew the oil dipstick (1) and check the gear oil level.

If the gear oil level is indicated between the "min." and "max." marks, the gear oil level is correct.

„ Screw in the oil dipstick (1).

If the gear oil level is indicated below the "min." mark:

„

Top up the gear oil, refer to page 331 .

330

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Maintenance - Gearbox 24

Maintaining transfer gearbox 24.2

Topping up gear oil

1

BMG000-053

„ Use a hexagon wrench to remove the locking screw from the oil filling hole (1).

„ Top up the gear oil until the "max." marking,

refer to page 330

.

„ Screw the locking screw (1) once more into the oil filling hole.

„ Run the engine at a low idle speed for a short time and switch off the engine.

„

Check the gear oil level after approx. 5 to 10 minutes, refer to page 330 .

Changing the gearbox oil

ü A suitable container is available for escaping oil.

1

BM000-247

„

Remove the drain hose from the rear storage compartment, refer to page 60

and place one end in the collecting vessel. Attach the other end of the drain hose to the oil drain sleeve (1).

As a result, the oil drain valve is automatically opened and the gear oil flows into the collecting vessel.

„ Dismount the drain hose and place it in the rear storage compartment.

„ Add new gear oil,

refer to page 331

.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 331

24 Maintenance - Gearbox

24.3

Maintaining input gearbox of front mounted mower

24.3

Maintaining input gearbox of front mounted mower

332

BMG000-033

INFORMATION

The oil level must be checked and the oil must be changed in working position and with machine in horizontal position.

„ Comply with the safety routine "Safe execution of oil level check, oil and filter element exchange",

refer to page 32 .

„ The guard for the input gearbox is removed,

refer to page 277

.

Check oil level

„ Unscrew the locking screw of the inspection hole (1).

ð If the oil reaches up to the inspection hole (1):

„

Screw on the locking screw of the inspection hole (1), tightening torque refer to page 246

.

ð If the oil does not reach up to the inspection hole (1):

„ Remove the locking screw from the filling hole (3).

„ Refill with fresh oil up to the inspection hole (1) via the filling hole (3).

„ Screw on the locking screw of the inspection hole (1) and the locking screw of the filling hole (3), tightening torque

refer to page 246

.

Change oil

„ Unscrew the locking screw (2) of the filling hole (3).

„ Extract the old oil from the gearbox.

„ Refill with fresh oil up to the inspection hole (1) via the filling hole (3).

„ Screw in the locking screw of the inspection hole (1) and the locking screw (2) of the

filling hole (3), tightening torque refer to page 246

.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

24.4

Maintenance - Gearbox 24

Maintaining main gearbox of front mounted mower 24.4

Maintaining main gearbox of front mounted mower

BMG000-030

INFORMATION

The oil level must be checked and the oil must be changed in working position and with machine in horizontal position.

„ Comply with the safety routine "Safe execution of oil level check, oil and filter element exchange",

refer to page 32 .

Check oil level

„ Unscrew the locking screw of the inspection hole (1).

ð If the oil reaches up to the inspection hole (1):

„

Screw on the locking screw of the inspection hole (1), tightening torque refer to page 246

.

ð If the oil does not reach up to the inspection hole (1):

„ Remove the locking screw from the filling hole (3).

„ Refill with fresh oil up to the inspection hole (1) via the filling hole (3).

„ Screw on the locking screw of the inspection hole (1) and the locking screw of the filling hole (3), tightening torque

refer to page 246

.

Change oil

ü A suitable container is available for escaping oil.

„ Unscrew the locking screw from the inspection hole (1) and the locking screw from the filling hole (3).

„ Unscrew the oil drain plug (2) and drain the oil.

„

Screw in the oil drain plug (2), tightening torque refer to page 246 .

„ Refill with fresh oil up to the inspection hole (1) via the filling hole (3).

„ Screw the locking screw into the inspection hole (1) and the locking screw into the filling

hole (3), tightening torque refer to page 246

.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 333

24 Maintenance - Gearbox

24.5

Maintain main gearbox of side mounted mowers

24.5

Maintain main gearbox of side mounted mowers

334

KMG000-22

„ Comply with the safety routine "Safe execution of oil level check, oil and filter element exchange",

refer to page 32 .

INFORMATION

The oil level must be checked and the oil must be changed in working position and with machine in horizontal position.

Check oil level

„ Unscrew the locking screw of the inspection hole (1).

ð If the oil reaches up to the inspection hole (1):

„

Screw on the locking screw of the inspection hole (1), tightening torque refer to page 246

.

ð If the oil does not reach up to the inspection hole (1):

„ Remove the locking screw from the filling hole (3).

„ Refill with fresh oil up to the inspection hole (1) via the filling hole (3).

„ Screw on the locking screw of the inspection hole (1) and the locking screw of the filling hole (3), tightening torque

refer to page 246

.

Change oil

ü A suitable container is available for escaping oil.

„ Unscrew the locking screw from the inspection hole (1) and the locking screw from the filling hole (3).

„ Unscrew the oil drain plug (2) and drain the oil.

„

Screw in the oil drain plug (2), tightening torque refer to page 246 .

„ Refill with fresh oil up to the inspection hole (1) via the filling hole (3).

„ Screw the locking screw into the inspection hole (1) and the locking screw into the filling

hole (3), tightening torque refer to page 246

.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

24.6

Maintenance - Gearbox 24

Maintaining wheel hub gearbox 24.6

Maintaining wheel hub gearbox

NOTICE

Damage to the wheel hub gearboxes caused by use of incorrect gearbox oil

When incorrect gearbox oil is used, the wheel hub gearboxes could be damaged during operation.

„ Only use SHELL SPIRAX S4 CX 50 gearbox oil to refill or change the gearbox oil in the wheel hub gearboxes.

„ If this gearbox oil is not available, contact your KRONE service partner.

24.6.1

Maintaining wheel hub gearbox front/right

BM000-227 / BM000-228

I Front wheel hub gearbox II Wheel hub gearbox rear (optional)

„ Comply with the safety routine "Safe execution of oil level check, oil and filter element exchange",

refer to page 32 .

Checking oil level :

ü A suitable container is available for escaping oil.

„ Position the wheel ensuring the filling hole (1) is in the highest position.

„ Thoroughly clean the area around the locking screw of the filling hole (1) and the locking screw of the inspection hole (2).

WARNING! Risk of scalding due to hot gearbox oil escaping under pressure. Wear personal protective equipment such as gloves and protective goggles and carefully loosen the locking screw of the filling hole.

„ To reduce pressure, carefully unscrew the locking screw of the filling hole (1) from a lateral position.

ð The pressure in the wheel hub gearbox is reduced.

„ Mount the locking screw of the filling hole (1).

„ Place the wheel so that the drain plug (3) is in the lowest position.

„ Unscrew the locking screw of the inspection hole (2).

„ Check whether the oil level reaches the inspection hole (2).

If the oil reaches the inspection hole:

„

Mount the locking screw of the inspection hole (2), tightening torque refer to page 246 .

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 335

24 Maintenance - Gearbox

24.6

Maintaining wheel hub gearbox

If the oil does not reach the inspection hole:

„ Unscrew the locking screw of the filling hole (1).

„ Top up new oil via the filling hole (1) up to the inspection hole (2).

„ Mount the locking screw of the inspection hole (2) and the locking screw of the filling hole

(1), tightening torque refer to page 246 .

Changing oil :

ü A suitable container is available for escaping oil.

„ Position the wheel ensuring the filling hole (1) is in the highest position.

„ Thoroughly clean the area around the locking screw of the filling hole (1) and the locking screw of the inspection hole (2).

WARNING! Risk of scalding by hot gearbox oil escaping under pressure. Wear personal protective equipment such as gloves and protective goggles and carefully release the locking screw of the filling hole.

„ To reduce pressure, carefully unscrew the locking screw of the filling hole (1) from a lateral position.

ð The pressure in the wheel hub gearbox is reduced.

„ Mount the locking screw of the filling hole (1).

„ Position the wheel ensuring that the drain plug (3) is in the lowest position.

„ Thoroughly clean the area around the drain plug (3)

„ Place a suitable container under the drain hole (3).

„ Unscrew the drain plug (3) and drain the oil into the container.

„ Unscrew the locking screw of the inspection hole (2) and the locking screw of the filling hole

(1).

„

Mount the drain plug (3), tightening torque refer to page 246 .

„ Top up new oil via filling hole (1) up to the inspection hole (2).

„ Mount the locking screw of the inspection hole (2) and the locking screw of the filling hole

(1), tightening torque refer to page 246 .

336

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

25

Malfunction, Cause and Remedy 25

Electrical/electronic system fault 25.1

Malfunction, Cause and Remedy

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety instructions

If the relevant safety instructions are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ To avoid accidents, the relevant safety instructions must be read and observed,

refer to page 17 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

refer to page 31

.

25.1

25.1.1

Electrical/electronic system fault

Overview of control units

An overview of the position of the sensors, actuators and control units is provided in the circuit diagram.

BMK Designation

A2 KMC (operating control)

A3 DRC (drive computer)

BMK

A32

A 34

Designation

TRM (terminal)

KSC (KRONE SmartConnect)

25.1.2

Overview of fuses

The fuses of the "distributor block - supply of fuses" are located on the left-hand machine side in the battery compartment below the batteries.

BM000-274

BMK

A19

Designation

Distributor block - supply of fuses

A19.F1

Reserve

A19.F2

Power supply - cabin output

BMK Designation

A19.F3

Power supply - cabin electronics

A19.F4

Battery cut-off relay momentary switch

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 337

25 Malfunction, Cause and Remedy

25.1

Electrical/electronic system fault

BX000-276

The "central electrical system" circuit board (1) is located in the console in the cabin.

338

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Malfunction, Cause and Remedy 25

Electrical/electronic system fault 25.1

BM000-268

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 339

25 Malfunction, Cause and Remedy

25.1

Electrical/electronic system fault

BMK Designation

A1.F1

Diagnostics socket ISOBUS

A1.F5

Built in-socket 3-pole, cooling box socket

A1.F7

Socket ISOBUS In-cab

A1.F13

Automatic climate control, evaporator blower fan /PWM

A1.F14

LMB-ECU2: Ignition stage 2

BMK

A1.F54

A1.F55

A1.F58

A1.F59

Designation

KMC 200: Voltage group UB5

KMC 200: Voltage group UB6

Voltage converter T1

Voltage converter T2

A1.F15

Diagnostics socket KRONE: Ignition stage 1

A1.F16

A1.F17

A1.F19

A1.F23

Diesel engine relay for smart com-

A1.F25

Radio, CB radio: Ignition stage 1

Driver's seat: Ignition stage 1

Cigarette lighter ponents

Terminal: Power supply

A1.F67

Urea line heating 1, 2

A1.F68

Voltage group UB1

A1.F26

Voltage converter switch-on signal A1.F80

Radio, CB radio interior lamp door switch

A1.F27

Steering column, radio: Background lighting

A1.F81

Light Control Unit: Power supply

A1.F28

KMC 200, Light Control Unit: Ignition stage 2

A1.F87

Function Module front: Voltage group UB1

A1.F29

Steering column, armrest, Function

Modules, camera system: Ignition stage 2

A1.F88

Function Module front: Voltage group UB2

A1.F30

DRC, KRONE SmartConnect: Ignition stage 2

A1.F31

Armrest

A1.F39

A1.F40

Wiper right

Wiper front

A1.F69

Voltage group UB2

A1.F70

Voltage group UB3

A1.F71

SCR heating valve 1, 2

A1.F78

Function Module front: Voltage group UB3

A1.F79

Function Module front: Voltage group UB4

A1.F89

Function Module rear: Voltage group

UB1

A1.F90

Function Module rear: Voltage group

UB2

A1.F91

Function Module rear: Voltage group

UB3

A1.F92

Function Module rear: Voltage group

UB4

A1.F41

Wiper left

A1.F44

A1.F45

A1.F50

A1.F51

A1.F52

A1.F53

DRC: Continuous voltage

DRC: Continuous voltage

KMC 200: Voltage group UB1

KMC 200: Voltage group UB2

KMC 200: Voltage group UB3

KMC 200: Voltage group UB4

A1.F93

Function Modules: Electronics supply

A1.F94

KMC 200: Electronics supply

A1.F95

Diagnostics socket: OBD

A1.F96

Steering column, armrest, ladder lighting momentary switch Electronics supply

A1.F97

Ignition lock

A1.F98

DRC, Motor Control Module: Electronics supply

A1.F99

Diagnostics socket: ISOBUS,

KRONE

340

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

25.1.3

Malfunction, Cause and Remedy 25

Electrical/electronic system fault 25.1

Overview sensors

An overview of the position of the sensors, actuators and control units is provided in the circuit diagram.

BMK Designation

B1 Position mower front left

B2 Position mower front right

B3

B4

B5

B6

Position mower left

Transport mower left

Position mower right

Transport mower right

BMK Designation

B32 Service brake pressure

B33 Angle brake pedal

B34 Wheel motor front left

B35 Wheel motor front right

B36 Wheel motor rear left

B37 Wheel motor rear right

B7

B9

Position rear axle

Position front axle

B10 Inclination mower front

B11 Inclination mower right

B12 Inclination mower left

B13 Position side shift mower front

B14 Constant pressure

B16

B17

B18

B19

Return suction filter

Brake accumulator pressure

Steer angle rear axle

Parking brake pressure

B41 NOx downstream catalytic converter

B42 NOx upstream catalytic converter

B43 Extraction module urea tank (filling level)

B44

B48

B49

B51

Ambient temperature

Filling level central lubrication

Switch central lubrication cycle

Urea temperature top

B53 Air filter contamination

B54 Water in fuel

B55 Moisture sensor

B56 Gear oil pressure

B20 Steering pressure

B21 Rotational speed mower front

B701 Oil pressure sensor

B702 Fuel pressure sensor

B22 Rotational speed mower left B703 Charge air pressure sensor

B23 Rotational speed auger conveyor left B704 Rail pressure sensor

B24 Rotational speed mower right B707 Charge air temperature sensor

B25 Rotational speed auger conveyor right B708 Coolant temperature sensor

B27 Level hydraulics

B28 Filling level fuel tank

B29 Pump pressure MA

B709

B711

Fuel temperature sensor

Speed sensor

B30

B31

Pump pressure MB

Swivel angle pump

A21.B

1

Air pressure urea

A21.B

2

Urea pressure/temperature

A22.B

1

NH3

25.1.4

Overview of actuators

An overview of the position of the sensors, actuators and control units is provided in the circuit diagram.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 341

25 Malfunction, Cause and Remedy

25.1

Electrical/electronic system fault

BMK Designation

G1 Alternator

G2 Urea air compressor

BMK Designation

K1 Wheel motor front left

K2 Wheel motor front right

K3 Wheel motor rear left

BMK Designation

M1 Starter

M3 Windscreen water pump

M4 Mirror left

BMK

G5

BMK

K5

K6

BMK

M5

M6

Designation

Central lubrication pump

Designation

Drive pump forward

Drive pump backward

Designation

Mirror right on right

Anti-collision mirror

Q3

Q4

Q5

Q6

BMK Designation

Q1 Pressure control valve front mounted mower on left

Q2 Pressure control valve front mounted mower on right

Front mounted mower on left

Front mounted mower on right

BMK

Q23

Q24

Designation

Cutting height on left 1

Cutting height on left 2

Q25 Cutting height on right 1

Q26 Cutting height right 2

Pressure control valve mower on left Q27 Swath hood on left

Left mower Q28 Swath hood on right

Q7

Q8

Pendulum stop mower on left

Lock mower on left

Q29 Side shift front mounted mower 1

Q30 Side shift front mounted mower 1

Q9 Pressure control valve mower on right Q31 Side guard front 1

Q10 Right mower Q32 Side guard front 2

Q11 Pendulum stop mower on right

Q12 Lock mower on right

Q13 Drive front mounted mower

Q14 Drive mower on left

Q33

Q34

Q36

Q37

CR roll distance

CR roll opening

Parking brake

Side shift front mounted mower left

Q15 Drive mower on right

Q16 Rear axle

Q17 Front axle

Q18 Pilot valve 1

Q19 Pilot valve 2

Q20 Pressure supply valve

Q21 Cutting height front 1

Q22 Cutting height front 2

Q38 Side shift front mounted mower right

Q39 Support cylinder rear axle

Q51 Urea heating valve 1

Q62 Steer autopilot on right

Q63 Steer autopilot on left

Q64 Block autopilot on left

Q65 Block autopilot on right

BMK Designation

Y703 High-pressure pump VCV

Y705 Wastegate control valve

Y707 High-pressure pump PCV

BMK Designation

Y734 Injection nozzle cyl. 4

Y735 Injection nozzle cyl. 5

Y736 Injection nozzle cyl. 6

342

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

BMK Designation

Y731 Injection nozzle cyl. 1

Y732 Injection nozzle cyl. 2

Y733 Injection nozzle cyl. 3

25.1.5

LED displays on the control units

25.1.5.1

LED display on KRONE SmartConnect

LEDs indicate the control unit's operating status.

Malfunction, Cause and Remedy 25

Electrical/electronic system fault 25.1

BMK Designation

Y737 Injection nozzle cyl. 7

Y738 Injection nozzle cyl. 8

EQ000-348

1 STAT (status)

2 GPS

3 GSM (mobile communications)

LED flash response

LED signal

0.25 Hz

0.5 Hz

6 Hz

Code 1 1

Code 1 3

Code 2 2

Code 2 3

4

5

L (Ethernet)

W (Wireless LAN)

Explanation

LED flashes every 4 s

LED flashes every 2 s

LED flashes 6x per second

LED flashes 1x/1x

                                                                           

LED flashes 1x/3x

                                                      

LED flashes 2x each time

                     

LED flashes 2x/3x

                           

                                            etc.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 343

25 Malfunction, Cause and Remedy

25.1

Electrical/electronic system fault

STAT

The green LED indicates the general status (e.g. power supply). The LED is lit steadily, and in isolation, from power-on until the boot process is ended.

LED signal

0.5 Hz

6 Hz

0.25 Hz

Code 1 1

Code 1 3

Code 2 2

Code 2 3

Code 5 5

Code 3 3

Lit steadily

Explanation

The control unit has booted up and is working properly.

The system is being updated.

• The control unit has not been adapted.

• Battery mode

Connected voltage too high or too low.

CAN error

Error logging on to CAN bus

The system is ready for updating.

Temperature recorder error

• The battery is missing.

• The battery is defective.

Wrong voltage

GPS

The blue LED indicates the status of the GPS connection.

LED signal

0.5 Hz

Code 1 3

Lit steadily

Inactive

Explanation

• The GPS is active.

• The position has been located.

GPS module communication error

• The GPS is active.

• The position is being located.

The GPS is inactive.

GSM

The white LED indicates the status of the mobile communications connection.

LED signal

Lit steadily

0.5 Hz

Code 1 3

Code 2 2

Inactive

Explanation

The mobile communications connection is inactive.

The mobile communications connection is active.

The UMTS module cannot be initialised.

SIM card/PIN code error

The GSM module is inactive.

Ethernet

The yellow LED indicates the status of the Ethernet connection.

344

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

LED signal

Lit steadily

0.5 Hz

Code 1 3

Inactive

Malfunction, Cause and Remedy 25

Emergency manual operation 25.2

Explanation

No device is connected to the Ethernet port.

The Ethernet is connected and in operation.

LAN hardware fault

The Ethernet is inactive or not fitted.

Wi-Fi

The red LED indicates the status of the wireless local area network (WLAN).

LED signal

0.5 Hz

Code 1 3

Lit steadily

Inactive

Explanation

The WLAN is active.

• Software error

• The software cannot be accessed.

The WLAN is being initialised/disabled.

The WLAN module is inactive or not fitted.

25.2

25.2.1

Emergency manual operation

Emergency unfolding of the side mounted mowers

WARNING

Increased risk of injury when operating the machine via emergency manual operation

If the machine is operated via emergency manual operation, functions are executed immediately and without confirmation prompts. Thus there is an increased risk of injury.

ü Only persons who are familiar with the machine are permitted to perform an emergency manual operation.

ü The executing person must know which machine parts are actuated by controlling the valves.

„ Ensure that there is nobody in the danger zone.

„ The valves must only be controlled from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the valves.

If the diesel engine of the machine cannot be started and the side mounted mowers are in transport position, the side mounted mowers can be folded out using emergency manual operation to provide access to the diesel engine.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 345

25 Malfunction, Cause and Remedy

25.2

Emergency manual operation

Mounting location

BM000-156

The "Hand pump" control block (2) for emergency manual operation is on the left-hand machine side behind the maintenance flap (1).

Basic position of stop cocks

WARNING

Risk of injury or machine damage due to unforeseeable movement of the machine

If the stop cock of the parking brake is not in the basic position, the parking brake is released and the machine may move unforeseeably. As a result, people or machine parts in the operating zone may be injured or damaged.

„ Make sure that the stop cock is in the basic position.

346

BM000-157

„ Check before emergency manual operation that all stop cocks (1, 2, 3, 4, 5) are in the basic position.

3

4

5

Pos.

1

2

Designation

Parking brake

Basic position

Horizontal position

Locking side mounted mower left Vertical position (open)

Locking right side mounted mower Vertical position (open)

Lift/lower left side mounted mower. Horizontal position (closed)

Lift/lower right side mounted mower.

Horizontal position (closed)

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Folding down left side mounted mower

Malfunction, Cause and Remedy 25

Emergency manual operation 25.2

BM000-158

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

ü All stop cocks are in the basic position,

refer to page 346 .

„ Swivel the maintenance flap to the side.

„ Connect the Minimess hose (1) from the rear storage compartment to the Minimess connection "P" (3) and the Minimess connection (5).

„ Insert the lever (2) from the scope of delivery of the machine into the holder of the hand pump.

„ Move the stop cock "Locking left side mounted mower" (6) into the horizontal position

(closed).

„ Move the stop cock "Raise/lower left side mounted mower" (4) into the vertical position

(open).

WARNING! Risk of injury due to falling side mounted mower! The side mounted mower folds down completely within approx. 5 seconds. To interrupt the folding-down process, close the stop cock (4).

„ To push off the side mounted mower, actuate the hand pump using the lever (2).

ð The side mounted mower folds down due to its dead weight as soon as the dead point has been exceeded.

Æ The side mounted mower must be located completely on the ground.

„

Move all stop cocks back to their basic position, refer to page 346

.

„ Dismount the Minimess hose (1).

„ Remove the lever (2) from the holder of the hand pump.

Folding down right side mounted mower

BM000-159

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 347

25 Malfunction, Cause and Remedy

25.2

Emergency manual operation

ü All stop cocks are in the basic position,

refer to page 346 .

„ Swivel the maintenance flap to the side.

„ Connect the Minimess hose (1) from the rear storage compartment to the Minimess connection "P" (3) and the Minimess connection (5).

„ Insert the lever (2) from the scope of delivery of the machine into the holder of the hand pump.

„ Move the stop cock "Locking right side mounted mower" (6) into the horizontal position

(closed).

„ Move the stop cock "Raise/lower right side mounted mower" (4) into the vertical position

(open).

WARNING! Risk of injury due to falling side mounted mower! The side mounted mower folds down completely within approx. 5 seconds. To interrupt the folding-down process, close the stop cock (4).

„ To push off the side mounted mower slowly, actuate the hand pump using the lever (2).

ð The side mounted mower folds down due to its dead weight as soon as the dead point has been exceeded.

Æ The side mounted mower must be located completely on the ground.

„

Move all stop cocks back to their basic position, refer to page 346

.

„ Dismount the Minimess hose (1).

„ Remove the lever (2) from the holder of the hand pump.

25.2.2

Emergency unfolding of the side mounted mowers

WARNING

Increased risk of injury when operating the machine via emergency manual operation

If the machine is operated via emergency manual operation, functions are executed immediately and without confirmation prompts. Thus there is an increased risk of injury.

ü Only persons who are familiar with the machine are permitted to perform an emergency manual operation.

ü The executing person must know which machine parts are actuated by controlling the valves.

„ Ensure that there is nobody in the danger zone.

„ The valves must only be controlled from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the valves.

To move the side mounted mowers to the transport position if the hydraulics fails, the side mounted mowers can be folded up via emergency manual operation.

348

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Mounting location

Malfunction, Cause and Remedy 25

Emergency manual operation 25.2

BM000-156

The "Hand pump" control block (2) for emergency manual operation is on the left-hand machine side behind the maintenance flap (1).

Basic position of stop cocks

WARNING

Risk of injury or machine damage due to unforeseeable movement of the machine

If the stop cock of the parking brake is not in the basic position, the parking brake is released and the machine may move unforeseeably. As a result, people or machine parts in the operating zone may be injured or damaged.

„ Make sure that the stop cock is in the basic position.

BM000-157

„ Check before emergency manual operation that all stop cocks (1, 2, 3, 4, 5) are in the basic position.

3

4

5

Pos.

1

2

Designation

Parking brake

Basic position

Horizontal position

Locking side mounted mower left Vertical position (open)

Locking right side mounted mower Vertical position (open)

Lift/lower left side mounted mower. Horizontal position (closed)

Lift/lower right side mounted mower.

Horizontal position (closed)

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 349

25 Malfunction, Cause and Remedy

25.2

Emergency manual operation

Fold up left side mounted mower

BM000-160

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

ü All stop cocks are in the basic position,

refer to page 349 .

„ Swivel the maintenance flap to the side.

„ Connect the Minimess hose (1) from the rear storage compartment to the Minimess connection "P" (3) and the Minimess connection (4).

„ Insert the lever (2) from the scope of delivery of the machine into the holder of the hand pump.

„ To fold up the side mounted mower completely, actuate the hand pump using the lever (2) until the side mounted mower left is in the transport position.

Checking locking

BM000-161

„ Check whether the journal (1) of the side mounted mower is positioned completely in the interlocking claw (2).

„ If not, continue to fold up the side mounted mower.

350

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Fold up right side mounted mower

Malfunction, Cause and Remedy 25

Emergency manual operation 25.2

BM000-162

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

ü All stop cocks are in the basic position,

refer to page 349 .

„ Swivel the maintenance flap to the side.

„ Connect the Minimess hose (1) from the rear storage compartment to the Minimess connection "P" (3) and the Minimess connection (4).

„ Insert the lever (2) from the scope of delivery of the machine into the holder of the hand pump.

„ To fold up the side mounted mower completely, actuate the hand pump using the lever (2) until the side mounted mower left is in the transport position.

Checking locking

BM000-161

„ Check whether the journal (1) of the side mounted mower is positioned completely in the interlocking claw (2).

„ If not, continue to fold up the side mounted mower.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 351

25 Malfunction, Cause and Remedy

25.3

External starting of the machine

25.3

External starting of the machine

352

BM000-016

The power supply of the machine is 24 V. Two 12-volt batteries are connected in series in the battery compartment (4) to supply the vehicle electronics with 24 V.

If necessary the engine can be started with jump leads and an external voltage source (24 V) if required.

The voltage of the external voltage source must correspond to the voltage of the vehicle electronics (24 V).

The vehicle electronics will be damaged if an external voltage source with a higher or lower voltage is used.

Connecting the jump leads

„ The circuit is open (LED on main battery switch is not lit),

refer to page 204 .

„ Remove the cover cap (1).

„ First connect the positive cable to the positive pole of the external voltage source, then connect it to the external start connection (3) under the battery compartment (4).

„ Then connect the negative cable to the negative terminal of the external voltage source first and then to the ground connection (2) under the battery compartment.

Starting the engine

„

Press the main battery switch to close the circuit, refer to page 204 .

Æ The main battery switch LED is lit.

„ Start the engine.

Remove the jump leads after the engine starts

„ Disconnect negative cable from earth connection (2).

„ Disconnect negative cable from negative pole of external voltage source.

„ Disconnect the positive cable from the external start connection (3).

„ Disconnect positive cable from positive pole of external voltage source.

„ Attach the cover cap (1).

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

25.4

Malfunction, Cause and Remedy 25

Calibrate mower load relief 25.4

Calibrate mower load relief

Calibrate mower load relief front mounted mower

ü The machine is parked on a stable, horizontal and even surface.

ü The machine height has been moved to the field position.

ü For the "Side shift front mounted mower" version: The front mounted mower is in the central position,

refer to page 209

.

ü The mowing functions "Mower load relief calibration front mounted mower" menu has been opened.

„ Press the "Start calibration" key.

„ Lower the front mounted mower to the ground using the control lever,

refer to page 87

.

„ Hold down the "Lift front mounted mower" key on the control lever until the message

"Calibration successful" is displayed in the terminal,

refer to page 87 .

„ To end the calibration process, press "OK".

Calibrate mower load relief of right side mounted mower

ü The machine is parked on a stable, horizontal and even surface.

ü The machine height has been moved to the field position.

ü The mowing functions menu "Mower load relief right mower" is open.

„ Lower the side mounted mowers to the ground,

refer to page 87 .

„ Press the "Start calibration" key.

„

Lower the right side mounted mower using the control lever to the ground, refer to page 87

.

„ Hold down the "Right side mounted mower" key until "Calibration successful" is displayed in the terminal,

refer to page 87 .

„ To end the calibration process, press "OK".

Calibrate mower load relief of left side mounted mower

ü The machine is parked on a stable, horizontal and even surface.

ü The machine height has been moved to the field position.

ü The mowing functions menu "Mower load relief left mower" is open.

„ Lower the side mounted mowers to the ground,

refer to page 87 .

„ Press the "Start calibration" key.

„

Lower the left side mounted mower using the control lever to the ground, refer to page 87

.

„ Hold down the "Lift left side mounted mower" key until "Calibration successful" is displayed

in the terminal, refer to page 87

.

„ To end the calibration process, press "OK".

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 353

25 Malfunction, Cause and Remedy

25.5

Calibrate traction drive

25.5

Calibrate traction drive

Check the brake pedal for plausibility

ü The main mode switch is in the "Neutral mode" position.

ü The diesel engine has been started.

ü The travel function menu "Traction drive calibration" is open.

„ To start calibration, press "Start calibration" in the terminal.

„ Fully actuate the brake pedal for several seconds until "Calibration successful" is displayed in the terminal.

„ To end the calibration process, press "OK".

25.6

Calibrate rear axle straight-ahead position

1 2

EQ003-205

This calibration determines the straight-ahead position of the rear axle.

ü The travel function menu "Axle calibration straight-ahead position" is open in the terminal.

ü The diesel engine has been started.

ü The main mode switch is in the "Road mode" position.

WARNING! Risk of accidents when calibrating on public roads! Do not perform calibration on public roads.

„ Perform calibration on a straight and flat path.

„ To start calibration, press "Start calibration".

„ With the help of the display (2) and the control lever accelerate the machine to 5 km/h.

„ Use the display (1) to ensure that the machine is travelling straight ahead.

When the arrow in the display (1) points to "0" then the machine is travelling straight ahead.

When the arrow in the display (1) points to "0":

„ Correct the steering angle.

„ Once the message "Calibration successful" appears in the terminal, stop the machine.

„ To end the calibration process, press "OK".

354

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

26

Repairs, maintenance and settings by technicians 26

Repairs, maintenance and settings by technicians

26.1

Setting the sensors ..................................................................................................... 356

26.2

Jacking up the machine .............................................................................................. 357

26.3

Calibrating the front and rear axle............................................................................... 359

26.4

Maintaining the rear axle with front wheel drive version ............................................. 364

26.4.1 Checking the hub bearing of the rear axle, with front wheel drive version.................. 364

26.5

Change engine coolant ............................................................................................... 365

26.6

Change transfer gearbox filter..................................................................................... 365

26.7

Setting the lifting height at the front mounted mower.................................................. 366

This chapter describes repair, maintenance and adjustment work on the machine which may be performed by qualified technicians only. The chapter "Personnel qualification of the technicians"

must be read and observed in full, refer to page 18

.

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety instructions

If the relevant safety instructions are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ To avoid accidents, the relevant safety instructions must be read and observed,

refer to page 17 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

refer to page 31

.

WARNING

Risk of injury or damage to the machine due to incorrect repair, maintenance and setting work.

Machines that are not repaired, maintained or set by technicians can exhibit faults caused by a lack of knowledge. As a result, people may be seriously injured or killed.

„ Only an authorised technician may carry out repair, maintenance and setting work at the machine.

„ Observe the qualification of technicians,

refer to page 18 .

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 355

26 Repairs, maintenance and settings by technicians

26.1

Setting the sensors

26.1

Setting the sensors

Sensor M12

DV000-002

The dimension between the switching flag (2) and the sensor (1) must correspond to X=3 mm .

„ Loosen the nuts (3) on both sides of the sensor.

„ Turn the nuts (3) until the dimension X=3 mm is reached.

„ Tighten the nuts (3).

The tightening torque of all sensors is 10 Nm .

Sensor M18

356

DV000-003

The dimension between the switching flag (2) and the sensor (1) must be X=4 mm .

„ Loosen the nuts (3) on both sides of the sensor.

„ Turn the nuts (3) until the dimension X=4 mm is reached.

„ Tighten the nuts (3).

The tightening torque of all sensors is 20 Nm .

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

26.2

Repairs, maintenance and settings by technicians 26

Jacking up the machine 26.2

Jacking up the machine

WARNING

Danger to life caused by machine movement!

If the machine is not raised by means of a suitable hoist and if it is not securely supported, it may move unintentionally. As a result, people may be seriously or fatally injured.

„ When selecting the hoist, observe the axle loads on the type plate.

„ Only use jack stands with a permitted load-carrying capacity of at least 15 tonnes.

„ Only use hoists and jack stands with suitable holder and sufficiently dimensioned supporting surface.

„ Ensure sufficiently dimensioned contact surface for hoist and jack stand.

„

Securely support the raised machine, refer to page 31

.

Jack up the front wheel

1

2

3

BM000-345

„ Set the main mode switch to the "Maintenance mode" position.

„ The axles are fully lowered,

refer to page 89 .

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 31 .

„ Depending on which front wheel is to be jacked up, position the hoist (1) on the relevant side and insert it from the front under the front axle (3). In doing so, ensure that the jack stand is positioned at the outer edge of the front axle.

„ Lift the front axle using the hoist (1) until the wheel can rotate freely.

„ Safely support the front axle (3) on the lifted side using a jack stand (2) at the furthest possible outside point.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 357

26 Repairs, maintenance and settings by technicians

26.2

Jacking up the machine

Jack up rear axle

1

2

1

4

3

3

BM000-348

„ Set the main mode switch to the "Maintenance mode" position.

„ The axles are fully lowered,

refer to page 89 .

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 31 .

„ Lift the machine with a hoist (4) from behind from below the middle of the rear axle (2) until the distance between the rear wheels and the ground is approx. 5 cm.

„ Safely support the machine from the side by placing jack stands (1, 3) under the main frame.

„ Remove the hoist (4).

ð The rear axle lowers slightly.

1

358

BM000-090

2

3

1

4

2

3

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Repairs, maintenance and settings by technicians 26

Calibrating the front and rear axle 26.3

NOTICE! Damage to the machine by lifting the rear axle too high above the V-arm (1).

Only lift the rear axle above the V-arm (2) until the pendulum stop (3) is against the stop (2).

„ Lift the rear axle using a hoist (4) from the side (between the mower and rear axle) as far back as possible below the V-arm (1) until the wheels can rotate freely.

1

2

26.3

BM000-091

„ Use at least one jack stand (2) below the rear axle (1) to ensure the widest possible safe support.

Calibrating the front and rear axle

The front and rear axle must be calibrated in the following cases:

• The hydraulic cylinders have been replaced.

• The position sensor has been replaced.

• The KMC has been replaced.

ü The side mounted mowers are in the transport position:

„ To prevent collisions with the side guard, observe the transport inclination (cutting height) of the side mounted mowers.

„ Lock the pendulum stop (i.e. swinging is not possible).

„ Lock the handle.

„ Make sure the side guards of the side mounted mowers on the right-hand and left-hand side are folded into the transport position.

ü

Set the tyre pressure refer to page 68

.

ü The machine is parked on a stable, horizontal and even surface.

ü The technician level has been called at the terminal.

ü The main mode switch is in the "Maintenance mode" position.

ü The voltage values of sensor B09 "Position front axle" and sensor B07 "Position rear axle" are between 3.0 V and 4.5 V if the axles are lowered fully.

ü The voltage values of sensor B09 "Position front axle" and sensor B07 "Position rear axle" are between 5.5 V and 7 V if the axles are raised fully.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 359

26 Repairs, maintenance and settings by technicians

26.3

Calibrating the front and rear axle

EQ003-144

„ Call the "Calibration of end positions" axles menu.

„ To start axle calibration, press "Start calibration".

Measuring the machine height with lower end position

„ Lower the front and rear axle fully, press on the keypad longer than 15 seconds so that all pistons are activated.

„ Make sure that the cylinders of the front and rear axle have been retracted fully.

Measuring point front axle

360

BM000-178

The measuring point is located at the height of the front axle.

„ To determine the height of the front axle, measure between the ground and the tread of the machine platform.

„ Press the key (1).

ð An input mask opens.

„ Enter the measured value in the input mask.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Repairs, maintenance and settings by technicians 26

Calibrating the front and rear axle 26.3

Measuring point rear axle

BM000-179

The measuring point is located at the height of the rear axle.

„ To determine the height of the rear axle, measure between the ground and the underside of the machine’s cooler frame.

„ Press the key (2).

ð An input mask opens.

„ Enter the measured value in the input mask.

Measuring point total height

BM000-182

„ To determine the total height of the machine, measure between the ground and the highest point of the machine.

„ Press the key (3).

ð An input mask opens.

„ Enter the measured value in the input mask.

Measuring the machine height with upper end position

„ Raise the front and rear axle fully, press on the keypad longer than 15 seconds so that all pistons are activated.

„ Make sure that the cylinders of the front and rear axle have been extended fully.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 361

26 Repairs, maintenance and settings by technicians

26.3

Calibrating the front and rear axle

Measuring point front axle

BM000-183

The measuring point is located at the height of the front axle.

„ To determine the height of the front axle, measure between the ground and the tread of the machine platform.

„ Press the key (1).

ð An input mask opens.

„ Enter the measured value in the input mask.

Measuring point rear axle

BM000-184

The measuring point is located at the height of the rear axle.

„ To determine the height of the rear axle, measure between the ground and the underside of the machine’s cooler frame.

„ Press the key (2).

ð An input mask opens.

„ Enter the measured value in the input mask.

362

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Height rear axle

„ Lower the rear axle, press

Repairs, maintenance and settings by technicians 26

Calibrating the front and rear axle 26.3

on the keypad.

BM000-180

„ Make sure the road/field piston (1) has been retracted fully.

Measuring point rear axle

BM000-185

The measuring point is located at the height of the rear axle.

„ To determine the height of the rear axle, measure between the ground and the underside of the machine’s cooler frame.

„ Press the key (1).

ð An input mask opens.

„ Enter the measured value in the input mask.

„ Press the "OK" key.

Æ Calibration of the front and rear axle has been completed.

Check calibration

„ Turn the Main Mode Switch to "Road mode".

„ Lower the front and rear axle to the road position, press

15 seconds so that all pistons are activated.

on the keypad longer than

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 363

26 Repairs, maintenance and settings by technicians

26.4

Maintaining the rear axle with front wheel drive version

BM000-180

„ Check whether the road/field piston (1) has been retracted fully.

„ Measure the height of the machine between the ground and the highest point of the machine.

„ Make sure the measured value is 4.00 m (tolerance: -0.03 mm).

If the measured value deviates:

„ Carry out calibration again.

Maintaining the rear axle with front wheel drive version 26.4

26.4.1

Checking the hub bearing of the rear axle, with front wheel drive version

The hub bearings of the rear axle are subject to wear. The lifetime of the bearings depends on the working conditions, load, speed, setting and lubrication of the bearings.

Check the hub bearings for wear:

„

„Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 31

.

„ Raise the rear axle until the wheels no longer have contact with the ground.

„ Turn the wheels one after the other in both directions to determine possible hard stops or resistance.

„ Quickly turn the wheels one after the other to determine possible noises, vibrations or impacts.

ð Wear is determined at a hub bearing.

„ Replace the hub bearing and all oil seals.

Determine the bearing clearance of the hub bearings:

„

„Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 31

.

„

Raise the rear axle until the wheels no longer have contact with the ground, refer to page 357

.

„ Take hold of the wheel from the top and bottom and check the clearance by carrying out a wobble test. (To check the clearance, it might be helpful to use a lever between the wheel and ground.)

„ Make sure the clearance does not originate from the suspension or the steering knuckles.

ð Clearance is determined at a hub bearing.

„ Have a qualified service centre set the bearing clearance.

364

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

26.5

Repairs, maintenance and settings by technicians 26

Change engine coolant 26.5

Change engine coolant

Drain engine coolant

21

2

26.6

BM000-136

The drain nozzles (1, 2) are at the back on the right of the engine.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

ü The machine has cooled down to ambient temperature.

ü A suitable container is available for escaping engine coolant.

„ Unscrew the locking cap on the drain nozzle (1).

„ Take the drain hose out of the rear storage compartment.

„ Place one end of the drain hose into the collecting vessel.

„ Screw the other end of the drain hose on the drain nozzle.

ð This automatically opens the drain valve and the engine coolant drains into the collecting vessel.

„ Disconnect the drain hose and lock the drain nozzle (1) with a locking cap.

„ Unscrew the locking cap on the drain nozzle (2).

„ Place one end of the drain hose into the collecting vessel.

„ Screw the other end of the drain hose on the drain nozzle.

ð This automatically opens the drain valve and the engine coolant drains into the collecting vessel.

„ Remove the hose and close the drain nozzle (2) with the locking cap.

Top up the engine coolant

„ Top up the engine coolant,

refer to page 257 .

Change transfer gearbox filter

ü

The gear oil is drained from the transfer gearbox, refer to page 331

.

ü

The machine is shut down and secured, refer to page 31

.

ü The right side hood is open.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 365

26 Repairs, maintenance and settings by technicians

26.7

Setting the lifting height at the front mounted mower

1

BM000-344

The filter (1) is located behind the transfer gearbox and can be accessed from the right-hand side of the machine.

1

2

BM000-342

„ To dismount the hydraulic line (1), loosen the nut (2).

1

2

1

3

26.7

5

4

BM000-343

„ Unscrew the filter unit (3) out of the transfer gearbox and extract it.

„ Dismount the filter element (2) from the support (1) and mount the new filter element.

„ Screw the filter unit (3) into the transfer gearbox.

„ To assemble the hydraulic line (5) tighten the nuts (4).

„

Fill up with new gear oil, refer to page 331

.

Setting the lifting height at the front mounted mower

To change the lifting height, the top link (3) can be attached on the front mounted mower in two positions.

366

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Repairs, maintenance and settings by technicians 26

Setting the lifting height at the front mounted mower 26.7

BM000-141

Position (I) is used with a level surface.

In position (II) a slight change in the tilt of the front mounted mower is achieved. This keeps the cutting height constant when making ground adjustments on very uneven land.

Changing the position of the top link

ü

The front mounted mower is placed on the ground and securely supported, refer to page 31

or with "Parking support" version

: The machine is placed on the parking support, refer to page 216

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 31

.

„ Remove the linch pin (1).

„ Remove the bolt (2).

„ To depressurise the top link (3), follow the instructions at the terminal for depressurisation in the "Decouple front mounted mower" menu,

refer to page 172

.

„ Position the top link and secure it with a bolt (2) and linch pin (1).

„ Set the parameter KMC-60 "Top link position" in the terminal in the mowing functions menu

"Cutting height settings".

„ Calibrate the mower load relief,

refer to page 353 .

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 367

27 Storage

27 Storage

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety instructions

If the relevant safety instructions are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ To avoid accidents, the relevant safety instructions must be read and observed,

refer to page 17 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

refer to page 31

.

Placing the machine in storage at the end of the harvest season is the best possible way to preserve the machine.

„ Park the machine in a weatherproof and dry place which is not in close proximity to corrosive substances.

„ Set the tyre pressure to the maximum permitted value,

refer to page 68 .

„ Protect the tyres against external influences such as oil, grease or direct sunlight.

„ Clean the machine thoroughly.

Chaff and dirt attract moisture which causes steel parts to start rusting.

368

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Storage 27

NOTICE

Damage to the machine due to water damages with high-pressure cleaner

If the water jet from a high-pressure cleaner is aimed directly at bearings and electrical/ electronic components, these parts can be damaged.

„ Do not aim the water jet from high-pressure cleaner at bearings and electrics/electronic components.

„ Lubricate the machine according to the lubrication chart,

refer to page 308

. Do not wipe off any grease leaking from the bearing positions because the ring of grease offers additional protection against moisture.

„ Grease the threads of setting screws and similar items.

„ Release the springs.

„

Lubricate the bolts on the locks on the right/left side mounted mowers, refer to page 192 .

„ Extend the universal shafts. Lubricate the inner tubes with grease.

„ Grease the grease nipples on the universal joint of the universal shafts as well as on bearing rings of the protective tubes,

refer to page 306 . Follow the operating instructions of the

universal shaft manufacturer.

„ Liberally grease the uncoated piston rods of all hydraulic cylinders and insert as far as possible.

„ Wet all lever joints and bearing positions, which cannot be lubricated, with oil.

„ Touch up damaged paint and preserve uncoated areas thoroughly with rust protection agent.

„ Check that all moveable components move freely. If required, dismount, clean, grease and remount.

„ If parts need to be replaced, use only KRONE original spare parts.

INFORMATION

Write down all repair jobs which must be performed by the next harvest and arrange for them to be done with sufficient lead time. Your KRONE dealer is better able to perform maintenance service and any required repairs outside the harvest season.

Engine area

Measures for storing the diesel engine when not in use for a period from 30 days to 12 months

„ Fill the fuel tank, and coolant tank up to the maximum permitted filling level. Choose the specification of consumables according to the expected outside temperatures while the machine is in storage.

„ Drain the fuel tank and prefilter.

„ The coolant must contain at least 50% anti-corrosion antifreeze.

„ Lower the urea tank to the minimum permitted filling level.

„ Clean the outside of the engine.

„ Spray or apply the anti-corrosion agent Rustilo DWX 30 onto unpainted parts and rusty areas on the engine (excluding electrical connections).

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 369

27 Storage

Measures for placing the diesel engine in service again after storing when not in use for a period from 30 days to 12 months

„ Before starting up the machine, perform the maintenance interval "Every 10 hours, at least daily".

„ Change the engine oil if it is more than 2 years old.

„ Change the oil filter.

„ Examine the engine for leaks, soiling and damage.

„ Check the coolant level.

„ Drain off the water and any sediments which have accumulated from the fuel tank and check the water separator on the fuel prefilter, drain off water if necessary.

„ Perform a visual inspection to check the starter, alternator and refrigerating compressor.

„ Check the ribbed V-belts on the diesel engine and replace if necessary.

„ Check the diesel engine power supply.

„ Make certain the fuel supply is connected.

„ Fill the urea tank up to the maximum filling quantity.

Restarting the diesel engine after storing it when not in use from 30 days to

12 months

„

Check the oil pressure display immediately after starting, refer to page 195

.

„ Check the air filter pressure display.

„ Let the diesel engine run until it reaches operating temperature.

370

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

28

Waste disposal 28

Waste disposal

After the service life of the machine has expired, the individual components of the machine must be disposed of properly. The currently applicable country-specific waste disposal directives and the concerning valid laws must be observed.

Metal parts

• All metal parts must be brought to a metal recycling centre.

• The parts must be freed from operating fluids and lubricants (gearbox oil, oil from hydraulic system, ...) before being scrapped.

• The operating fluids and lubricants must be brought separately to an environmentally friendly disposal point or recycling centre.

Operating fluids and lubricants

• Operating fluids and lubricants (diesel fuel, coolant, gearbox oil, oil from hydraulic system,

…) must be brought to a disposal point for waste oil.

Synthetic materials

• All synthetic materials must be brought to a recycling centre for synthetic materials.

Rubber

• Rubber parts (hoses, tyres, …) must be brought to a rubber recycling centre.

Electronic scrap

• All electronic parts must be brought to a disposal point for electronic scrap.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 371

29 Appendix

29.1

CCI.Control Mobile

29 Appendix

29.1

CCI.Control Mobile

29.1.1

Device system requirements

INFORMATION

In order to avoid data losses a backup of the device must be made by means of iTunes before the application or the iPad operating system (iOS) is updated. If problems occur after update, the functional version must be restored.

Before bringing the CCI.Control Mobile into service the following prerequisites are necessary:

• An Apple iPad with at least iOS 8.1.3 or later version is required.

• The iPad must be provided with mobile internet (UMTS, LTE or CDMA).

• A data plan with a mobile service provider is necessary.

• The application “CCI.Control Mobile” must be installed and can be downloaded free of charge via the AppStore.

29.1.2

iOS settings

29.1.2.1

General

EQ000-441

INFORMATION

The process data incurring by automatic logging are saved as order in the last used order set.

If no last used order set is available, a new order set is generated automatically for the order.

372

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Appendix 29

CCI.Control Mobile 29.1

Designation

Automatic logging

LOG mode

Alarm when CAN bus is not available

Alarm when machine is not accessible

Speed measurement

Explanation

The automatic logging records process data even if no order is edited.

This option enables Control Mobile to log process data even if the Control Mobile is not logged on as Task Controller on the data bus.

The LOG mode can e.g. be used when an ISOBUS terminal for machine control is logged on as Task Controller on the data bus.

In case the Control Mobile got disconnected from the CAN, an alarm signal sounds.

In case Control Mobile got disconnected from the machine, an alarm signal sounds.

Displays the speed on the tractor dashboard based on the results of the radar sensor or the wheel sensor.

29.1.2.2

Geofencing

EQ000-442

Designation

Automatic order start when reaching the field.

Query before order starts automatically

Explanation

With this option activated, orders start automatically as soon as the field boundary is reached.

If the field is left, the running order is stopped automatically after one minute.

If this option is activated and another order is running at the same time the order starts automatically, a note that the running order has to be stopped or terminated first is displayed.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 373

29 Appendix

29.1

CCI.Control Mobile

29.1.2.3

Farmpilot

EQ000-443

Designation

Active

Server

User name

Password

29.1.2.4

FMIS interface

Explanation

Activates the import or export of orders via farmpilot.

Select the desired server.

Enter the farmpilot user name.

Enter the farmpilot password.

EQ000-444

Designation

Active

FMIS

Registration key

Fleet management

Explanation

Activates the import and export of orders via FMIS.

Select the desired FMIS which is to be used.

Enter the registration key (e.g. user name) for FMIS.

In case this option is activated, the positions of the other fleet members are displayed on the map.

374

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Appendix 29

CCI.Control Mobile 29.1

29.1.2.5

FTP upload

EQ000-445

Designation

Server

Standard directory on the server

User name

Password

Automatic download

Explanation

Enter the address for the desired FTP server.

Enter the directory in which the source directory “TODO” is located on the FTP server.

Enter the user name for accessing the FTP server.

Enter the password for accessing the FTP server.

Activates the FTP download.

New order sets are now imported automatically into the source directory.

29.1.2.6

Export

EQ000-446

Designation

Always exporting all master data

Explanation

With this option activated, all manually entered master data is exported when exporting order sets.

Sending log With this option activated, the recorded routes and machine values are transmitted with an export.

Standard recipient for e-mails The entered e-mail address is used by default for exporting

PDF and CSV reports as well as for exporting order sets via email.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 375

29 Appendix

29.1

CCI.Control Mobile

29.1.2.7

Automatic recording of the field

EQ000-447

Designation Explanation

Standard working width [m] 3 Enter the standard working width for automatic land parcel recording.

Always using standard working width

With this option activated, the above stated standard working width is used for automatic land parcel recording.

If this option is deactivated, a working width transmitted from the machine is then used, if available.

Basic information for calculating field size:

Select if the size of the land parcel is to be calculated for the whole area or the worked area.

29.1.3

Start-up

29.1.3.1

Configure WLAN (WiFi) connection

ü CCI.Control Mobile is installed on the tablet.

EQ000-312

„ Press in the start screen.

376

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Appendix 29

CCI.Control Mobile 29.1

EQ000-313

„ Press “WLAN” (9).

„ Select the name (10) of the control unit.

„ Select the desired network and press “Join Anyway” (11).

EQ000-314

„ Enter the WLAN key (12). The WLAN key is to be found on the front side of the control unit.

EQ000-315

„ Activate “Automatic connection” (14).

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 377

29 Appendix

29.1

CCI.Control Mobile

29.1.3.2

Enter export data

EQ000-316

„ Press “CCI.Control Mobile” (9).

EQ000-317

„ Enter user data for the export of the order set.

INFORMATION

If no user data is existing, consult a KRONE service partner.

29.1.4

Operation

29.1.4.1

Main menu

378

EQ000-458

„ Press in order to start “CCI.Control Mobile”.

Æ The display shows the main menu.

The following functions can be selected:

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Icon

29.1.4.2

“Customer” menu

Add new customer

Designation

Orders

Live View

Customers

Notifications

Working hours

Appendix 29

CCI.Control Mobile 29.1

Explanation

It is possible to create and edit orders.

Information on current orders, customers and machines can be displayed.

It is possible to create and edit customers.

Appearing system notifications and error messages can be displayed.

Working hours of up to five persons can be recorded simultaneously.

EQ000-459

ü Main menu is open,

refer to page 378

.

„ To open the menu, press .

ð The display shows menu “Customer”.

„ Press in order to create a new customer.

An input field opens:

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 379

29 Appendix

29.1

CCI.Control Mobile

EQ000-320

„ Enter the corresponding data and confirm with .

Create a land parcel

EQ000-460

ü The input window “Customer Details” is open.

„ In order to create a land parcel, press

The following functions can be selected:

.

380

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Appendix 29

CCI.Control Mobile 29.1

Icon Explanation

Add a new point on the map.

Add new storage location.

Field entrance

Delete the recently added point.

„ To draw in a land parcel, navigate to the desired area on the map and place several points using to limit the land parcel.

„ In order to add field entrances, press land parcel.

and place them on the correct positions of the

„ In order to add storage locations, press land parcel.

and place them on the correct positions of the

„ Enter the data of the land parcel into an input mask (21) and confirm with .

Edit, display, search for customer.

EQ000-322

ü The “Customer” menu is open.

„ In order to display or edit a customer, select the desired name of the customer (22) in the customer overview.

„ In order to search for a customer, enter the desired name of the customer in the

“Search” (23) field.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 381

29 Appendix

29.1

CCI.Control Mobile

Deleting customers

EQ000-323

„ In order to delete a customer, select the desired name of the customer and press .

29.1.4.3

“Orders” menu

Creating a new order

EQ000-461

ü Main menu is open,

refer to page 378

.

„ To open the menu, press .

ð The display shows the “Orders” menu.

„ Press in order to create a new order.

An input field opens:

382

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Appendix 29

CCI.Control Mobile 29.1

EQ000-325

„ The mandatory fields marked with an asterisk (*) must be filled in.

„ Select an already existing field on the map.

Alternatively, a new field can be recorded automatically as follows:

EQ000-462

„ In order to record a field, press “Record automatically” (39).

„

Starting the order, refer to page 385

.

Æ The automatic record starts. As soon as the order is stopped or terminated, the field contour is displayed and the field size is calculated.

If the recorded routes of an order result in several contours that are not connected, the icon (40) is displayed and only the first closed contour is used for the field.

EQ000-328

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 383

29 Appendix

29.1

CCI.Control Mobile

Displaying orders and navigating to orders

EQ000-329

ü The “Orders” menu is open.

„ Press in order to display an order.

„ Press in order to navigate to an order.

Deleting and filtering orders

384

EQ000-330

„ In order to delete an order, press .

„ In order to delete one or more orders, select one or more orders and press .

„ In order to leave the window without deleting orders, press

„ In order to filter orders by specific criteria, press the keys (28).

.

Searching or exporting orders

Depending on the setting, the selected order set can be exported via e-mail, FTP server or

Farm Management System, refer to page 378

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Appendix 29

CCI.Control Mobile 29.1

EQ000-331

ü The “Orders” menu is open.

„ In order to search an order, enter the desired name of the order into the field .

„ Press in order to export an order set.

Æ The selected order set is being exported.

29.1.4.4

“Live View” menu

Information on current orders, customers and machines can be displayed in the “Live View” menu.

EQ000-468

„ Press

in the main menu, refer to page 378

or directly select the desired order in the “Orders” menu.

Overview keys

Icon Explanation

“Back”

Total counter values

All machine data as a list

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 385

29 Appendix

29.1

CCI.Control Mobile

Icon Explanation

Taking a picture with comment

Picture and comment to the order are saved.

Entering comment

The comment to the order is saved.

Overview of recent notifications

“Closing time” key (interrupts data recording and internet communication)

Pausing the order

Terminating the order

Overview icons in the status bar (32)

Icon Explanation

No internet connection

No GPS signal

No connection to adapter

No connection to ISOBUS

29.1.4.5

“Demo” menu

386

EQ000-345

ü Main Menu is open,

refer to page 378

.

„ Press and select “Demo” (36) in the selection window.

ð A selection window with demos opens.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Appendix 29

CCI.Control Mobile 29.1

EQ000-346

„ To play a demo, select the corresponding view.

Æ The selected demo is played.

29.1.4.6

“Information” menu

29.1.5

EQ000-347

ü Main Menu is open,

refer to page 378

.

„ Press select “Information” (37) in the selection window.

Æ The following information is shown in the “Information” menu:

• The version number of the application

• The ID, name and connection status of farmpilot

• The registration key and connection status of Farm Management System

Malfunction, cause and remedy

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety instructions

If the relevant safety instructions are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ To avoid accidents, the relevant safety instructions must be read and observed,

refer to page 17 .

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 387

29 Appendix

29.1

CCI.Control Mobile

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

refer to page 31

.

Throughout the rest of this description the CCI i10 and the KRONE SmartConnect are referred to as “control unit”.

Malfunction: Connection to control unit cannot be established or is not permitted.

Possible causes

The “Hand-off” function in connection with several

“Apple” devices with the same

“Apple” ID possibly leads to the case that the devices establish a WLAN connection to each other. Because of this, the WLAN connection to the control unit is interrupted.

Remedy

„ In the iOS settings, deactivate the “Hand-off” function of the device, which is to establish the connection to the control unit.

The iPad automatically connects to the WLAN hotspot which is nearby.

„ Deactivate automatic connection with corresponding WLAN hotspots in the iOS settings.

An existing WLAN connection may become unstable by

WLAN-based location services.

„ Deactivate WLAN location in iOS settings.

The model number of the iPad is MD368LL/A (not compatible with CCI i10 adapter).

„ Only use devices compatible with the control unit.

The application CCI.Control

Mobile was left and/or ended or the tablet was switched to stand-by mode.

„ Reliable functionality is only guaranteed as long as the application is active and is not running in the background.

When using the application, note the following:

• Do not end the application.

• Do not start any further applications.

• Do not activate stand-by mode.

Malfunction: The rechargeable battery of the tablet is discharging, even though a charging adapter is connected.

Possible causes

The used charging adapter and/or charging cable does not meet the requirements to charge a tablet during use.

Remedy

„ Use charging adapter included with delivery or charging adapter certified by “Apple” and suitable for the tablet.

Malfunction: No machine is displayed even though the tablet is connected to the control unit on the ISOBUS.

388

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Appendix 29

CCI.Control Mobile 29.1

Possible causes

Another Task Controller is on the ISOBUS and is connected to the machine.

Remedy

„ Deactivate other Task Controllers so that CCI.Control

Mobile can establish the connection to the machine.

„ If available, change the active Task Controller in the operation of the machine.

„ If the machine supports the Datalogger mode, activate it in the settings of the tablet.

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 389

30 Index

30 Index

Icons

"Control units overview" menu.......................... 126

"Day counter" menu.......................................... 122

"Error history" menu ......................................... 125

"Navigation scroll wheel" function..................... 105

“Active Errors” menu......................................... 124

“Counters” menu .............................................. 115

“Customer Counter” menu................................ 116

“Customer” menu ............................................. 379

“Demo” menu ................................................... 386

“Diagnostics” menu explanation ....................... 142

“Error” menu ..................................................... 124

“Information” menu ........................................... 387

“Live View” menu.............................................. 385

“Orders” menu .................................................. 382

“Total Counter” menu ....................................... 123

Numerical

12 V sockets ..................................................... 100

A

Activating cruise control ................................... 198

Activating horn.................................................... 72

Actuating headlamp flasher ................................ 75

Actuating service brake ...................................... 77

Additional equipment and spare parts ................ 18

Adjustable air nozzles ...................................... 165

Adjusting outside rear-view mirrors .................... 84

Adjusting the front mounted mower side guards

......................................................................... 222

Adjusting the scraper sheet .............................. 231

Adjusting the side mounted mower side guards

......................................................................... 226

Air-cushioned comfort seat............................... 155

Appendix .......................................................... 372

Applicable documents ........................................ 11

Applying parking brake ..................................... 201

Automatic climate control ................................... 93

Automatic recording of the field ........................ 376

B

Basic position of stop cocks ..................... 346, 349

Basic safety instructions ..................................... 17

Batteries ........................................................... 323

Behaviour after the engine has stalled ............. 195

Behaviour in case of voltage flashover of overhead

lines .................................................................... 26

Behaviour in dangerous situations and in case of

accidents ............................................................ 30

Bringing up menu level ..................................... 140

390

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Index 30

C

Cabin ................................................................ 154

Calibrate mower load relief............................... 353

Calibrate rear axle straight-ahead position....... 354

Calibrate traction drive ..................................... 354

Calibrating the front and rear axle .................... 359

Carrying out a visual inspection at the receiver/

dryer ................................................................. 266

Carrying out oil level check and oil and filter

element changes safely...................................... 32

CCI.Control Mobile ........................................... 372

Change engine coolant .................................... 365

Change kraftband "belt drive of front mounted

mower" ............................................................. 286

Change oil ................................................ 333, 334

Change transfer gearbox filter .......................... 365

Changing blades for the “blade quick fastener”

version .............................................................. 292

Changing blades for the “blade screw connection”

version .............................................................. 291

Changing high-pressure filter ........................... 322

Changing kraftband “belt drive side mounted

mowers”............................................................ 283

Changing/saving parameter ............................. 142

Charging batteries ............................................ 324

Check before start-up ....................................... 154

Check filling level.............................................. 317

Check guard cloths........................................... 301

Check pipework of the engine cooling system and

the charge air ................................................... 259

Check pipework of the exhaust aftertreatment

system .............................................................. 260

Check the hub bearings for wear: .................... 364

Check/change blades ....................................... 290

Checking attachment of steering cylinder ........ 270

Checking deflector sheets ................................ 226

Checking engine oil level.................................. 249

Checking engine piping .................................... 258

Checking fitting of track rod .............................. 270

Checking fuel lines ........................................... 260

Checking hydraulic hoses ................................ 322

Checking kraftband .................................. 271, 278

Checking lockings of lateral mowers ................ 192

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Checking pipework in the air conditioning and

heating system ................................................. 258

Checking pipework of the air intake ................. 259

Checking pulley ........................................ 271, 279

Checking side guards of lateral mowers .......... 192

Checking the belt tension ................................. 272

Checking the blade for wear............................. 290

Checking the condition and filling quantity of

refrigerant ......................................................... 267

Checking the engine coolant level.................... 257

Checking the fire extinguisher .......................... 275

Checking the hub bearing of the rear axle, with

front wheel drive version .................................. 364

Checking the hub cover of the rear axle, with front

wheel drive version........................................... 271

Checking the profile clamp of the catalytic

converter .......................................................... 261

Checking the tines on the tine conditioner ....... 287

Checking the wear limit on cutting discs/mower

drums ............................................................... 294

Checking/adjusting the belt tension of the auger

drive.................................................................. 281

Checking/adjusting the belt tension of the front

mounted mower conditioner drive .................... 279

Checking/maintaining tyres .............................. 273

Checking/refilling windscreen washer system .. 264

Checking/replacing blade carrier ...................... 293

Checking/replacing cutting discs/mower drums 294

Checking/replacing linings on cutterbar ........... 295

Checking/replacing retaining bolts ................... 292

Checking/setting belt tension of fan drive and

exhaust fan ....................................................... 272

Checking/setting belt tension of rotating screen

drive.................................................................. 273

Checking/setting locking of side guards ........... 227

Checklist for initial operation ............................ 145

Chemicals........................................................... 25

Children in danger .............................................. 18

Cigarette lighter 12 V/24 V socket .................... 100

Cleaning air filter .............................................. 262

Cleaning and maintaining batteries .................. 324

Cleaning cooler and cooler compartment......... 269

Cleaning dust discharge valve ......................... 263

391

30 Index

Cleaning engine compartment with compressed air

......................................................................... 248

Cleaning fuel tank............................................. 250

Climbing up and down safely ............................. 28

Coming Home function ....................................... 83

Commissioning – mowing operation ................ 169

Components of air conditioning ........................ 265

Configure WLAN (WiFi) connection ................. 376

Connecting a battery ........................................ 327

Connecting the front mounted mower .............. 169

Consumables ............................................... 24, 64

Contact ................................................................. 2

Contact data of your dealer .................................. 2

Content of the storage compartments on the

machine .............................................................. 60

Control and Display Elements ............................ 69

Control and display elements on the keypad ..... 89

Control and display elements on the steering

column ................................................................ 72

Control of moving machine................................. 19

Control of the machine during operation ............ 19

Conversion table ................................................ 14

Coolant ............................................................... 67

Cooling box (version with "Insulated thermobox")

......................................................................... 167

Creating a surface ............................................ 119

Creating customer data record ......................... 116

Cross references ................................................ 11

Cruise control ................................................... 198

Cutterbar .......................................................... 287

Cutterbar side mounted mowers ...................... 299

392

D

Damaged compressor unit ................................. 27

Damaged hydraulic hoses .................................. 27

Danger associated with welding work ................ 29

Danger of fire...................................................... 25

Danger resulting from damage to the machine .. 20

Danger when driving on road and field............... 23

Danger zone because objects may shoot out .... 22

Danger zone between mower conditioner and

mowers ............................................................... 21

Danger zone due to trailing machine parts......... 22

Danger zone PTO shaft...................................... 21

Danger zone universal shaft............................... 21

Danger zone when drive is switched on ............. 22

Danger zones ..................................................... 20

Dangers arising from environment ..................... 25

Dangers for road travel....................................... 23

Dangers if the machine is not prepared properly for

road travel .......................................................... 23

Dangers in connection with certain activities:

checking and charging batteries......................... 30

Dangers in connection with certain activities:

climbing up and down......................................... 28

Dangers in connection with certain activities:

Working on the machine..................................... 28

Dangers in connection with certain activities:

working on wheels and tyres .............................. 30

Dangers when operating the machine on slopes 24

Data memory ...................................................... 58

Deactivating cruise control ............................... 199

Declaration of conformity.................................. 401

Decoupling the front mounted mower .............. 172

Deleting a surface ............................................ 120

Description display ........................................... 103

Description of the keys ..................................... 104

Determine the bearing clearance of the hub

bearings:........................................................... 364

Device system requirements ............................ 372

Diagnostic socket ISOBUS/diagnostic socket

KRONE............................................................. 101

Direct input “Field mode” .................................. 128

Directories and references ................................. 11

Dirt deposits in engine compartment ................ 248

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Index 30

Disconnecting the batteries .............................. 325

Dismounting the bottom flap............................. 234

Dismounting the cross conveyor ...................... 188

Dismounting the side mounted mowers ........... 177

Dismounting the standard swathing ................. 182

Dismounting/mounting the auger drive guard .. 278

Dismounting/mounting the conditioner drive guard

......................................................................... 277

Dismounting/mounting the guard for the front

mounted mower input gearbox ......................... 277

Display design .................................................. 102

Display for cruise control (5)............................. 132

Displays acceleration behaviour (1) ................. 131

Distributor blocks of central lubrication system 310

Drain condensation water from the water separator

of the fuel prefilter............................................. 251

Drain engine coolant ........................................ 365

Draining water and sediment............................ 250

Drawer for first-aid kit and operating instructions

......................................................................... 167

Driver's seat...................................................... 155

Driving and Transport ....................................... 191

Driving backward and stopping ........................ 199

Driving forwards and stopping .......................... 197

E

Electrical/electronic system fault ...................... 337

Emergency manual operation .......................... 345

Emergency unfolding of the side mounted mowers

................................................................. 345, 348

Engine and driving data display range ............. 129

Engine coolant.................................................. 256

Engine oil level ................................................. 249

Engine overview ............................................... 248

Ensuring functionality of safety devices ............. 22

Enter export data .............................................. 378

Environmental protection and disposal .............. 25

Ethernet ............................................................ 344

Export ............................................................... 375

Exporting customer data .................................. 122

External starting of the machine ....................... 352

F

Fahrersitz bedienen (bei Ausführung Standard)

......................................................................... 156

Farmpilot .......................................................... 374

Fast change of direction of travel (fast reversing)

......................................................................... 211

Field Mode........................................................ 208

Field mode on slopes ....................................... 209

Figures ............................................................... 12

Filling the lubricant tank.................................... 316

Fire extinguisher ................................................. 57

FMIS interface .................................................. 374

Fold down the front guard ................................ 216

Fold up left side mounted mower ..................... 350

Fold up right side mounted mower ................... 351

Folding down left side mounted mower ............ 347

Folding down right side mounted mower.......... 347

Folding down side guards into working position

......................................................................... 214

Folding up side guards into transport position.. 214

Folding up the front guard ................................ 215

Folding up/folding down side guards ................ 213

Front guard ....................................................... 215

Front mounted mower cutter bar ...................... 296

FTP upload ....................................................... 375

Fuel is harmful .................................................... 24

Fuel prefilter/water separator ........................... 251

Fuel/urea ............................................................ 67

Function description ........................................... 61

G

General............................................................. 372

General aspects ............................................... 166

Geofencing ....................................................... 373

GPS .................................................................. 344

GSM ................................................................. 344

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 393

30 Index

H

Hot liquids........................................................... 27

Hot surfaces ....................................................... 28

How to use this document .................................. 11

Hydraulic oil ...................................................... 319

I

Icons in figures ................................................... 12

Icons in the text .................................................. 12

Ignition lock ........................................................ 92

Impact damage protection system ................... 233

Importance of operating instructions .................. 17

Increasing cutting height at front mounted mower

with high-cut skids ............................................ 224

Increasing the cutting height at the side mounted

mowers by means of high-cut skids ................. 232

Indicator lamp for direction of travel and parking

brake (2) ........................................................... 131

Indicator lamp for machine height (6) ............... 133

Indicator lamp for PowerSplit (3) ...................... 131

Indicator lamp for traction control system (TC) (4)

......................................................................... 132

Indicator lamps - urea quality, errors or manipulation on the exhaust aftertreatment system

......................................................................... 114

Information area ............................................... 129

Information for enquiries and orders .............. 2, 60

Information on direction ...................................... 12

Information on This Document ........................... 11

Initial operation ................................................. 145

Input window .................................................... 105

Inside rear mirror .............................................. 166

Installing the batteries ...................................... 326

Installing the blades.......................................... 152

Instructional seat .............................................. 166

Intended use....................................................... 16

Interior lighting .................................................... 86

iOS settings ...................................................... 372

J

Jack up rear axle .............................................. 358

Jack up the front wheel .................................... 357

Jacking up the machine.................................... 357

Jobs on the machine .......................................... 19

K

Keep cabin free of chemicals ............................. 25

Keys in the title bar ........................................... 115

L

Labelling ............................................................. 60

Ladder lighting .................................................... 82

Lashing points .................................................. 207

Leaving Home function....................................... 82

LED display on KRONE SmartConnect ........... 343

LED displays on the control units ..................... 343

LED flash response .......................................... 343

Life-threatening electric shock from overhead lines

........................................................................... 26

Light control unit ................................................. 78

Lighting ............................................................... 78

Lighting and labelling........................................ 155

Lighting for refuelling .......................................... 83

Liquids under high pressure ............................... 27

Locking screws on the gearboxes .................... 246

Lubricants ......................................................... 314

Lubricate the intermediate gear........................ 307

Lubricating grease .............................................. 66

Lubricating universal shafts .............................. 306

Lubrication chart - machine .............................. 308

394

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Index 30

M

Machine Description ........................................... 59

Machine overview............................................... 59

Main battery switch........................................... 204

Main menu................................................ 128, 378

Main mode switch............................................... 91

Maintain main gearbox of side mounted mowers

......................................................................... 334

Maintaining a charge ........................................ 324

Maintaining air conditioning and heating .......... 265

Maintaining belt drives.............................. 271, 278

Maintaining chassis .......................................... 270

Maintaining hydraulic oil tank ........................... 319

Maintaining input gearbox of front mounted mower

......................................................................... 332

Maintaining main gearbox of front mounted mower

......................................................................... 333

Maintaining starter ............................................ 327

Maintaining the rear axle with front wheel drive

version .............................................................. 364

Maintaining transfer gearbox ............................ 330

Maintaining tyres and wheels ........................... 273

Maintaining wheel hub gearbox........................ 335

Maintaining wheel hub gearbox front/right ....... 335

Maintenance – 6 times after every 10 hours .... 237

Maintenance – After the season....................... 237

Maintenance - as required................................ 243

Maintenance – at the beginning of the cold season

......................................................................... 238

Maintenance – Basic Machine ......................... 264

Maintenance – Before the season.................... 236

Maintenance – Central Lubrication System...... 310

Maintenance – Electrics ................................... 323

Maintenance - Engine ...................................... 247

Maintenance - every 1,000 hours but at least at the

end of the season ............................................. 242

Maintenance – Every 1,000 hours, but at least

before the season............................................. 242

Maintenance - Every 10 hours, but at least once a

day.................................................................... 238

Maintenance - every 100 hours ........................ 240

Maintenance – Every 2 years ........................... 243

Maintenance – Every 2,000 hours.................... 243

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Maintenance - every 250 hours ........................ 240

Maintenance - Every 50 hours ......................... 239

Maintenance - Every 500 hours ....................... 240

Maintenance - Gearbox .................................... 329

Maintenance - General Information .................. 235

Maintenance - Hydraulic System...................... 318

Maintenance - Lubrication ................................ 305

Maintenance – mowing units ............................ 277

Maintenance - once after 1 hour ...................... 237

Maintenance – Once after 1,000 km ................ 238

Maintenance - Once after 50 hours .................. 237

Maintenance – Once after 500 hours ............... 238

Maintenance and repair work ............................. 29

Maintenance lighting .......................................... 83

Maintenance table ............................................ 236

Malfunction, Cause and Remedy ............. 337, 387

Malfunctions indicated on display....................... 98

Malfunctions indicated on malfunction warning

panel................................................................. 113

Manual settings ................................................ 219

Manually setting the evaporator fan speed ........ 97

Means of representation..................................... 12

Menu "key test" explanation ............................. 144

Menu structure ................................................. 134

Metric thread screws with control thread .......... 243

Metric thread screws with countersunk head and

hexagon socket ................................................ 245

Metric thread screws with fine thread ............... 244

Monitor for camera monitoring ......................... 164

Mounting fire extinguisher ................................ 146

Mounting guard cloths ...................................... 146

Mounting licence plate...................................... 146

Mounting location ..................................... 346, 349

Mounting the anti-twist lock on the lighting module

......................................................................... 153

Mounting the cross conveyor ........................... 185

Mounting the side mounted mowers ................ 174

Mounting the standard swathing ...................... 180

Moving front mounted mower into the central

position ............................................................. 209

Moving support jack into support position ........ 217

Moving support jack into transport position ...... 216

395

30 Index

N

Navigating in menus ......................................... 141

Navigation module............................................ 104

Navigation scroll wheel..................................... 105

Noise may damage your health.......................... 26

Notes with information and recommendations ... 14

Notices on driving the machine ........................ 197

O

Observing warning lights .................................. 195

Oil level inspection and oil change on the cutter

bar .................................................................... 296

Oils ..................................................................... 65

Öl wechseln ...................................................... 336

Ölstand kontrollieren ........................................ 335

On-board instructors when using the machine for

work (passenger seat) ........................................ 19

Only perform work when the machine is at

standstill ............................................................. 28

Opening doors and windows of cabin ................ 69

Opening right side window ................................. 69

Opening the cabin door ...................................... 70

Operate input window....................................... 106

Operating air-cushioned comfort seat (for

"ACTIVO" version)............................................ 158

Operating air-cushioned comfort seat (for

"Standard" version)........................................... 156

Operating driver's seat (for ACTIVO version)... 158

Operating elements on control lever .................. 87

Operating mowers ............................................ 210

Operating support jack ..................................... 216

Operation.................................................. 208, 378

Operation alphanumeric input field................... 117

Operation is only allowed after proper start-up .. 19

Operational safety: Technically sound condition 19

Overview of actuators....................................... 341

Overview of automatic climate control................ 93

Overview of control units .................................. 337

Overview of fuses ............................................. 337

Overview of gearboxes..................................... 329

Overview of operating elements ......................... 69

Overview sensors ............................................. 341

P

Parking the machine......................................... 205

Parking the machine safely ................................ 24

Passengers ........................................................ 19

Performing a visual inspection ......................... 322

Personal protective equipment ........................... 22

Personnel qualification of the operating personnel

........................................................................... 17

Personnel qualification of the technicians .......... 18

PowerSplit ........................................................ 217

Preparing the machine for road travel .............. 191

Preparing the machine for shipment ................ 207

Pressure limiting valves.................................... 318

Q

Quick-stop switch ............................................... 92

396

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Index 30

R

Raised machine and machine parts ................... 29

Re-adjust the transport lock ............................. 275

Reasonably foreseeable misuse ........................ 16

Recovering the Machine................................... 205

Refrigerant (air conditioning) .............................. 67

Refuelling ......................................................... 252

Release the parking brake manually ................ 206

Removing and mounting swath flaps right/left.. 225

Removing the batteries .................................... 326

Removing the machine wheels ........................ 207

Renaming surface ............................................ 119

Re-ordering ........................................................ 11

Repairs, maintenance and settings by technicians

......................................................................... 355

Replacing batteries........................................... 325

Replacing the shear bolt at the rotary hub ....... 288

Replacing/cleaning circulation filter .................. 268

Replacing/cleaning fresh air filter ..................... 268

Restart the friction clutch .................................. 302

Retighten wheel nuts ........................................ 274

Road safety ........................................................ 23

Road travel lighting............................................. 79

Rotary hub ........................................................ 287

Running actuator test ......................................... 32

S

Safety ................................................................. 16

Safety features ................................................... 54

Safety labels on the machine ............................. 32

Safety markings on the machine ........................ 23

Safety routines ................................................... 31

Save cutting height 1 and cutting height 2 ....... 220

Saving mower relief 1 and mower relief 2 ........ 221

Saving speed for operation with cruise control. 198

Scope of the document ...................................... 12

Searching for the error in the central lubrication

system .............................................................. 317

Securing raised machine and machine parts

against lowering ................................................. 31

Selection window.............................................. 107

Sensor M12 ...................................................... 356

Sensor M18 ...................................................... 356

Service life of the machine ................................. 17

Set conditioner speed....................................... 223

Setting cabin temperature .................................. 95

Setting cutting height ........................................ 220

Setting driver’s seat .......................................... 155

Setting in the terminal....................................... 219

Setting mirror ...................................................... 84

Setting swath width .......................................... 225

Setting the acceleration behaviour ................... 196

Setting the anti-collision mirror ........................... 85

Setting the auger speed ................................... 229

Setting the conditioner speed ........................... 228

Setting the degree of conditioning ............ 224, 231

Setting the lifting height at the front mounted

mower............................................................... 366

Setting the mower relief.................................... 221

Setting the sensors........................................... 356

Setting the terminal .......................................... 163

Setting wide spreading ............................. 224, 232

Setting wide spreading sheet ........................... 233

Settings ............................................................ 219

Settings on front mounted mower .................... 222

Settings on the side mounted mowers ............. 226

Shutting down and safeguarding the machine ... 31

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 397

30 Index

SMV emblem ...................................................... 56

Sockets............................................................. 100

Sources of danger on the machine .................... 26

Starting and stopping surface counter.............. 121

Starting engine ................................................. 193

Starting intermediate lubrication ....................... 317

Starting up the machine ................................... 196

Start-up..................................................... 154, 376

STAT ................................................................ 344

Status line......................................................... 110

Steering column adjustment ............................. 162

Steering column switch ...................................... 72

Stopping machine by using control lever.......... 200

Stopping machine with the service brake ......... 201

Stopping the machine....................................... 199

Storage ............................................................. 368

Structural modifications on the machine ............ 18

Sun visor .......................................................... 165

Switching air conditioning mode on/off ............... 96

Switching and saving working lights via “Memory”

key ...................................................................... 81

Switching direction indicators on/off ................... 73

Switching full beam on/off .................................. 74

Switching mirror heating on/off ........................... 86

Switching off the engine ................................... 203

Switching on automatic climate control .............. 94

Switching parking light/dipped beam on/off ........ 73

Switching REHEAT mode on/off ........................ 96

Switching temperature display between degrees

Celsius and degrees Fahrenheit ........................ 98

Switching the flashing warning light on/off ......... 77

Switching the mower drive on and off .............. 212

Switching windshield wipers on/off ..................... 75

T

Target group of this document ........................... 11

Technical Data ................................................... 62

Technical limit values ......................................... 20

Technically sound state of the machine ............. 19

Tensioning/detensioning the auger drive belt drive

......................................................................... 282

Tensioning/detensioning the conditioner drive belt

tension front mounted mower ........................... 280

Term “machine” .................................................. 12

Terminal ........................................................... 102

Terminal – Menus............................................. 134

Terminal machine functions ............................. 109

Tighten the screw connections on the central

support/chassis ................................................ 274

Tightening torques............................................ 243

Topping up engine oil ....................................... 250

Topping up fresh water..................................... 167

Topping up the engine coolant ......................... 257

Topping up urea solution .................................. 254

Toxic exhaust gases........................................... 27

Traction drive indicator lights............................ 130

Transport position............................................. 191

Tyres................................................................... 68

U

Unsuitable consumables .................................... 24

Urea filter .......................................................... 253

USB connection................................................ 101

V

Validity ................................................................ 11

Vent friction clutch ............................................ 302

Vent fuel filter ................................................... 255

Viewing current surface data ............................ 121

398

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

W

Warning beacons ............................................... 81

Warning lights..................................................... 76

Warning lights - Filling level urea tank.............. 113

Warning lights for engine displays and fuel levels

......................................................................... 130

Warning signs..................................................... 13

Warnings of property damage/environmental

damage .............................................................. 14

Waste disposal ................................................. 371

Wheel chocks ................................................... 203

Wi-Fi ................................................................. 345

Wiper on left/on right .......................................... 84

Working at or on heights of the machine ............ 29

Working lights ..................................................... 80

Working position ............................................... 208

Index 30

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 399

This page has been left blank deliberately.

400

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en

Declaration of conformity 31

31 Declaration of conformity

EC Declaration of Conformity

We

Maschinenfabrik Krone Beteiligungs-GmbH

Heinrich-Krone-Straße 10, D-48480 Spelle hereby declare, as manufacturer of the product named below, under our sole responsibility, that the

Machine:

Type:

Self-Propelled Mower Conditioner

BM105-14 to which this declaration refers is in compliance with the following relevant provisions:

• EU Directive 2014/30/EU (EMC) The harmonised standard EN ISO 14982:2009 has been applied in accordance with the directive.

• EC Directive 2006/42/EC (Machinery)

The undersigned Managing Director is authorised to compile the technical documents.

Spelle, 01/0

8

/201

7

Year of manufacture:

Dr.-Ing. Josef Horstmann

(Managing Director, Design & Development)

Machine no.:

BiG M 450 CV

Original Operating Instructions 150000762_03_en 401

Maschinenfabrik

Bernard Krone GmbH & Co. KG

* Heinrich-Krone-Straße 10

D-48480 Spelle

* Postfach 11 63

D-48478 Spelle

' +49 (0) 59 77 / 935-0

6 +49 (0) 59 77 / 935-339

ü

www.landmaschinen.krone.de

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

advertisement

Table of contents